corpus christi service center - barcombarcom.cc › ... ›...

PROJ ECT MANUAL

FOR THE

CORPUS CHRISTI SERVICE CENTER 6024 CROSSTOWN SH #286

CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78417

April 27, 2017

PREPARED FOR

AEP TEXAS CENTRAL COMPANY 1 RIVERSIDE PLAZA

COLUMBUS, OHIO 43215

PREPARED BY

5001 SPRING VALLEY ROAD, SUITE 225E

DALLAS, TEXAS 75244 972-503-3475

HENDERSON ENGINEERS

MEP&FP ENGINEERS 15851 NORTH DALLAS PARKWAY, SUITE 240

DALLAS, TEXAS 75001 972-386-6888

DATUM ENGINEERS STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 6516 FOREST PARK ROAD

DALLAS, TEXAS 75235 214-358-0174

SSP DESIGN, LLC

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT 789 WASHINGTON STREET

BROWNSVILLE, TEXAS 78520 956-547-9788

URBAN ENGINEERING CIVIL ENGINEERS

2725 SWANTNER DRIVE CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78404

361-854-3101

BIDDING AND PERMIT DOCUMENTS VOLUME 1 – DIVISIONS 00 THROUGH 22

This page intentionally blank

American Electric Power TOC - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 Cover Sheet Table of Contents Certification Pages DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Instructions to Bidders Exhibit ITB1: Bid Form Exhibit ITB2: Contractor’s Safety Qualification Form Exhibit ITB3: Sample Contract Letter AEP General Terms and Conditions for Engineering, Procurement and Construction Work General Project Requirements Affidavit of Completion 00 31 32 Geotechnical Investigations 00 31 32.16 Sitework Laboratory Testing Schedule DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 31 00 Management and Coordination 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 16 Construction Schedule 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services 01 73 00 Execution Requirements 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 74 00 Cleaning 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management And Disposal 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 10 01 Concrete Formwork (Civil Sitework) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing And Embedded Metal Assemblies 03 20 01 Concrete Reinforcement (Civil Sitework) 03 30 02 Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete (Civil Sitework) 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 47 13 Precast Concrete Tilt-Up Panels DIVISION 04 - MASONRY


04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 31 13 Steel Floor Decking and Shear Studs 05 31 23 Steel Roof Decking 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 50 Wood Blocking 06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 07 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 20 00 Roof Insulation 07 24 19 Exterior Insulation and Finish System 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 07 42 44 Metal Composite Materials 07 52 16 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07 54 23 Thermoplastic Polyolefin Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 84 00 Fire Stopping 07 92 00 Sealants DIVISION 08 - DOORS & WINDOWS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 00 Wood Doors 08 16 13 Fiberglass Doors 08 33 23 Coiling Overhead Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 43 14 Interior Aluminum Storefront 08 71 10 Finish Hardware 08 81 00 Glass and Glazing 08 91 19 Fixed Louvers DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Systems 09 30 00 Tile 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 65 66 Resilient Athletic Flooring 09 68 00 Carpeting 09 91 00 Painting 09 96 53 Elastomeric Coatings


DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 21 13 Metal Toilet Compartments 10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions 10 22 19 Demountable Partitions 10 22 26 Folding Panel Partitions 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10 51 13 Metal Lockers 10 75 00 Flag Pole 10 88 00 Floor Scales DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 13 00 Loading Dock Equipment 11 31 00 Residential Appliances 11 46 83 Ice Making Equipment 11 53 56 Stainless Steel Countertops DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 93 13 Bicycle Racks DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 Pre-Engineered Metal Building System DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 45 00 Vehicle Lift 14 60 00 Hoists and Cranes

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 00 10 General Fire Suppression Requirements 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 05 15 Basic Fire Suppression Piping Methods and Materials 21 05 53 Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment 21 11 00 Fire Suppression Water Service Piping 21 11 10 Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems 21 13 13 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 00 10 General Plumbing Requirements 22 00 15 Coordination 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing


22 05 15 Basic Piping Materials and Methods 22 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping 22 05 33 Heat Tracing For Plumbing Piping 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping & Equipment 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 22 08 00 Commissioning Plumbing Systems 22 11 00 Water Distribution Piping & Specialties 22 13 00 Sanitary Drainage & Vent Piping & Specialties 22 14 00 Storm Drainage Piping & Specialties 22 15 00 General Service Compressed Air Systems 22 33 00 Electric Domestic Water Heaters 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures

VOLUME 2 Cover Sheet Table of Contents DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONG 23 00 10 General Mechanical Requirements 23 00 15 Coordination 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 10 Basic Piping Materials and Methods 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 14 Variable Frequency Drives 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 50 Vibration Isolation for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVACR Systems 23 09 15 Vehicle Emissions Monitoring Systems 23 09 23 Direct-Digital Control for HVAC 23 10 13 Vehicle Fuel Dispensing Equipment 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 13 Axial HVAC Fans 23 34 16 Centrifugal HVAC Fans 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers & Grilles 23 37 23 HVAC Gravity Ventilators 23 38 13 Commercial Kitchen Hoods 23 41 00 Particulate Air Filtration


23 74 13 Outdoor Packaged Heating and Cooling Units 23 81 23 Computer Room Air-Conditioners 23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioners 23 85 00 Electric Heating Units

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 00 10 General Electrical Requirements 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 02 Equipment Wiring Systems 26 05 04 Provisions for Electrical Utility Service 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 26 08 00 Commissioning Electrical Systems 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers 26 24 13 Switchboards 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 32 13 Packaged Engine-Driven Generators 26 36 00 Transfer Switches 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 10 Special Systems DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 20 00 Site Excavation 31 23 00 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 13 Rough Grading 31 23 17 Trenching 31 23 23 Fill 31 25 13 Storm Water Pollution Prevention 31 32 15 Lime Soil Stabilization 31 63 29 Drilled Piers


DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Coursed 32 11 33.13 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 32 12 13.19 Prime Coat 32 12 16 Hot Mix-Hot Laid Asphaltic Concrete Pavement 33 12 19 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 32 80 00 Irrigation 32 90 00 Planting 32 92 00 Lawns 32 92 19 Seeding DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 05 13 Manholes And Structures 33 11 16 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 33 12 16 Water Utility Distribution Valves 33 31 00 Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 33 49 13 Storm Sewer Manholes

END OF DOCUMENT

American Electric Power Corpus Christi Service Center CERTIFICATIONS PAGE

CERTIFICATIONS PAGE

The sealed and undersigned certifies the preparatio n of the following specifications sections.

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION 210010 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210515 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING METHODS AND MATERIALS 210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 211100 FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER SERVICE PIPING 211110 CLEAN AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 211313 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS DIVISION 28 – SECURITY AND FIRE ALARM 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS


CERTIFICATIONS PAGE

The sealed and undersigned certifies the preparatio n of the following specifications sections. DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220010 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220015 COORDINATION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220515 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 220519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION 221100 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING & SPECIALTIES 221300 SANITARY DRAINAGE & VENT PIPING & SPECIALTIES 221400 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING & SPECIALTIES 221500 GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 223300 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITI ONING 230010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230015 COORDINATION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230510 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230514 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230550 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230700 HVAC INSULATION 230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 230915 VEHICLE EMISSIONS MONITORING SYSTEMS 230923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 233113 METAL DUCTS 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233413 AXIAL HVAC FANS 233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS & GRILLES 233723 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 233813 COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS 234100 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 237413 OUTDOOR PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 238123 COMPUTER ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 238500 ELECTRIC HEATING UNITS


CERTIFICATIONS PAGE

The sealed and undersigned certifies the preparatio n of the following specifications sections.

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260502 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260504 PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICE 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262413 SWITCHBOARDS 262416 PANELBOARDS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262813 FUSES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 263213 PACKAGED ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATORS 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING


CERTIFICATIONS PAGE

The sealed and undersigned certifies the preparation of the following specifications sections.

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 10 SPECIAL SYSTEMS


CERTIFICATIONS PAGE

The sealed and undersigned certifies the preparation of the following specifications sections. DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 80 00 IRRIGATION 32 90 00 PLANTING 32 92 00 LAWNS

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: SSP Design – SMR Landscape Architecture 789 East Washington Street Brownsville, Texas 78520 956.547.9788

4-27-17

ITB ITB-1

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.0 SUMMARY

A. Work specified in this Section includes: 1. Bidding Requirements. 2. Bidding Documents. 3. Bidding Precautions. 4. Scope of Work. 5. Project Schedule. 6. Pre-Bid Conference. 7. Submission of Bids. 8. Contract Award.

1.1 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

A. The project is being bid through General Contractors by invitation only. Contact the Project Architect as shown below to request approval to bid this project and to obtain bidding documents. 1. Subcontractors and material suppliers shall obtain bidding documents through an

invited General Contractor that is bidding the project.

B. Direct all technical questions during bid period to:

Andre Gray Moody Nolan, Inc.

5001 Spring Valley Road, Suite 225E Dallas, Texas 75244

Tel: (214) 337-8662 X-202 E-mail: [email protected]

C. Direct all bid procedure questions during bid period to:

David A. Rinaldi, NCARB American Electric Power

1 Riverside Plaza Columbus, Ohio 43215

Tel: (614) 716-6854 E-mail: [email protected]

D. Bid, labor, performance and material bonds are not required on this project. E. Prevailing wage rates and liquidated damages do not apply to this project. F. Bidders and their consultants and subcontractors must visit and thoroughly inspect the

site and its surroundings as required to verify existing conditions and how they affect Contractor’s actual scope of work required.

mailto:[email protected]�

ITB ITB-2

1. Include in bid, all items of Work that are in evidence at the site that are required to successfully complete the scope of work indicated whether specifically indicated or not.

G. Notify Owner in writing prior to bid date (or assume responsibility for) if any information

given to bidders is in error or is insufficient to properly bid or construct any of the scope of work indicated. Such notifications must be received by Owner in writing no later than 10 days prior to Bid Date.

H. Contractor will not be given extra compensation for any condition that can be

determined by thoroughly and carefully examining Site and documents. I. Owner will not be responsible for oral instructions, decisions or other information given

to Bidders by any of its employees, consultants or contractors. 1.2 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

A. Bidder shall include all information contained in the following Bidding Documents in preparing its bid: 1. This Project Manual dated April 27, 2017. 2. AEP’s “General Terms and Conditions for Engineering, Procurement and

Construction Work” dated March 2009 (Rev. 3), dated 6/14, 3. Owner’s Drawings dated April 27, 2017 including: 4. Geotechnical Engineering Report dated April 20, 2017, 5. Bid Form, 6. Contractor Safety Qualification Form* * To be completed for all companies with 25 or more employees. 7. Addenda (as applicable), and 8. Pre-Bid Conference Minutes.

B. Bidding Documents are located at the following site: 1. http://mnfs.moodynolan.com

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Overall Project Scope: Work includes providing all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to properly complete the scope of work indicated and as required by the Bidding Documents including: 1. Permits, inspections and approvals. 2. Temporary facilities including supervision. 3. Sitework including civil engineering, earthwork, site utilities, paving and other site

improvements. 4. Building(s) including all required structural, mechanical and electrical systems.

1.4 PROJECT SCHEDULE

A. The following is a summary of important project schedule dates. 1. April 27, 2017: Owner issues Bidding Documents. 2. May 4, 2017: Pre-Bid Conference @ 9:00 AM. 3. May 18, 2017: Bids due @ 2:00 PM (central time). 4. June 8, 2017: Owner issues Contract or Notice To Proceed.

ITB ITB-3

5. July 15, 2018: Date of Project Substantial Completion. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors must properly man the project and shall include all

costs in its bid to Owner to provide all required additional manpower, overtime, quick-ship costs, etc. necessary to meet the agreed upon completion date.

1.5 PRE-BID CONFERENCE

A. A pre-bid conference will be held on May 4, 2017 at 9:00 AM local time at the following address. The bidding requirements and the project scope of work will be reviewed at this meeting.

Corpus Christi Home Office

539 N. Carancahua 2nd Floor, Room L

Corpus Christi, TX 78401 B. Owner may consider Bidder to be non-responsive if it fails to attend the Pre-Bid

Conference. 1.6 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

A. General Requirements: 1. Bid Due Date/Time: Bids must be received by Owner on or before May 18, 2017

at 2:00 PM (central time). 2. Type of Contract: Bids shall be for a firm lump sum that includes all Work

indicated unless noted otherwise. 3. Bid Forms: Bids shall be submitted on Bid Forms provided by or identical to

those provided by Owner. 4. Bid Submission: Bid Forms may be submitted to Owner in any of the following

ways: a. Mail/Courier: Submit to the following address prior to bid due date and

time. b. Hand Delivery: Deliver to the following address prior to bid due date and

time. c. Electronically. Electronic bids shall be submitted to the following e-mail

address: [email protected]. 5. Hard copies shall be submitted to Mr. Matthew Forshey at the following address:

Mr. Matthew W. Forshey

Workplace Projects & Business Services Manager American Electric Power Service Corporation

1 Riverside Plaza Columbus, Ohio 43215

6. All bids are valid for a period of 30 days after the Bid Date.

B. The following item(s) need to be submitted with each of the Contractor’s Bids:

1. Bid Form only.

ITB ITB-4

C. The following item(s) need to be followed on the same day with a hard copy submission to Mr. Forshey at the preceding address: 1. An original signed copy of the Bidder’s Bid Form. 2. A completed copy of the Bidder’s Exhibit E2 Contractor’s Safety Qualification

Form. 3. A current signed copy of Bidder’s Federal W9 Form.

1.7 CONTRACT AWARD

A. If the total of the bid does not exceed the Owner’s available funds, it is the Owner’s current intent to award the Contract on the basis of the lowest responsive, responsible and best-evaluated bid including giving full consideration of all information included in the Bid Forms including price, mark-ups, completeness of Bid Form, Contractor’s safety record, experience of Contractor’s personnel and Subcontractors assigned to the project, project schedule and compliance with project requirements.

B. Contractors will be contacted during the bid evaluation for any required clarification of

their bids. C. Bids submitted by the apparent low bidder(s) will be reviewed in detail by Owner at

post-bid meetings that normally takes place about one week after the bid due date. D. No bid evaluation information will be available until successful Contractor is selected

and the contract has been prepared and signed by both parties. This process normally takes about 3 weeks.

E. Please do not contact any local Owner personnel regarding status of the award of

contract during bid evaluation. F. Owner reserves right to accept or reject any bid, parts of any bids or bidder, to waive

any informalities in the bidding process or to negotiate Contract terms with any bidder or bidders without obligation, when such is deemed by Owner to be in its best interest.

END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

ITB1-1

EXHIBIT ITB1 BID FORM

______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ (Bidders Name and Address) ______________________________ (Bid Date) Mr. Mathew W. Forshey Workplace Projects & Business Services Manager AEP Service Corporation 1 Riverside Plaza Columbus, Ohio 43215 Re: Corpus Christi Service Center

6024 Crosstown SH #286 Corpus Christi, Texas 78417

Dear Mr.Forshey: We have received the Project Manual and Drawings dated April 27, 2017 for the above referenced Project. We have carefully examined and are thoroughly familiar with both the documents and Site. We have also received the following Addenda and have included their provisions in our bid: Addendum Number Addendum Date __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________

In submitting this bid we agree: 1. To enter into and execute a Contract, if awarded on basis of this bid. 2. To accomplish Work following Contract Documents; and 3. To complete Work by date stipulated in Contract.

ITB1-2

ITEM 1: BASE BID (ALL WORK INDICATED)

___________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________ ( $ ________________________________)

ITEM 2: BASE BID LABOR AND MATERIAL COST BREAKDOWNS (ITEM 1 LUMP SUM INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING LABOR AND MATERIAL COST BREAKDOWNS)

ITEM LABOR MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT A. Site Work (all Work 5 FT $ _______________________ $ ______________________ outside of main building) B. General $ _______________________ $ ______________________ C. Fire Protection $ _______________________ $ ______________________ D. Plumbing $ _______________________ $ ______________________ E. HVAC $ _______________________ $ ______________________ F. Electrical $ _______________________ $ ______________________ G. Subtotals $ _______________________ $ ______________________ H. Base Bid Total $ _______________________________________________

ITEM 3: ALLOWABLE MARKUPS FOR EXTRA WORK OR PREMIUM TIME WORK

(SEE DESCRIPTION OF MARKUPS IN GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS) A. GENERAL: The following percentages shall establish Contractor's maximum allowable

markups for extra or premium time work performed under lump sum or cost-plus proposals by both its own forces and by its subcontractors. No additional markups of any kind shall be applied to such work. These markups are applicable throughout entire Contract Time.

1. These markups shall include all project related Office Costs and Field Costs. See

Definitions in General Project Requirements. B. LABOR: Contractor shall be entitled to add the following markup for overhead and profit

to the billable labor rate of its own labor required to perform straight time extra or premium time extra work. No additional markups shall be applied to such work.

1. Straight Time Overhead and Profit: ________________________________%

ITB1-3

2. Premium Time Overhead and Profit: ________________________________% C. MATERIALS: Contractor shall be entitled to add the following percent markup to actual

invoice cost of its additional materials required to perform extra or premium time work. This markup shall be applied to additional work only and shall not be deducted from credits to AEP. No additional markups shall be applied to such work.

1. Material Mark-Up: ________________________________%

D. EQUIPMENT: Cost of equipment required to perform extra or premium time work shall

not exceed their previously approved equipment rates. E. SUBCONTRACTED WORK: Contractor shall be entitled to add the following markup to

total labor and material cost of all extra or premium time work performed by its Subcontractors. This markup shall be applied to additional work only and shall not be deducted from credits to AEP. Exception: Contractor will not be allowed to apply this markup to approved additional costs of its Subcontractors due to authorized delays in the Project unless the delay was the direct result of an AEP act or its failure to act.

1. Subcontractor Mark-Up: ________________________________%

ITEM 4: SUBCONTRACTORS (IF AWARDED THE CONTRACT, WE INTEND TO EMPLOY THE FOLLOWING SUBCONTRACTORS):

A. Fire Protection: _________________________________________________________ B. Plumbing: _____________________________________________________________ C. HVAC: ________________________________________________________________ D. Electrical: _____________________________________________________________

ITEM 5: CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (IF AWARDED THE CONTRACT, WE WILL COMPLETE WORK BASED UPON THE FOLLOWING PROGRESS DATES)

A. Award Contract: On or about June 8, 2017. B. Construction Substantially Complete: July 15, 2018.

ITEM 6: QUALIFICATIONS, ASSUMPTIONS/EXCLUSIONS/SUBSTITUTIONS (OUR BID CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING QUALIFICATIONS, ASSUMPTIONS, EXCLUSIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.

LIST IF ANY; WRITE “NONE” IF NOT APPLICABLE.) ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________

ITB1-4

___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ Respectfully submitted, _________________________________ (SIGNATURE) _________________________________ (TITLE) _________________________________ (NAME OF COMPANY) _________________________________ (DATE) _________________________________ (STATE OF INCORPORATION)

END OF BID FORM

ITB2-1

EXHIBIT ITB2 CONTRACTOR SAFETY QUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE

1. USING YOUR PAST THREE YEAR’S OSHA NO. 300 LOGS, PROVIDE THE

FOLLOWING INFORMATION OR SUBMIT COPIES OF YOUR OSHA NO. 300 JOBS FOR THE PAST THREE YEARS. ELECTRONIC COPIES ARE AVAILABLE ON REQUEST.

YEAR 2014 2015 2016

a. Number of Lost Workday cases ______ ______ ______ (Injuries involving days away from work) b. Number of Restricted Workday cases ______ ______ ______ c. Number of cases with Medical Treatment Only ______ ______ ______ d. Number of Fatalities ______ ______ ______ e. Employee Hrs worked for each of last three years ______ ______ ______ f. Interstate experience modification rate ______ ______ ______ g. Incidence rate – Lost Workdays ______ ______ ______ h. Incidence rate – OSHA Recordable ______ ______ ______ i. OSHA Citations/Penalties or summary (furnish copies) ______ ______ ______

2. Do you have and enforce a disciplinary program for willful or repeated violations of

safety rules? __________

a. If yes, please attach copy of form/letter and copies of any violation written to employees in past 12 months

3. Do you have an accident/incident investigation and reporting procedure? ___________

a. If yes, please attach the details and forms used. 4. Do you conduct and document safety training for field supervisors? ________________

a. If yes, at what frequency do you have them? _____________________________ 5. Do you conduct and document “Toolbox” safety meetings? _______________________

a. If yes, how do you ensure that the toolbox safety meetings are conducted?

__________________________________________________________________ 6. Do you conduct and document job site safety inspections? _______________________

ITB2-2

a. If yes, at what frequency do you have them? _____________________________

7. Are the workers in special job positions qualified and certified as appropriate? ________ 8. Does the company have a written safety policy? ______________________________ 9. Does the company have written operating rules and procedures and is safety included?

______________________________________________________________________ 10. Does the contractor perform special inspections on equipment and tools, i.e., hoists,

cranes, chains to slings, and scaffolding, etc.? ________________________________

a. If yes, at what frequency do you have them? _____________________________ 11. When faced with special or unusual jobs, how does the contractor ensure safe

accomplishment? _______________________________________________________ 12. Is there safety indoctrination for new employees? ______________________________

END OF EXHIBIT ITB2

ITB3-1

EXHIBIT ITB3 SAMPLE CONTRACT LETTER

THIS CONTRACT No. _______________ is made between American Electric Power Service Corporation as agent for AEP Texas Inc. a Delaware corporation, (hereinafter called "Owner"), and _______________ Construction, Inc., a ____________corporation (hereinafter called "Contractor"). Subject to the terms and conditions hereof, Contractor hereby agrees to furnish all supervision, labor, equipment and specified materials necessary to perform all phases of the Work set forth for the

construction of the new Corpus Christi Service Center at Owner’s site in Corpus Christi, Texas.

1. Owner's Project Manual for the Corpus Christi Service Center dated April 27, 2017 and all referenced documents, Addenda No. 1 dated _________, 2017 and No. 2 dated __________, 2017, Pre-Bid Conference Minutes dated May 4, 2017 and Post-Bid Meeting Minutes dated __________, 2017, collectively designated Exhibit A

Contractor and Owner agree that the Work will be performed in accordance with:

which are attached hereto and made a part hereof; and

2. Contractor's Bid Form dated May 18, 2017, and Bid Clarification Letter dated __________, 2017, collectively designated Exhibit B

which are attached hereto and made a part hereof.

In the event of any conflict among any of the Contract documents, the conflict shall be resolved by interpreting the documents in the following order of priority: 1. This Contract Letter 2. Exhibit A 3. Exhibit B Work shall commence on or about June 8, 2017 and shall be completed on or before July 15, 2018. In consideration of the performance of such Work by Contractor, Owner agrees to pay Contractor the firm lump sum price of _______________________________________ _______________________________ Dollars and No Cents ($_______________.00). This sum has been derived in accordance with the following: ITEM LABOR MATERIAL

TOTAL

BASE BID $____________ $____________ $____________

ITB3-2

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Contract to be signed by their respective officers thereunto duly authorized as of the date set forth below. AMERICAN ELECTRIC POWER SERVICE CORPORATION, as agent for AEP TEXAS CENTRAL COMPANY By: ___________________________________________________ Lana L. Hillebrand EVP & Chief Administrative Officer American Electric Power Service Corporation Accepted this ___________day of _______________________ 2017. __________________________________ CONSTRUCTION, INC. By: ___________________________________________________ Title: __________________________________________________

06/14 Rev. 3

AMERICAN ELECTRIC POWER

AEP GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR ENGINEERING, PROCUREMENT AND CONSTRUCTION WORK

March 2009 Rev. 3 dated 6/14

06/14 Rev. 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARTICLE NO. HEADING PAGE NO. 1.0 DEFINITIONS 1 2.0 CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS 2 3.0 TERM AND EFFECTIVE DATE 3 4.0 RELATIONSHIP OF THE PARTIES 3 5.0 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING 3 6.0 LABOR RELATIONS 4 7.0 SAFETY AND SECURITY 4 8.0 EQUIPMENT 7 9.0 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE 8 10.0 SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY 9 11.0 TITLE AND RISK OF LOSS 9 12.0 SCHEDULE 9 13.0 TERMS OF PAYMENT 10 14.0 CHANGES IN WORK AND EXTRA WORK 10 15.0 REIMBURSEMENT FOR COST-PLUS WORK 11 16.0 BACKCHARGES 12 17.0 TAXES 12 18.0 INSURANCE 13 19.0 INDEMNIFICATION 15 20.0 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 16 21.0 LIENS 16 22.0 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 16 23.0 DRAWINGS AND DATA 17 24.0 CONFIDENTIALITY 17 25.0 DEFAULT 18 26.0 DAMAGES FOR DELAY 18 27.0 FORCE MAJEURE 19 28.0 SUSPENSION 19 29.0 TERMINATION 20 30.0 EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY 20 31.0 REPORTING OF COMPLAINTS 21 32.0 RETENTION AND EXAMINATION OF INFORMATION, BOOKS AND RECORDS 21 33.0 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS 22 34.0 PERMITS AND LICENSES 22 35.0 NOTICES 22 36.0 SEVERABILITY 22 37.0 WAIVER 23 38.0 NON-DISCLOSURE 23 39.0 HEADINGS 23 40.0 AFFILIATED COMPANIES 23 41.0 APPLICABLE LAWS AND JURISDICTION 23 42.0 ENTIRE AGREEMENT 24 43.0 BINDING EFFECT; NO THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES 24 44.0 EXECUTION; COUNTERPARTS; ELECTRONIC SIGNATURES 24 45.0 SURVIVAL 24 AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLETION Exhibit 1

06/14 Rev. 3

AEP GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR ENGINEERING, PROCUREMENT AND CONSTRUCTION WORK 1.0 DEFINITIONS Subject to additional definitions contained in subsequent Articles, capitalized terms used in these General Terms and Conditions for Engineering, Procurement and Construction Work have the meanings set forth below:

1.1 Business Day: “Business Day” means any calendar day, other than a Saturday or Sunday or a calendar day on which U.S. commercial banking institutions are authorized or required by law to close.

1.2 Change Order: “Change Order” means a written order as defined and issued in accordance with

Article 14.0. 1.3 Contract: “Contract” means collectively the Contracting Instrument and all documents referenced in

the Contracting Instrument and any Change Orders, amendments or addenda. 1.4 Contract Price: “Contract Price” means the price to be paid to the Contractor for the performance of Work as set forth in the Contracting Instrument.

1.5 Contracting Instrument: “Contracting Instrument” means the contractual document that identifies the

parties, the nature of the Work, the Contract Price, documents to be included as part of a Contract, and other matters relating to a Contract. The Contracting Instrument may be in the form of a contract letter, blanket purchase order, purchase order or other similar documents.

1.6 Contractor: “Contractor” means the entity contracting with Owner for the performance of Work. 1.7 Direct Cost: “Direct Cost” means the actual costs and charges incurred and payments made by

Contractor, its Subcontractors for Site Equipment, materials, services and labor (including payroll burden and expenses) which are directly attributable to the performance of Contractor’s Work hereunder. Direct Cost includes Contractor’s home office or Site labor to the extent Contractor’s home office or Site labor is directly assignable to the Work which must be demonstrable under the circumstances. Direct Cost shall not include corporate, general and administrative costs including home office functions, sales, marketing, accounting, human resources, information technology, payroll, profit, research, development, quality assurance and control, purchasing, safety, management, administration, warranties, insurances, offsite or other unabsorbed costs.

1.8 Equipment: “Equipment” means all goods, materials and accessories to be purchased under the

Contract, including all documentation required by the Contract. 1.9 Final Acceptance: “Final Acceptance” means Owner’s determination that the Work has been

completed in accordance with the Contract requirements.

1.10 Initial Acceptance: “Initial Acceptance” means Owner’s determination prior to final inspection and testing that the Work conforms to the Contract requirements for purposes of receipt.

1.11 Owner: “Owner” means any one or more of the companies of the American Electric Power System as

may be specified in the Contract Instrument.

1.12 Site: “Site” means Owner's property or such other premises (including adjacent bodies of water and property owned or controlled by a third-party) upon which the Work is to be performed.

06/14 Rev. 3

1.13 Subcontractor: “Subcontractor” means vendors, suppliers, consultants, and subcontractors of any tier, materialmen, professionals, laborers, and all other persons providing equipment, materials or services directly or indirectly to Contractor in connection with the Work.

1.14 Work: “Work” means all of Contractor's obligations under the Contract. 2.0 CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS 2.1 Contractor shall at its expense provide everything necessary for the complete, proper and timely

execution of the Work including, but not limited to, home office support, labor, supervision, and technical field assistance; engineering, design, construction and start-up services; safety equipment, construction equipment, temporary utilities and facilities, equipment to be installed, materials, tools and supplies; fabrication and manufacturing; transportation; drawings and documentation, unless explicitly excluded in the Contract. Contractor’s performance of the Work shall include everything requisite and necessary to comply with prudent electric utility industry standards and to complete the Work, notwithstanding the fact that every item necessarily involved may not be specifically mentioned. Details and items not indicated by the Contract documents shall be adequately and properly performed by Contractor at no extra cost if such details and items are necessary to complete the intent of the Contract or otherwise to complete the Work.

2.2 Contractor is responsible for considering the conditions affecting the Work including, but not limited

to, conditions affecting the transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials; the availability and cost of labor, water, electric power, utilities, and roads; the uncertainties of weather, river stages, and similar physical conditions at the Site; the conformation and condition of the ground; and the character of equipment and facilities needed. Contractor shall take into account the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered to the extent this information is reasonably ascertainable from the Contract documents or an inspection of the Site.

2.3 Contractor shall immediately and before such conditions are disturbed notify Owner of: (a) subsurface

or latent physical conditions at the Site which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract; (b) unusual geologic conditions at the Site which differ materially from conditions ordinarily encountered or from conditions addressed in the Contract; or (c) artifacts or articles which appear to have archaeological or historical significance. Owner shall promptly investigate such conditions and, if such conditions do materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the parties shall agree to amend the Contract. No claim of Contractor under this clause shall be allowed unless Contractor has given immediate notice as required above and confirmed such notice in writing within ten (10) days of discovery.

2.4 Contractor shall have an authorized representative at the Site to whom Owner may give instructions at

all times when Work is being performed.

2.5 Contractor shall assign qualified and competent supervision and personnel to perform the Work and have qualified and competent supervision at the Site at all times to direct and observe the Work. Key personnel shall not be removed or replaced without prior consent of Owner which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Contractor will investigate and take appropriate action with respect to any personnel problems brought to its attention by Owner.

2.6 Contractor shall confine all of its operations and personnel to those areas of the Site to which Owner

authorizes access.

2.7 Contractor's personnel may not operate Owner's tools, vehicles, materials or equipment (“Owner’s Equipment”) without Owner's prior authorization. If Contractor borrows Owner's Equipment, Contractor (a) agrees that Owner has provided the Owner’s Equipment AS IS, with no representations or warranties; (b) assumes full responsibility for the protection of the borrowed Owner’s Equipment; (c) assumes all liability for injuries or damages resulting from the use of the

06/14 Rev. 3

borrowed Owner’s Equipment; and (d) agrees to return the borrowed Owner’s Equipment to Owner in the same condition as when it was borrowed, or, if repairs are necessary, to cause such repairs to be performed promptly at Contractor’s expense before the Owner’s Equipment is returned to Owner. Owner has no obligation to lend Owner’s Equipment to Contractor.

2.8 Contractor shall cooperate with Owner and others working at or near the Site. Contractor shall

promptly report to Owner any defects in the work of others which affects the Work. Failure to report such defects constitutes acceptance of the conditions by Contractor. Contractor shall properly fit, connect and coordinate its Work with that of Owner and other contractors.

2.9 Contractor shall keep all of its work areas free from trash and debris, and keep its work areas

“broom clean” on a continuous basis.

2.10 Contractor shall secure and protect its materials, tools, equipment and the Work, including Owner’s Equipment.

2.11 As requested by Owner, Contractor shall provide Owner with periodic reports concerning the

progress of the Work.

2.12 Contractor is responsible for the proper execution of the Work with respect to any base lines and bench marks established by Owner.

2.13 If the Work is subject to prevailing wage requirements, Contractor agrees to comply with such

requirements.

2.14 Contractor, its Subcontractors, and their respective employees and agents involved in the Work shall adhere to the provisions contained in Owner’s Code of Business Conduct which can be found at Owner’s website.

3.0 TERM AND EFFECTIVE DATE 3.1 The Contract shall commence as of the effective date and, unless earlier terminated as provided in

Article 29.0, shall terminate on the termination date set forth in the Contract. Unless specified elsewhere in the Contract, the effective date of the Contract shall be the earlier of the date on which Contractor begins performance hereunder or the date of the latter signature on the Contract.

4.0 RELATIONSHIP OF THE PARTIES

4.1 Contractor and all of its employees and Subcontractors are, with respect to Owner, independent contractors. Contractor will be solely responsible for the supervision, direction, and control of its employees and Subcontractors. Contractor is responsible for the payment of all compensation, benefits, and employment taxes with respect to the Contractor’s employees.

5.0 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING 5.1 Contractor shall not assign or otherwise dispose of the Contract, or any obligations hereunder, without

the written consent of Owner. Any assignment or disposal without the written consent of Owner shall be null and void.

5.2 Prior to entering into any subcontract, Contractor shall submit to Owner a subcontractor data sheet

that includes the name and address of the Subcontractor and the scope of work proposed to be included under such subcontract. Within five Business Days of receipt of a Subcontractor data sheet, Owner may reject such Subcontractor without cost or contract extension by giving written notice of such rejection to Contractor.

06/14 Rev. 3

5.3 Contractor is responsible for the selection of any Subcontractor and for the Subcontractor's proper performance of the Work assigned to it. If the work of a Subcontractor is not in compliance with the Contract requirements, Contractor shall take immediate steps to bring the Subcontractor's work into compliance and, at Owner's written request, terminate its contractual relationship with the Subcontractor as it relates to the Work at no cost to Owner.

6.0 LABOR RELATIONS 6.1 Contractor shall comply with any project, national or local labor agreements that are applicable to the

Work or Site. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner and other contractors in establishing and maintaining labor work rules and practices.

6.2 When the Work is performed by building and construction trades labor, a pre-job conference shall be

held with local labor representatives prior to starting Work. Owner shall be afforded the opportunity to attend and participate in pre-job conferences.

6.3 Contractor shall provide immediate notice to Owner of any actual or potential labor dispute that may

delay the timely, efficient and productive performance of the Work. 6.4 Contractor shall inform and cooperate with Owner on labor matters. Contractor shall consult with

Owner prior to rendering its decision(s) on labor matters that may impact the timely, efficient and productive performance of the Work.

6.5 Contractor shall exercise its management rights contained in applicable labor agreements to establish,

maintain, and enforce work rules conducive to timely, efficient, productive and harmonious work operation. Contractor shall take the necessary steps available to resolve grievances, jurisdictional disputes, or other violations of collective bargaining agreements.

7.0 SAFETY AND SECURITY 7.1 Contractor shall perform the Work in a safe and careful manner, provide first aid facilities and

transportation, and use such safety devices and methods as are necessary to protect its employees, agents, Subcontractors, Owner's employees and agents, other contractors and the public from bodily injury and property damage.

7.2 Contractor shall comply with and enforce all laws, rules and regulations applicable to safety and

health standards, including, but not limited to, the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (“OSHA”) and any revisions of OSHA or successor legislation.

7.3 Contractor shall comply with project and Site safety and security rules and all procedures issued by

Owner, provided that such rules and procedures do not conflict with OSHA or other safety laws, rules or regulations. Contractor shall assign a competent person at all times to manage, coordinate and enforce its safety program during performance of the Work.

7.4 Contractor shall provide Owner with Material Safety Data Sheets (“MSDS”) for all applicable

materials prior to delivery to Owner's Site. 7.5 Contractor shall obtain Site permits or approval from Owner for its vehicles, any excavation, use of

explosives, access to restricted areas, use of Owner's Equipment, tools and facilities, and other similar activities.

7.6 Owner will arrange all necessary clearances on energized equipment, electrical and communications

circuits, piping systems or other operational equipment. Contractor shall notify Owner requesting the clearances prior to the scheduling of such Work. Contractor shall comply with Owner's clearance permit system regarding tagout and lockout of electrical and mechanical systems and other equipment.

06/14 Rev. 3

7.7 Contractor shall fully inform Owner in writing regarding the types, quantities and use of any

hazardous materials brought on the Site; the types and quantities of hazardous wastes being generated from the Work; and Contractor's program for proper storing, handling and disposal of such materials in a safe and secure manner.

7.8 Contractor shall immediately inform Owner of all regulatory, safety, health and environmental

inspections, citations and penalties associated with the Work. Contractor shall provide Owner with written reports and copies of all documents submitted to or by regulatory agencies and insurance companies.

7.9 Contractor shall promptly inform Owner of any injuries to its employees, agents, Subcontractors, or

other persons arising out of the Work that require medical treatment.

7.10 Contractor shall obtain, maintain, and properly complete all record keeping required by regulatory agencies. Upon request, Contractor shall provide Owner with copies of all logs, reports and other records.

7.11 Contractor shall investigate all accidents resulting in personal injury, property damage, or near misses

to determine root cause(s) and corrective action(s). Upon request, Contractor shall provide Owner with a copy of investigative reports, including all documents submitted to insurance companies.

7.12 All of Contractor’s employees, agents, Subcontractors, vehicles, trailers, etc. entering or leaving the

Site are subject to inspection at any time by Owner. 7.13 If a safety violation or other unsafe condition causes imminent danger, Owner may immediately shut

down the Work involved without advance written notice.

7.14 Contractor and all Subcontractors performing Work at the Site must have a substance abuse program. This program must apply to all personnel of Contractor and its Subcontractors. Minimum requirements of this program shall include pre-hire testing, testing for cause and if requested, random testing. Screening substances and their associated cut-off limits are listed below.

Drug Screening Cut-Off Confirmation Cut-Off Classes Limit (ng/ml) Limit (ng/ml) Amphetamines 1,000 500 Benzoylecgonine 300 150 Cannabinoids 50 15 Opiates 2,000 2,000 Phencyclidine 25 25

Blood & Breath alcohol content: .02% per Department of Transportation.

Testing shall be performed by a testing facility certified by Department of Health & Human Services. Personnel must have evidence of having tested negative within a year prior to employment. Owner will accept conditional employment predicated upon (a) employee(s) furnishing evidence that they have submitted to testing within forty-eight (48) hours of initial employment and (b) employee(s) furnishing evidence of negative test results within five (5) Business Days of initial employment. Contractor shall ensure personnel are “drug free”. Owner reserves the right to examine evidence outlined herein. Contractor’s program shall incorporate reciprocity on “drug free” employee verification to minimize Owner’s economic impact and employee(s) recertification while maintaining the program’s intent.

7.15 If required by Owner, Contractor must meet certain security criteria set forth herein.

06/14 Rev. 3

7.15.1 Contractor shall submit to Owner a copy of its background investigation process for Owner’s review and file. If Owner, in its sole discretion, determines that Contractor’s background investigations do not meet certain specific requirements, then Contractor, at its expense, must perform a background investigation that does meet Owner’s certain specific requirements on each individual designated by Contractor to perform Work, or is performing Work on behalf of Contractor, for Owner (referred to herein for purposes of this Article, as an “individual”). Notwithstanding anything to the contrary stated herein, Owner reserves the right to conduct a background investigation on each individual at Contractor’s expense.

7.15.2 Owner’s certain specific requirements of background investigations include the

following: (i) determination of whether an individual has been convicted of a felony crime in each state where the individual has resided during the past seven years; (ii) performance of the background investigation at the state level (in other words, to only search the records of the county in which the individual has resided during the past seven years is not a sufficient background investigation); and (iii) if the individual is to operate a motor vehicle while performing Work for Owner, then a state operator’s license abstract must be completed in the states where the individual has been licensed as a vehicle operator during the past seven years.

7.15.3 If any background investigation reveals or indicates that an individual has been convicted

of a felony crime, then the Contractor must notify the Owner prior to the individual commencing Work. Owner in its sole discretion shall have the option of barring from any Work Site any individual who has a reported felony conviction. Owner may audit or review specific Contractor screening files to ensure compliance with this Contract.

7.15.4 If an individual requires unescorted access to Owner’s critical cyber assets, then Owner

will conduct its own background investigation, which will include a Social Security Number verification. Additional specific provisions or requirements related to any Owner conducted background investigation pursuant to this Section 7.15.4 will be communicated to Contractor prior to implementation of such background investigation.

7.15.5 Contractor shall not perform any screening activities that violate the federal Fair Credit

Reporting Act, Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 or any other applicable law in any circumstances. Contractor shall ensure that the substance and manner of any and all background investigations performed by Contractor conform fully to applicable law.

7.16 “Personally Identifiable Information” or “PII” means any information to which Contractor is provided

access that could identify an individual either directly or indirectly including, without limitation to, the individual’s name, credit card numbers, social security number, biometric, bank account numbers, passport numbers, computer passwords or health, financial or employment information and other individual confidential information.

7.16.1 To the extent that Work under the Contract requires Contractor to be given access to PII

gathered and/or maintained by or on behalf of Owner, or in the event Contractor acquires access to or encounters any PII during performance of the Work, Contractor shall after receipt thereof, treat such PII as confidential and safeguard such PII from unauthorized use and disclosure. Upon request of Owner, Contractor shall have its employees execute a confidentiality agreement protecting PII. Contractor agrees not to appropriate such PII for its own use or to disclose such PII to third parties unless specifically authorized by Owner in writing. Contractor shall ensure that its employees will not discuss, divulge or disclose any such PII to any person or entity except those persons directly concerned with and only to the extent necessary to complete the performance of the Work. Contractor shall access, use and process PII and other data on behalf of Owner only for the purposes specified in the Contract.

06/14 Rev. 3

7.16.2 Contractor shall comply with (i) NERC Reliability Standards as applicable, including

without limitation, those relating to Critical Infrastructure Protection, (ii) Owner’s security standards, and (iii) such further instructions as Owner may provide regarding the processing of such PII. Contractor shall inform Owner promptly if it has reason to believe that applicable law (or changes in applicable law) prevents Contractor from fulfilling the obligations relating to treatment of PII or other data under Owner’s security standards and/or the Contract.

7.16.3 To the extent permitted by law, Contractor shall notify Owner promptly and act only upon

Owner’s instruction concerning: (a) any request for disclosure of PII or other data by law enforcement or other governmental authority; (b) any request by law enforcement or other governmental authority for information concerning the processing of PII or other data in connection with the Contract; or (c) any request received directly from an individual concerning his/her PII.

7.16.4 Contractor may not store PII, on computers, mobile devices, including but not limited to a

cellular telephones and/or personal digital assistants, servers and/or storage devices including removable media (any of which, hereinafter known as a “Computer”), unless required for the performance of Work. Any such information must be deleted from a Computer, in a manner that ensures that it cannot be accessed or read, as soon as such storage is no longer required for the performance of Work.

7.16.5 Upon termination of the Contract or upon Owner’s request, Contractor must promptly (a)

return all PII in written form to Owner, and (b) delete all PII in Contractor’s possession or control (on computer or in whatever other form or media) in a manner that ensures that this information cannot be accessed or read.

7.16.6 Contractor shall administer a monitoring process to ensure compliance with Section 7.16 and

the related subsections hereof, promptly report any breaches to Owner, and implement immediate, appropriate corrective actions to contain and prevent recurrence. Contractor shall report to Owner immediately upon discovery of a real or suspected loss of PII. In the event of a breach of this provision or the occurrence of any other event regarding PII that requires notification under applicable law, Contractor agrees to assume responsibility for informing all such individuals in accordance with applicable law.

7.16.7 In addition to any remedy available to Owner under the Contract, Contractor acknowledges

that any breach of Section 7.16 or the related subsections hereof by Contractor or its Subcontractors may subject Contractor to civil and criminal penalties. Contractor shall include the full text of Section 7.16 and the related subsections 7.16.1 through 7.16.7 in all appropriate subcontracts. However, including such provision in the subcontracts shall not relieve Contractor of its obligation to ensure compliance with the provisions of Section 7.16 and the related subsections 7.16.1 through 7.16.7.

8.0 EQUIPMENT

8.1 All Equipment shall be new and meet the requirements of all applicable codes. Equipment which will not become a part of the permanent installation is not required to be new. Owner reserves the right to reject Equipment which has not been previously used but which has been in storage for an unreasonable period of time. Title to the Equipment shall be free and clear of all liens and encumbrances.

8.2 Contractor shall not substitute Equipment specified in the Contract unless authorized by Owner in

writing. Unless substitution has been so authorized, Contractor shall, at its expense, remove and replace any improperly substituted Equipment.

06/14 Rev. 3

8.3 Upon Owner's request, Contractor shall, at its expense, submit to Owner samples of Contractor-

furnished Equipment. Contractor must obtain Owner's written approval before performing Work involving the use of Equipment for which samples have been requested. Approval by Owner shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Contract and all applicable codes. Equipment used shall conform to the approved samples. Contractor shall remove and replace nonconforming Equipment at its expense.

9.0 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE 9.1 Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will ensure

that the Work performed conforms to the Contract requirements. Owner reserves the right to review and approve the adequacy of Contractor's inspection system. Contractor shall provide all quality control and quality assurance program information requested by Owner.

9.2 Owner shall have free access to the Work for inspection purposes. Owner’s inspectors and

expediters shall be admitted at all reasonable times to the shops of Contractor, its Subcontractors for inspection purposes. Owner's inspection, receipt or Initial Acceptance of the Work shall not relieve Contractor of its obligation to comply with the terms of the Contract.

9.3 Each party shall bear its own expenses in performing inspections, except that (a) Owner may use

Contractor's facilities, ladders and scaffolds to perform inspections of the Work; (b) Contractor shall pay Owner's expenses in re-inspecting Work which was rejected as non-conforming to the Contract requirements in an earlier inspection; (c) Contractor shall pay the costs of uncovering and re-covering Work for Owner's inspection if Contractor failed to give Owner reasonable notice that the Work was ready to be covered; and (d) prior to Final Acceptance, if Owner requests an inspection of Work already completed which requires removing and tearing out Work, and the Work is found to be materially defective, Contractor shall pay the expenses of inspection and reconstruction, but if the Work is found to be in conformance with the Contract requirements, Owner shall pay the expenses of inspection and reconstruction.

9.4 Owner will not pay for defective work. Contractor shall repair or replace all defective work at its

expense. Contractor shall promptly remove from the Site any Equipment that does not comply with the requirements of the Contract. If Owner’s Equipment has been used in any defective work, the cost of such Owner’s Equipment shall be backcharged to Contractor.

9.5 Contractor shall, at its expense, furnish to Owner certificates of shop inspection as required by laws or

regulations, or by the National Board of Fire Underwriters, or by any company insuring the Equipment for the benefit of Owner.

9.6 Owner shall have the right to take possession of or use any part of the Work. Owner's possession or

use shall not constitute Initial Acceptance or Final Acceptance of the Work.

9.7 Contractor shall make all production and shop tests at its expense. Owner shall have the right to have a representative present at such tests, including those at Contractor’s suppliers’ shops, and notice shall be given to Owner at least two weeks prior to any scheduled test. Contractor shall give Owner copies of certified test results promptly upon request.

9.8 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, Final Acceptance by Owner shall be made as soon as

practicable after all Work has been completed and inspected. Any part of the Work not rejected by Owner following Final Inspection shall be deemed to have achieved Final Acceptance.

06/14 Rev. 3

10.0 SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY

10.1 Contractor shall coordinate shipment so that Equipment arrives at the Site on schedule and during Site receiving hours. Contractor shall provide shipping notices to Owner prior to shipment of the Equipment. Owner’s storeroom at the Site where the Equipment is to be delivered shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance of the arrival of the Equipment, or as required by the Contract. Notification to Owner’s storeroom and all shipping notices shall include special unloading and storage directions and a list of equipment required to unload the Equipment.

10.2 Contractor shall provide a complete bill of materials for each separate shipment. Every part that is not

preassembled shall be identified on the bill of materials.

10.3 Contractor must attach metal tags with corrosion resistant tie wire, and waterproof markings and labels, to each piece and package, making reference to the bill of materials and Contract number.

10.4 Owner reserves the right to refuse shipments that do not contain proper markings, bills of materials, or

for which proper shipping notices were not received. The return and redelivery will be at Contractor’s expense.

10.5 Contractor shall deliver all Equipment F.O.B. Site, with freight prepaid and included in the Contract

price. 11.0 TITLE AND RISK OF LOSS

11.1 Title and risk of loss shall pass to Owner upon Final Acceptance of the Work. Contractor agrees that title shall vest in Owner free and clear of all liens and encumbrances. If the Work is rejected as non-conforming, title and risk of loss shall remain with Contractor.

11.2 If the Work requires warranty work, title shall remain at all times with Owner, except that if the Work

is replaced rather than repaired, Owner’s title shall vest in the replacement Work.

11.3 If any part of the Work requires warranty work at Contractor’s facility or any other off-Site location, risk of loss to that part of the Work shall pass to Contractor upon delivery by Owner of that part of the Work to a common carrier. Risk of loss to that part of the Work shall pass back to Owner upon delivery to Owner, installation at the Site and successful acceptance testing of the repaired or replaced Work.

12.0 SCHEDULE

12.1 Contractor shall perform the Work to meet the schedule date(s) set forth in the Contract documents. Contractor shall not commence Work until authorized by Owner to do so.

12.2 In a format acceptable to Owner, Contractor shall develop, update, maintain and provide to Owner a

written schedule for execution of the Work. The schedule shall be time scaled, complete, and accurate in detail depicting Contract milestone dates, work activities and durations. Upon review and approval by Owner, this schedule shall become the Contract schedule. Updates to the Contract schedule shall be provided to Owner on at least a monthly basis. Updates shall depict actual progress measured against planned progress.

12.3 Contractor shall notify Owner within 24 hours of the first knowledge that any completion date(s)

will not be met and shall, within five (5) Business Days thereafter, submit a detailed program depicting the plans and actions being taken to regain the lost time. The notice shall not limit any other rights or remedies afforded Owner under the Contract or by law.

06/14 Rev. 3

13.0 TERMS OF PAYMENT 13.1 Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the following terms of payment shall apply: 13.1.1 The Contract Price set forth in the Contract shall constitute full and complete payment for all

Work. 13.1.2 Contractor shall submit invoices with proper documentation to Owner for the Work

completed or for milestones achieved during the prior month. Owner may withhold all or any part of payment in an amount necessary to protect Owner from loss due to the occurrence, or imminent occurrence, of (i) Contractor’s breach or failure to perform in accordance with the Contract, (ii) defective Work, (iii) Contractor’s failure to pay any Subcontractor, (iv) other claims by Owner against Contractor, including indemnity claims, and (v) damages for delay or any agreed upon liquidated damages.

13.1.3 Owner shall pay 90% of each properly submitted and accepted invoice within forty five (45)

days of receipt. The release of retention shall become due and payable forty five (45) days after the date of Final Acceptance of the Work.

13.1.4 Each invoice shall contain a statement that all bills for material and labor relating to the

Work have been paid in full by Contractor, and there are no unpaid bills for which a lien could be filed. If requested by Owner, Contractor shall provide evidence of such payments. The final invoice for the Work shall be accompanied by a satisfactorily completed Affidavit of Completion in the form attached as Exhibit 1. Payment of the final invoice and retention constitutes a full and final release of Owner from all claims, damages, liabilities and obligations under the Contract.

13.2 Contractor shall promptly pay all of its Subcontractors.

14.0 CHANGES IN WORK AND EXTRA WORK

14.1 Change in Work

14.1.1 “Change Order” means a written order issued in accordance with this Article 14.0 documenting an addition to, deletion from, or other modification to the Work, including a change in the scope of Work, the Contract Price, the payment schedule, the completion dates, or the schedule for the Work.

14.1.2 Owner may issue a Change Order: (i) at Owner’s option, or (ii) if requested by Contractor

due to the occurrence of an event that entitles Contractor to a Change Order as determined by Owner.

14.1.3 If Owner issues a Change Order, Contractor shall perform the changed Work in accordance

with the terms of the Contract and the issued Change Order.

14.1.4 No order, statement or other conduct of Owner shall be treated as a change in Work until such change is authorized in writing by Owner.

14.1.5 Contractor shall not be entitled to a Change Order for conditions such as, but not limited to,

(i) work which is of such a nature as to be normally included in the Work or is reasonably inferable from the Contract; (ii) any errors, omissions, non-performance, negligence, deficiencies or improper or defective work on the part of Contractor (including miscalculations, incorrect estimates, or other errors in Contractor’s proposal for the Work); (iii) changes relating to refinement, minor correction and detailing of the Work or

06/14 Rev. 3

any part of the Contract; or (iv) other unallowable claims such as cost impacts not due to Owner and cumulative impact claims.

14.1.6 With respect to Contractor claims for additional compensation, Owner shall pay only

incremental Direct Costs associated with the proposed changes and only to the extent that Contractor can demonstrate that the changes actually increased its costs of performance. Any claims for additional compensation based on a change to the Work or extra work must be material in nature, and Contractor must provide full documentation supporting all elements of such claims. For a reduction in the scope of Work or a change which reduces Contractor’s costs, the Contract Price shall be adjusted downward. The payment for changes to the Work shall be complete compensation to Contractor for performing such changes, including any schedule or cost impacts on the Work.

14.1.7 If Owner requests in writing that Contractor furnish materials or Equipment to be

permanently incorporated in changed work, extra work or cost-plus work, Owner shall reimburse Contractor for such materials or Equipment at its incremental Direct Cost plus a percentage mark-up to be agreed upon by the parties. Requests for payment for materials and equipment shall be accompanied by copies of receipted invoices. Owner has the right to audit Contractor’s requests for changes and the financial basis therefor.

14.1.8 If Contractor and Owner disagree on whether any particular work is within the scope of

Work and such work must be completed to insure timely progress, Owner will issue a disputed Change Order to cover the disputed work. Contractor shall diligently proceed with the disputed work. By noon on the work day following performance of the disputed work, Contractor shall submit to Owner for review timesheets itemizing all labor and equipment hours expended on the disputed work and an itemized listing of Contractor furnished materials. Such review is not an admission of liability by Owner. Prior to Final Acceptance, each disputed Change Order will be resolved to the mutual agreement of the parties.

14.2 Extra Work

14.2.1 “Extra work” is work which is beyond Contractor’s scope of Work. At Owner's request, Contractor shall perform extra work at the applicable prices set forth in the Contract. If the Contract prices are not applicable to the type of extra work to be performed, Contractor shall promptly submit a proposal to perform the extra work, which proposal shall become an amendment to the Contract upon acceptance by Owner. If Owner directs Contractor to perform extra work on an overtime basis, Owner shall reimburse Contractor the actual payroll cost of premium time for direct job labor. Contractor shall invoice and maintain separate cost records for each extra work authorization issued by Owner.

14.2.2 If Owner elects, Contractor shall perform extra work on a cost-plus basis. Cost-plus extra

work shall be paid in accordance with Article 15.0. 14.3 Contractor waives all claims for additional compensation for changes in work and extra work not

made strictly in accordance with the terms of this Article 14.0. 15.0 REIMBURSEMENT FOR COST-PLUS WORK

15.1 Direct labor costs will be reimbursed at the actual payroll costs of direct labor wages, fringe benefits, payroll taxes and insurance required by collective bargaining agreements or by law, plus an agreed wage mark-up. Copies of certified payrolls and time sheets shall be provided to Owner for review and approval. Contractor shall not invoice Owner for social security, unemployment, workers’ compensation, or other federal, state or local taxes or insurance at rates which exceed Contractor’s actual costs.

06/14 Rev. 3

15.2 Owner will pay Contractor actual invoice costs for subcontracted work, provided Owner has approved payment terms in advance of performing the work plus an agreed mark-up.

15.3 Contractor-furnished Equipment costs will be reimbursed at actual invoice costs plus an agreed mark-

up. 15.4 Construction equipment costs will be reimbursed based on actual usage time during the performance

of Work and established rental rates not to exceed monthly rates set forth in the “Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment” adjusted for geographical region as published by Dataquest or other basis acceptable to Owner. Hourly rates shall be established by taking the monthly rate divided by 176 hours per month.

15.5 Small tools and consumables costs will be reimbursed based on agreed rates. 15.6 Field supervision, clerical, safety and other non-direct labor costs will be reimbursed at agreed billing

rates, except that reimbursement for these costs for cost plus extra work shall require the prior review and approval of Owner.

15.7 Project management, engineering, design, procurement, and other home office services will be

reimbursed at billing rates contained in the Contract. 16.0 BACKCHARGES

16.1 Owner may impose backcharges against Contractor or deduct backcharges from monies owed to Contractor for performance or reperformance by Owner or others of Work, including but not limited to, costs associated with defective work, nonperformance by Contractor, termination for cause, clean-up and disposal of debris, damages to Owner’s tools and equipment and warranty repairs. Contractor will be responsible for the cost of such performance or reperformance plus a fifteen percent (15%) administrative charge.

17.0 TAXES

17.1 The Contract Price shall include, and Contractor shall pay, all taxes and assessments for unemployment insurance, workers’ compensation, social security and disability benefits, and other taxes which are based upon the compensation paid to persons employed by Contractor or its Subcontractors for the performance of any Work under the Contract.

17.2 Except as provided below, the Contract Price shall include all applicable foreign, federal, state and

local taxes payable by Contractor with respect to the Contract.

17.2.1 Contractor Purchases. If Owner specifies that tangible personal property to be incorporated into real property as defined for sales and use tax purposes or taxable services to be purchased by Contractor from Subcontractors qualify for exemption from sales or use taxes, Contractor shall not include sales or use taxes on such exempt tangible personal property or services in the Contract Price. Unless otherwise specified: a) consumable materials and supplies or Contractor’s tools and equipment that are not incorporated into the Work or the overall project are not eligible for exemption and the Contract Price shall include, and Contractor shall pay, any sales or use taxes on such items; and b) Contractor will use its own properly-executed exemption or resale certificate, and not Owner’s direct pay permit, to make exempt purchases of tangible personal property or services from Subcontractors.

17.2.2 Owner Purchases from Contractor. With respect to any Owner purchases from

Contractor of tangible personal property not incorporated into real property as defined for sales and use tax purposes or taxable services, Owner shall provide to Contractor its

06/14 Rev. 3

direct pay permit (if Owner has been issued a direct pay permit) or an appropriate exemption certificate required to relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to collect sales or use tax from the Owner. If Owner provides Contractor such direct pay permit or exemption certificate, sales or use taxes on Owner purchases from Contractor of tangible personal property or taxable services shall not be collected from Owner or included in the Contract Price. Unless otherwise approved or directed by Owner in writing, Contractor shall not use Owner’s direct pay permit to make exempt purchases of tangible personal property or taxable services from Subcontractors.

17.2.3 Contractor Cooperation. Contractor shall take all steps reasonably necessary to ensure

that Contractor’s purchases from Subcontractors of items of tangible personal property or services are exempt from sales and use tax pursuant to any applicable exemption pursuant to the law of any U.S. jurisdiction or its political subdivisions.

18.0 INSURANCE

18.1 Contractor shall, at its sole expense, procure and maintain, and shall cause its Subcontractors to

procure and maintain, throughout the term of this Contract except as set forth in Section 18.5, the following types of insurance with the following, minimum limits:

18.1.1 Workers’ compensation insurance limits in accordance with all jurisdictions where

Contractor has operations including where the Work is to be performed. If Contractor is a non-subscriber to workers’ compensation, evidence of insurance equivalent to workers’ compensation must be provided.

18.1.2 Employer’s liability in an amount not less than $1,000,000.

18.1.3 Business automobile insurance covering all owned, non-owned and hired autos in an

amount not less than $5,000,000 per occurrence.

18.1.4 Commercial general liability insurance covering claims of bodily injury and property damage in an amount not less than $5,000,000 per occurrence.

18.1.5 Aircraft liability insurance with a combined limit of not less than $10,000,000. Such

insurance shall be required only if the Contractor or its Subcontractors shall utilize an aircraft in the performance of the Work.

18.1.6 If Contractor (or any of its Subcontractors) are engaged in operations which use marine

vessels or floating equipment, or which are subject to maritime jurisdiction, the following insurance shall be required: Marine Liability insurance (including Jones Act and maritime employer’s liability if operations are subject to federal jurisdiction) and pollution liability (under terms equivalent to current W.Q.I.S. policy provisions if operations are subject to federal jurisdiction) in amounts not less than $10,000,000 per occurrence.

18.1.7 Professional liability insurance and/or errors and omissions insurance in an amount not

less than $5,000,000. Such insurance shall be required only if the Work includes professional liability exposures.

18.1.8 “All risk” property insurance covering the full replacement cost of Contractor’s personal

property.

18.2 To the extent permitted by law, Contractor shall waive, and shall cause each of its insurers to waive, any and all rights of recovery, by subrogation or otherwise, against Owner and its affiliates,

06/14 Rev. 3

officers, directors, employees, agents and assigns of any type. Each of Contractor’s insurance policies shall be primary to and non-contributory with any insurance or self-insurance of Owner.

18.3 The commercial general liability, the business automobile, and (if applicable) the aircraft liability

and Marine Liability insurance shall include Owner as an additional insured with respect to Owner’s liability arising out of the operations of Contractor. Such coverage shall also include blanket contractual coverage and contain no exclusion for explosion, collapse, or underground property damage (XCU coverage).

18.4 The insurance required by this Article 18.0 is in addition to and separate from any other

obligations contained in the Contract.

18.5 Products and/or completed operations coverage shall be maintained for a period of five (5) years after the completion of the Work. If any of the policies indicated above are placed on a “claims-made” basis, such coverage shall be maintained for a period of not less than five (5) years following the completion of the Work.

18.6 Any deductibles or retentions on any of the policies required herein shall be the sole responsibility

of the Contractor.

18.7 The above referenced limit requirements may be met by any combination of umbrella or excess and primary policies so long as the total limit of insurance requirement is met. The required coverages referred to herein shall in no way affect, nor are they intended as a limitation of, Contractor’s liability with respect to its performance of the Work. The limits of insurance indicated herein are minimum requirements and are in no way intended to limit Contractor’s liability.

18.8 In all cases where Contractor’s employees (defined to include Contractor’s direct, borrowed,

special, or statutory employees) are covered by the Louisiana Worker’s Compensation Act, La. Rev. Stat. Ann. 23:1021 et seq., Owner and Contractor agree that pursuant to Section 23:1061 (A) (1) all Work performed by Contractor and its employees under the terms and conditions of the Contract is an integral part of Owner’s operations and is essential to Owner’s ability to generate its goods, products and services. Additionally, Owner and Contractor agree that for purposes of Section 23:1061 (A) (3) Owner is the principal or statutory employer of Contractor’s employees. Irrespective of Owner’s status as the statutory employer or special employer of Contractor’s employees, pursuant to Section 23:1031 (C), Contractor shall remain primarily responsible for the payment of Louisiana Worker’s Compensation benefits to its employees, shall indemnify Owner from any and all claims of Contractor’s employees or its Subcontractor’s employees and shall not be entitled to seek contribution for any such payments from Owner.

18.9 Upon inception of the Contract and prior to the commencement of Work, Contractor shall provide

Owner with an acceptable certificate of insurance evidencing the insurance required under Article 18. Contractor will not be permitted to bring its employees, materials or equipment onto the Site until Owner receives such evidence of insurance. Contractor also must provide an updated certificate of insurance at any time during the Contract term upon Owner’s request. Contractor shall immediately notify Owner of cancellation or any material changes in the insurance policies required herein. If such insurance policies are subject to any exceptions to the terms specified herein, such exceptions shall be explained in full in such certificates. Owner may, at its discretion, require Contractor to obtain insurance policies that are not subject to non-standard exceptions.

18.10 In lieu of Sections 18.1 thru 18.9, the Owner may elect to implement an Owner Controlled

Insurance Program ("OCIP"). If an OCIP is implemented, all Contractor(s) and Subcontractor(s) of any tier and such other persons or entities as the Owner may designate as enrolled parties, may, at Owner’s option, be required to enroll and participate. Owner shall procure and maintain at its own expense during the performance of this Contract and a stipulated completed operations period, such

06/14 Rev. 3

insurance coverage as Owner deems appropriate on behalf of enrolled parties. Eligible Contractor(s) and Subcontractor(s) must submit all necessary enrollment forms for acceptance into the OCIP, and agree to the terms of the Owner’s project safety standards. Owner and Contractor agree that the terms of the OCIP as contained in amendments to this Contract and the OCIP Contractor Manual shall control. The OCIP does not relieve any Contractor or Subcontractor from its obligations to procure coverage for offsite operations or coverages not included in the OCIP. In the event an OCIP is implemented, amended insurance requirements for enrolled parties will be provided.

18.11 The furnishing of insurance by Owner through an OCIP will in no way relieve or limit any

enrolled party of any responsibility, liability, or obligation imposed by the contract documents or by law, including without limitation any indemnification obligations which any enrolled party has to the Owner thereunder.

19.0 INDEMNIFICATION

19.1 The laws of the state where the Work giving rise to the claim is performed shall apply to this Article 19.0.

19.2 TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY,

DEFEND AT ITS EXPENSE, AND SAVE OWNER HARMLESS FROM, ANY LIABILITIES, COSTS AND CLAIMS, INCLUDING JUDGMENTS RENDERED AGAINST, AND FINES AND PENALTIES IMPOSED UPON, OWNER AND REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES AND ALL OTHER COSTS OF LITIGATION (COLLECTIVELY, “LIABILITIES”), ARISING OUT OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING INJURIES, DISEASE OR DEATH TO PERSONS, OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY, AND ENVIRONMENTAL CLAIMS AND LIABILITIES, CAUSED BY CONTRACTOR, ITS EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS, OR IN ANY WAY ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, EXCEPT THAT CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATION TO INDEMNIFY OWNER SHALL NOT APPLY TO ANY LIABILITIES ARISING FROM OWNER'S SOLE NEGLIGENCE. TO THE EXTENT PROVIDED IN THIS SECTION, IN STATES OTHER THAN OHIO, MICHIGAN, KENTUCKY, TENNESSEE, MISSOURI, OKLAHOMA, VIRGINIA, AND WEST VIRGINIA, CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY OWNER FOR LIABILITIES ARISING FROM OWNER’S ACTS AND OMISSIONS, NEGLIGENT OR OTHERWISE. OWNER SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT TO SELECT ITS OWN COUNSEL AND TO HAVE COUNSEL SEPARATE FROM CONTRACTOR, ALL AT CONTRACTOR’S EXPENSE.

19.3 WITH RESPECT TO CLAIMS AGAINST OWNER BY CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES,

CONTRACTOR UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THIS INDEMNIFICATION OBLIGATION SHALL NOT BE LIMITED IN ANY WAY BY, AND CONTRACTOR EXPRESSLY WAIVES, ITS IMMUNITY AS A COMPLYING EMPLOYER UNDER ANY APPLICABLE WORKERS' COMPENSATION LAW, BUT ONLY TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH IMMUNITY WOULD BAR OR AFFECT RECOVERY UNDER OR ENFORCEMENT OF THIS INDEMNIFICATION OBLIGATION. With respect to the State of Ohio, this waiver applies to Section 35, Article II of the Ohio Constitution and Ohio Rev. Code Section 4123.74.

19.4 CONTRACTOR SHALL BE LIABLE FOR REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES AND ALL

COSTS OF LITIGATION ASSOCIATED WITH ENFORCEMENT OF ALL INDEMNITY OBLIGATIONS SET FORTH IN THE CONTRACT.

06/14 Rev. 3

20.0 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

20.1 Except as expressly provided herein, neither party shall be liable to the other for any incidental, indirect, special, punitive or consequential damages. Contractor must bring any cause of action arising under the Contract within one year from the time the cause of action accrues.

21.0 LIENS

21.1 To the extent permitted by law, Contractor shall not file or permit to be filed any lien with respect to the Work and hereby expressly waives any right to file or cause to be filed a lien. Contractor, in its subcontracts, shall require all Subcontractors to expressly waive the right to file any liens against Owner’s property, and, if requested, provide Owner with copies of such waivers.

21.2 In the event any claim is asserted or any lien filed against Owner or its property, or notice of lien

is provided to Owner in violation of this provision, further payment to Contractor shall not become due under the Contract until the claim is satisfied or the lien released without cost to Owner and Contractor shall provide Owner with evidence of payment relating to such claim or lien. If Contractor fails to settle any claim or secure the release of any lien, Owner may take whatever steps it deems necessary to settle the claim or release the lien, including bonding off the lien. Owner may deduct its costs and expenses for settling any claim or securing the release of any lien filed by Contractor or its Subcontractors from any money due or to become due to Contractor under the Contract. If final payment has been made, Contractor shall reimburse to Owner its costs to settle any claim or secure the release of any lien arising out of the Contract.

22.0 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

22.1 Contractor warrants that its performance of the Work will not infringe upon or violate any

trademarks, patents, copyrights, trade secrets or other third party property rights. If the performance of Work is held in any action to constitute infringement, or the use of the Work is enjoined, Contractor, at its expense, shall procure for Owner the right to continue use of the Work, or replace the Work with non-infringing materials or methods satisfactory to Owner, or modify the Work in a manner satisfactory to Owner so that the Work becomes non-infringing. Contractor agrees to indemnify and save Owner harmless from and against any liability or damages, including attorneys' fees, arising out of any alleged infringement or violation.

22.2 All inventions, discoveries, documents, works of authorship, methods, and the derivative works

thereof, resulting from the Work, including patents, patent applications, copyrights, trade secrets and other intellectual property (collectively “Intellectual Property”), shall be the sole and exclusive property of Owner. Contractor shall promptly inform Owner of the development of any such Intellectual Property and does hereby assign and transfer the entire right, title and interest, together with all rights of priority, in and to such Intellectual Property to Owner. Contractor shall promptly cooperate with Owner in signing any additional documentation necessary to assign and perfect ownership of such Intellectual Property in Owner or to allow Owner to register its property rights therein. Contractor warrants that it has obtained written agreements from its employees and agents as necessary to effectuate the purpose of this Section. The Intellectual Property assigned and transferred to Owner shall be the Confidential Information of Owner.

22.3 Contractor grants Owner a nonexclusive, nonrevocable, perpetual, fully paid license to utilize

Contractor’s intellectual property existing separate from the Contract, including inventions, discoveries, works or authorship, methods, and trade secrets, regardless of whether such are the subject of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property protection, to the extent necessary for Owner to achieve the full benefit of the Work.

22.4 Contractor shall not use Owner’s name or logo in marketing, endorsements, or other business

purposes without prior written consent from Owner.

06/14 Rev. 3

23.0 DRAWINGS AND DATA 23.1 Contractor shall furnish for Owner’s review, prior to commencement of Equipment manufacture or

fabrication, general and detailed drawings of the Equipment in the format requested. Such drawings shall be certified as to accuracy and completeness and shall show information adequate to enable Owner to design and provide suitable clearances. If required by the Contract or any code, law or agency, Contractor will provide professional engineer or architect sealed drawings and reports for the state where the Equipment is to be finally installed. Figures shall take precedence in all cases over scaled measurements on drawings. Where obvious discrepancies exist, Contractor shall consult with and follow the instructions of Owner. Owner’s approval of Contractor’s drawings shall not relieve Contractor of its obligation to comply with the contract requirements.

23.2 All written data, such as drawings, plans, reports, designs and specifications, prepared by Contractor

for Owner during the performance of Work shall become the property of Owner. Such data, together with all data furnished by Owner and lent to Contractor for return, shall be delivered to Owner upon request, or upon completion of the Work or termination of the Contract. For clarification purposes, Owner shall have the unrestricted right to use, release, disclose, copy and reproduce such data for purposes of operation, maintenance, analysis, testing, cleaning, erection, improvement or modification of any facilities owned or operated by Owner. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner by executing such documents as are necessary to assign and perfect ownership in Contractor provided data to Owner.

24.0 CONFIDENTIALITY

24.1 “Confidential Information” means any confidential or proprietary information, whether written, oral, or visual, whether or not it constitutes a trade secret under applicable law. “Confidential Information” includes, but is not limited to, business plans and methods; customer information; engineering, operating and technical data; and the dates of Owner's outage schedule, information concerning the Work, and Owner’s activities. “Confidential Information” does not include information that (a) has become part of the public domain other than by acts or omissions of the recipient; (b) has been furnished or made known to the recipient by a third person as a matter of legal right and without restriction on use; (c) was in the recipient’s possession prior to disclosure by the disclosing party without restriction on use; or (d) is independently developed by the recipient without access to the Confidential Information.

24.2 Subject to Section 24.5, each party agrees (a) to protect the Confidential Information of the other

with at least the same degree of care used to protect its own Confidential Information; (b) not to use (except for the purpose described herein), publish or disclose to third parties such Confidential Information; and (c) upon the request of the disclosing party, to promptly deliver to the disclosing party all written copies of its Confidential Information. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a recipient shall be entitled to disclose Confidential Information to its officers, employees, affiliates (including any joint ventures of which Owner or any of its affiliates are a member and the other members of such joint ventures), agents, lenders, attorneys and other advisors (collectively, “Representatives”), provided that the Representatives shall be informed of the confidentiality obligations provided herein.

24.3 If either party is required pursuant to applicable law or otherwise becomes legally compelled to

disclose any of the Confidential Information, such party shall promptly advise the disclosing party in order that the disclosing party may seek a protective order or such other remedy as the disclosing party may consider appropriate in the circumstances. In any event, the compelled party may disclose only that portion of the Confidential Information which such party is legally required to disclose in the judgment of the party’s legal counsel without any liability to the disclosing party hereunder and such disclosure shall not be a breach of this Section.

06/14 Rev. 3

24.4 Contractor shall require its Subcontractors, if any, to expressly comply with the confidentiality provisions as set forth herein.

24.5 All documents prepared by Contractor for Owner during the performance of Work that

incorporate, in whole or in part, information owned or provided by Owner shall not be marked or designated in any way as the confidential or proprietary information of Contractor without also stating that Owner has rights in such documents. Owner shall have the right to question the designation of Confidential Information by Contractor and Contractor agrees to provide Owner with reasonable cooperation in explaining such designation. Contractor agrees that Owner's acceptance of documents containing the Confidential Information of Contractor shall not be construed as a restriction on Owner's rights to use, release, disclose, distribute, copy or reproduce the documents.

25.0 DEFAULT 25.1 The occurrence of any of the following shall constitute an “Event of Default”: 25.1.1 Contractor files a petition in bankruptcy, or if its creditors file an involuntary petition in

bankruptcy, or if it makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency.

25.1.2 Contractor (a) fails to maintain the schedule set forth in the Contract, or (b) fails to

promptly pay Subcontractors for material or labor, or (c) commits repeated or substantial violations of laws, rules, regulations or policies, or (d) fails to perform in accordance with the Contract, and Contractor fails to take corrective action or submit an acceptable plan within two (2) Business Days after the receipt of a notice of non-conformance from Owner.

25.2 Upon an Event of Default, Owner may take any or all of the following actions without affecting the

Contract Price or schedule: (a) Owner may direct Contractor to cease performance on all or part of the Contract until

satisfactory corrective action has been taken; (b) Owner may have others take corrective action necessary to achieve compliance with the

Contract. Owner may deduct the cost of such corrective action by others from any monies due to Contractor. Corrective action by others shall be taken when, in the judgment of Owner, the noncompliance threatens safety, unreasonably interferes with or delays the work of others, or otherwise creates a situation the resolution of which cannot be delayed without adversely impacting quality, cost or timely completion;

(c) Owner may pursue damages for delay under the terms of Article 26.0; (d) Owner may suspend the Contract under Article 28.0; and/or

(d) Owner may terminate the Contract under the terms of Section 29.1

. 25.3 Each of Owner’s rights set forth above shall be cumulative and additional to any other rights or remedies provide in law or equity or otherwise.

26.0 DAMAGES FOR DELAY 26.1 Contractor shall be liable for any direct damages incurred by Owner arising out of Contractor's failure

to perform on time.

06/14 Rev. 3

26.2 In lieu of Section 26.1, if the parties have agreed to liquidate the amount of direct damages resulting from Contractor's delay, the parties agree that such damages which might be incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor's delay in performance are uncertain and would be difficult to calculate. The parties agree that the liquidated damages contained in the Contract would be reasonable and fair compensation for late performance. Contractor commits to pay and Owner agrees to accept such sum as liquidated damages and not as a penalty in the event of late performance.

27.0 FORCE MAJEURE

27.1 Neither party shall be in breach of the Contract to the extent that any delay or default in performance is due to a Force Majeure Event. The term, “Force Majeure Event” shall mean any cause beyond the reasonable control of the delayed or defaulting party, including, but not limited to, acts of God including unusually adverse weather, fire, and epidemic; acts of public enemy including war, acts of terrorism, riot, and civil disturbance; and national labor strikes, which by exercise of due foresight such party could not have been expected to avoid or overcome. Contractor’s inability to obtain adequate and sufficient labor in order to maintain progress of the Work shall not constitute a Force Majeure Event. No delay in performance resulting from a Force Majeure Event shall result in any liability on the part of Owner. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, in the event of a delay caused by any act or failure to act on the part of Owner, Contractor’s sole remedy shall be as set forth in Article 14.0.

27.2 The delaying party shall immediately notify the other party of the beginning of a delaying event, and

shall confirm the notice in writing within ten (10) Business Days of the beginning of the event. The notice shall contain a detailed account of the delay, including the cause of the delay, an estimate of the duration of the delay, an estimate of the delay's impact to the schedule, and the plan to mitigate the effects of the delay.

27.3 If Contractor is the delaying party, and the delay is a Force Majeure Event as defined in Section 27.1,

Owner shall grant Contractor an extension of the time for performance, to be mutually agreed upon by Contractor and Owner. The extension of time granted as a result of a Force Majeure Event shall in no case exceed the length of the delay and such extension may be withheld or reduced to the extent Contractor does not provide notice in accordance with Section 27.2. If Owner so requests, Contractor shall expedite its schedule to mitigate the effects of the excusable delay. Owner shall pay incremental, Direct Costs incurred by Contractor for expediting at Owner's request.

28.0 SUSPENSION 28.1 Owner may at any time suspend all or any part of the Work. Owner shall provide Contractor written

notice verifying the suspension date. Immediately upon receipt of the suspension notice, Contractor shall take the necessary actions to comply with the suspension notice.

28.2 Owner shall pay Contractor in accordance with the terms of payment set forth in the Contract for the

Work completed prior to the time of suspension and for the incremental, Direct Costs that result from Contractor's compliance with the suspension notice.

28.3 Owner may, at any time during the suspension period, either terminate the Contract in accordance

with Section 29.2, or authorize the Work or any portion thereof to be restarted. Owner shall pay Contractor the incremental, Direct Costs associated with the restart of the Work and shall resume payments to Contractor in accordance with the terms of payment under the Contract thirty (30) days after the restart of Work.

28.4 The schedule shall be adjusted to provide for a reasonable extension of time for Contractor's

performance.

06/14 Rev. 3

29.0 TERMINATION 29.1 Termination for Cause 29.1.1 Upon an Event of Default, Owner may terminate the Contract upon written notice to

Contractor. 29.1.2 In the event of such termination, Contractor shall immediately prepare and submit to

Owner an itemization of the Work completed by Contractor. Owner may require Contractor to leave the Site. Owner may take over such Work and complete it, or have the Work completed by others. Owner may take possession of and utilize in completing the Work Contractor's materials, Equipment to be installed, supplies, tools and equipment at the Site.

29.1.3 Contractor shall not be entitled to further payment until all of the Work is completed in

its entirety and Final Acceptance has been achieved. If the cost of completion exceeds the unpaid balance under the Contract, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner within thirty (30) calendar days of demand.

29.1.4 In the event that a court determines that the termination was not properly a termination

for cause, pursuant to Section 29.1.1, Contractor's remedy shall be limited to the payments permitted in accordance with Section 29.2.

29.2 Termination for Convenience 29.2.1 Owner may terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, for its convenience. Owner

will give Contractor written notice of termination specifying the extent to which the Contract is terminated and the date, immediately or otherwise, on which termination becomes effective.

29.2.2 Upon termination for convenience, Contractor will comply with instructions in the

notice of termination regarding delivery to Owner of all Work in progress and all completed Work, which shall become the property of Owner upon delivery.

29.2.3 In the event of such termination, Contractor shall receive payment, including the

retained percentage, for the Work satisfactorily performed up to the time of such termination. In addition, Owner shall reimburse Contractor for incremental, Direct Costs resulting from the termination, provided that compensation was not otherwise made for such costs. Final payment shall be made upon the parties' agreement of the amount of the final invoice and Owner's receipt of an Affidavit of Completion in the form of Exhibit 1. Owner shall not be responsible for Contractor's lost profit on the terminated portion of the Contract.

30.0 EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY

30.1 Beginning upon Final Acceptance and for a period of one year thereafter, or for such period as may be specified elsewhere in the Contract, Contractor warrants that (a) it will perform the Work in accordance with the accepted standards of care and competence found in the engineering or other applicable profession as such standards relate to and are commonly used in the electric utility industry, and (b) all Equipment and workmanship shall be free of any and all defects and shall be in conformity with the requirements of the Contract.

30.2 Subject to the provisions of Section 30.3, in the event that the Equipment or workmanship does not

comply with the warranty, Contractor shall, at no cost to Owner, promptly repair or replace such nonconforming Equipment or workmanship with as little disruption to Owner's operations as

06/14 Rev. 3

practicable. Contractor shall be responsible for the total cost of correcting any defects, including but not limited to, the costs of engineering, design, materials, labor, any necessary equipment removal, disassembly, shipping, reinstallation and retesting of the installation. Owner shall give Contractor notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. If nonconforming Equipment or workmanship causes an outage or other delay of operations, Contractor shall make the repair or replacement on an overtime, maximum effort basis, at Contractor’s expense.

30.3 If Owner directs Contractor to repair or replace any defect and Contractor fails to do so within a

reasonable time, or if an emergency exists rendering it impracticable for Contractor to perform the repair or replacement, Owner may make or cause to be made such repair or replacement without affecting the validity of the warranty. Owner's cost for making the repair or replacement shall be deducted from the Contract Price or any unpaid portion thereof. If the unpaid portion of the Contract Price is insufficient to cover such cost, Contractor shall reimburse Owner.

30.4 Owner will not pay for any defective portion of the Equipment or workmanship until remedied by

Contractor at Contractor's expense in accordance with the Contract requirements. 30.5 Owner must approve any proposed correction or alteration by Contractor of the Equipment or

workmanship, or parts thereof, made at any time or at any location, before such correction or alteration is undertaken. Approval by Owner shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Contract and all applicable codes.

30.6 Any Equipment or workmanship which are repaired or replaced pursuant to this Article 30.0 shall be

warranted for a period of one year from the date of completion and acceptance of such repair or replacement, or for the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer.

30.7 Contractor shall obtain, for the benefit of Owner, all available warranties from Subcontractors of

Contractor. Such warranties shall be in addition to the warranties set forth in this Article. If such warranties are in written form, Contractor shall provide Owner with the original warranties.

31.0 REPORTING OF COMPLAINTS 31.1 Contractor shall immediately report to Owner, in accordance with Article 35.0, the complete details of

all complaints, including any OSHA violations and complaints received from governmental authorities, Subcontractors, laborers, other third parties or members of the public relating to the Work.

32.0 RETENTION AND EXAMINATION OF INFORMATION, BOOKS AND RECORDS 32.1 Owner reserves the right to audit records necessary to permit evaluation and verification of (i) claims

submitted, (ii) Change Orders, and related overhead and general and administrative costs, and (iii) Contractor’s compliance, in the performance of the Contract and its dealings with Owner with (a) the Contract requirements; and (b) Owner’s Code of Business Conduct governing business ethics. Owner’s right to audit shall not extend to fixed, lump-sum or unit pricing.

32.2 Contractor shall cooperate with Owner and provide Owner with information and records

("information") pertaining to the Work as requested by governmental agencies, Owner, or courts of law.

32.3 Contractor shall retain for a period of three years after Contract termination or expiration all

information relating to the Work. Owner may audit and copy such information at Contractor’s premises during regular business hours. If requested by Owner, Contractor shall submit to Owner a copy of each of its subcontracts. Contractor shall include in its subcontracts a provision granting Owner the rights against Subcontractors contained in this Article 32.0.

06/14 Rev. 3

33.0 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS

33.1 Contractor warrants that all materials and Equipment supplied and all Work performed will comply with, and be manufactured, priced, sold and labeled in compliance with all applicable federal, state and local laws, rules, regulations, orders and ordinances, including, without limitation, environmental protection, energy, safety and health, and labor laws and regulations and applicable industry codes and standards.

33.2 Unless exempted, Contractor shall abide by the requirements of 41 C.F.R. § 60-1.4(a)(7), 41

C.F.R. § 60-300.5(a), and 41 C.F.R. § 60-741.5(a). These regulations prohibit discrimination against minorities, females, qualified protected veterans, and qualified individuals on the basis of disability and require affirmative action by covered prime contractors and subcontractors to employ and advance in employment minorities, females, qualified protected veterans, and qualified individuals with disabilities. Contractor represents that it does not, and shall not for the term of the Contract, provide or maintain for its employees facilities that are segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, veteran status or disability status. Contractor represents that it will not assign its employees to perform any work related to the Contract at a location where facilities are segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, sex national origin, veteran status or disability status. Contractor agrees that it will not enter into any agreement to obtain goods or services relating to the Contract with any entity that provides, maintains or assigns its employees to work at locations where facilities are segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, sex or national origin. As used herein, “facility” means waiting rooms; work areas; restaurants and other eating areas; time clocks; locker rooms and other storage or sleeping areas, except as necessary to ensure privacy between male and female employees; parking lots, drinking fountains; recreation or entertainment areas; and transportation. If not otherwise exempted by Title 48 and to the extent applicable, Contractor will comply with 48 CFR §52.219-8, Utilization of Small, Small Disadvantaged, and Women-Owned Small Business Concerns, and 48 CFR §52.219-9, Small, Small Disadvantaged, and Women-Owned Small Business Subcontracting Plan. If not otherwise exempted by 41 CFR §60-1.5, Contractor represents that it will file all reports or other required information specified in 41 CFR §60-1.7. Contractor shall also abide by the requirements of 29 CFR Part 471, Appendix A to Subpart A, which is incorporated by reference, as applicable.

33.3 Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any and all costs or expenses arising out of

any violations of such laws, ordinances and regulations. 34.0 PERMITS AND LICENSES

34.1 Contractor shall obtain all permits and licenses required by any regulatory authority for the performance of any portion of the Work, except that Owner shall obtain permits and licenses for all structures which are to become a permanent part of the Site. Before starting Work, Contractor shall submit to Owner a copy of all permits and licenses required by any such regulatory authority.

34.2 Contractor shall obtain and maintain all professional licenses necessary to perform the Work. 34.3 Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any and all costs or expenses arising out of

the failure of Contractor to obtain such permits and licenses. 35.0 NOTICES 35.1 Each party shall designate in writing a representative to receive any and all notices required under the

Contract. Notices shall be in writing and shall be given to the representative designated to receive them, either by personal delivery, certified mail, facsimile, e-mail (with confirmation of receipt) or any similar means, properly addressed to such representative. All notices shall be effective upon receipt, or upon such later date following receipt as set forth in the notice. Either party may, by

06/14 Rev. 3

written notice to the other, change the representative or the address to which such notices are to be sent.

36.0 SEVERABILITY

36.1 In the event that any of the provisions, or portions thereof, of the Contract are held to be unenforceable or invalid by any court, the validity and enforceability of the remaining provisions, or portions thereof, shall not be affected.

37.0 WAIVER

37.1 Either party's waiver of any breach of the Contract shall not be deemed to be a waiver of any other breach of the same or a different term of the Contract.

38.0 NON-DISCLOSURE

38.1 Except as required by law, regulation, or judicial or administrative order, neither party shall disclose the terms of the Contract without the consent of the other party. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner may disclose the terms of the Contract without the consent of Contractor (a) to any of its affiliated companies (including any joint ventures of which Owner or any of its affiliates are a member and the other members of such joint ventures); and (b) to any prospective transferee or purchaser of assets of Owner or any of affiliates.

39.0 HEADINGS

39.1 Headings are provided for the convenience of the parties, and shall not affect the interpretation of any

provision. 40.0 AFFILIATED COMPANIES

40.1 Any indemnification of Owner or any limitation of Owner's or Contractor's liability under this Contract shall to the same extent apply to Owner's or Contractor's directors, officers, employees, agents, and affiliated companies (including any joint ventures of which Owner or any of its affiliates are a member and the other members of such joint ventures), including any directors, officers, employees and agents thereof.

40.2 The affiliated companies (including any joint ventures of which Owner or any of its affiliates are a

member and the other members of such joint ventures) of the American Electric Power System are severally and not jointly liable for obligations arising hereunder.

41.0 APPLICABLE LAWS AND JURISDICTION 41.1 Except for Article 19.0, the rights and obligations of the parties arising out of the Contract shall be

governed in all respects by the laws of the State of Ohio, excluding any conflict-of-law rules. Any reference herein to the laws of other states is made only to the extent that the laws of that state might apply, notwithstanding the intent of the parties that the laws of the State of Ohio should apply.

41.2 Contractor agrees that all actions and proceedings brought by Owner against Contractor may be

litigated in courts located in the State of Ohio or the state where work was performed. Contractor agrees that such courts are convenient forums and irrevocably submits to the personal jurisdiction of such courts. Contractor waives personal service of process and consents to service of process by certified or registered mail at the address designated for receiving notices under this Contract.

06/14 Rev. 3

42.0 ENTIRE AGREEMENT

42.1 The Contract constitutes the entire agreement between the parties and supersedes all previous and collateral agreements or understandings with respect to the subject matter of the Contract. No waiver, alteration, amendment or modification of any of the provisions of the Contract shall be binding unless in writing and signed by duly authorized representatives of the parties.

43.0 BINDING EFFECT; NO THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES

43.1 Subject to the restrictions on assignment in Section 5.1, this Contract shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the parties of their respective successors and permitted assigns.

43.2 No provision of the Contract is intended or shall be construed to be for the benefit of third party

other than as set forth in Article 38.0.

44.0 EXECUTION; COUNTERPARTS; ELECTRONIC SIGNATURES

44.1 The Contract shall not be binding or effective until properly executed by each of the parties hereto. The Contract may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be deemed to be an original, and all of which, taken together, shall constitute but one and the same Contract, which may be sufficiently evidenced by one counterpart.

44.2 Each party agrees that any electronic signatures, whether digital or encrypted, of the parties

included in this Contract are intended to authenticate this writing and to have the same force and effect as manual signatures. Electronic signature means any electronic sound, symbol or process attached to or logically associated with a record and executed and adopted by a party with the intent to sign such record.

45.0 SURVIVAL

45.1 All of the terms of the Contract which by their nature extend beyond the expiration or termination of the Contract, including indemnification obligations, confidentiality obligations, limitations of liability, shall survive expiration or termination of the Contract and remain in full force and effect.

EXHIBIT 1 Page 1 of 1

06/14 Rev. 3

AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLETION State of County of , being duly sworn, states that: (Name of Affiant)

1. S/He is the of (Office held by

Affiant)

(Contractor) (Legal Name of Contractor)

that has a contract with (Legal Name of Owner)

(Owner) dated (Owner’s Contract No. ) (Contract Date) (Contract No.) involving work on the Owner’s property at (Project Name) located near . (City, State)

2. All of the Work required to be performed by the Contractor under said Contract has been performed. All bills and claims for material, labor and services to employees and Subcontractors covering the Work required to be performed under the Contract, have been paid in full by the Contractor. There are no unpaid amounts on the basis of which a lien has been filed, or can be filed, in connection with the Work performed under the Contract.

Signature of Affiant Sworn to before me and subscribed in my presence this day of , . Notary

GPR-1

GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.0 SUMMARY

A. Applicability: Project requirements included in this Section apply to all Work

performed under this Contract. B. Work specified in this Section includes:

1. Sustainable Design Requirements. 2. Definitions. 3. General Requirements.

a. General conditions. b. Specifications and drawings. c. Minor deviations. d. Insurance. e. Regulatory compliance. f. Guarantees. g. Permits/inspections/approvals. h. Taxes. i. Diversity contractor participation. j. Temporary facilities and controls. k. Safety. l. Construction schedule. m. Schedule of values. n. Pay applications. o. Submittals. p. Coordination. q. Conflicting requirements. r. Request for interpretation. s. Notice of commencement.

4. Existing Conditions. a. Site examination. b. Use of site. c. Hazardous materials.

5. Contract Modifications. a. Change orders. b. Markups. c. Unit prices.

6. Owner Furnished Equipment. 7. Substantial Completion. 8. Record Documents.

a. Record drawings. b. As-built drawings. c. Operating and maintenance (O & M) manuals.

9. General Product Requirements. a. Product Selection Procedures.

GPR-2

b. Incidental items. c. Fire resistance ratings. d. Electrical characteristics. e. Firestopping. f. Sample panels/mockups. g. Maintenance (extra) materials.

10. General Installation Requirements. a. General requirements. b. Delivery, storage and handling. c. Environmental conditions. d. Project conditions. e. Examination. f. Preparation. g. Cutting and patching. h. Concrete housekeeping pads and foundations. i. Protection. j. Adjusting and cleaning.

1.1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The project is applying for LEED Certification. Contractor shall provide and document

all of its required Work in compliance with specified LEED criteria. 1. Notify Owner of any possible conflict between a specified product and these

LEED requirements and make recommendations on how to resolve the conflict prior to purchasing the product.

2. Contractors are encouraged to make suggestions to Owner that will help to obtain this LEED Certification.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. The following definitions apply to all Work performed under this Contract. See General Conditions and individual specification Sections for additional definitions. 1. APPROVED EQUAL: Similar in design, quality, appearance, size and function

as the specified product as determined by Owner. Bidders planning on including Approved Equal products in their proposal are encouraged to get them approved prior to bid date.

2. BILLABLE LABOR RATE: The billable labor cost shall include an employee’s direct payroll cost plus complete labor burden to cover all additional labor related expenses including all field and office costs, taxes, vacation pay, sick pay, insurances, union related costs and all other fringe benefits.

3. FIELD COSTS: Field Costs include all of Contractor's and its Subcontractors, Engineers and material suppliers direct and indirect project related expenses of any kind that are performed traveling to the site, at the site or returning from the site including administrative costs, overhead costs, profit, overtime or premium time wages (including all benefits) for all on Site project personnel including supervision and engineering and miscellaneous expenses such as travel to and from Site, shipping to and from Site, trailers, temporary facilities, small tools, equipment, etc. required to properly initiate, administer, coordinate and supervise all Work performed by Contractor and its Subcontractors and material suppliers.

GPR-3

4. INCLUDING (INCLUDES/INCLUDED): Included but not limited to. 5. OFFICE COSTS: Office Costs include all of Contractor's and its Subcontractors,

Engineers and material suppliers direct and indirect project related expenses of any kind that are not performed traveling to the site, at the site or returning from the site including administrative and overhead costs, salaries (including all benefits) for all off Site project personnel including office management, estimators, timekeepers, engineering, drafting and clerical personnel and miscellaneous expenses for consulting engineering, permitting, additional liability, builder risk and other insurances, taxes and miscellaneous expenses such as invoicing, reproduction, postage, etc. required to properly initiate, administer, coordinate and supervise all Work performed by Contractor and its Subcontractors and its material suppliers.

6. PROVIDE: To furnish and to install complete (including putting into operation where applicable) ready for the intended use.

7. ROCK: Rock excavation shall include: a. Solid igneous, metamorphic or sedimentary rock which cannot be broken,

ripped or torn and excavated by earthwork equipment without use of continuous and systematic drilling or blasting as determined by soils engineer and Owner, or

b. Loose rock, boulders or old blocks of concrete 1 cubic yard or larger in volume.

c. All other material shall be considered as “unclassified”. 8. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: The date of substantial completion of the Work

is the date established by Owner when construction is sufficiently complete following Contract Documents so Owner can continually occupy and fully utilize Work for use for which it is intended.

9. SUBSTITUTION: A change in a product, material, equipment and method of construction from that required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. See Substitutions herein. a. In making a request for Substitution, Bidder agrees to accept provisions of

Contract Documents regarding Substitutions and represents that: 1) It has personally investigated proposed Substitution(s) and has

determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to Product specified.

2) It will provide same warranty for Substitution as for Product specified. 3) It will coordinate installation of any accepted Substitution into Work,

making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects.

4) It will waive all claims for additional costs related to Substitution which subsequently became apparent.

b. It is understood and agreed that bid submitted is based on furnishing specified standards and entitles Owner to require that such named Products be incorporated into Work, except as Substitutions for same based on supplementary quotations entered above are accepted and incorporated into Contract.

c. Owner strongly encourages Contractor to submit any substitutions that it may want to propose to Owner during Bid Period to obtain Owner’s approval to avoid any misunderstandings regarding their acceptance.

GPR-4

10. UNCLASSIFIED SOIL: All other excavation, except of Rock class, shall be of "unclassified" class. "Unclassified" material includes earth, clay, sand, granular material, organic material, stones, gravel, random materials and loose, broken, weathered, finely layered, fractured or otherwise disintegrated shale, limestone, etc. not defined as Rock.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General Conditions: AEP’s “General Terms and Conditions for Engineering,

Procurement and Construction Work” March 2009 (Rev. 3 dated 6/14) are the General Conditions that will govern all Work under this Contract.

B. Make the following changes to the Project’s General Conditions:

1. ARTICLE 34 PERMITS AND LICENSES: Delete the following from the Article: “, except that Owner shall obtain permits and licenses for all structures which are to become a permanent part of the Site” in Paragraph 41.1. Contractor shall provide all required project permits.

2. Contractor must include with its bid any requested changes that it might want Owner to consider regarding these General Condition requirements.

C. Specifications and Drawings:

1. These specifications and drawings are intended to describe and provide a complete and finished project. They are intended to be complimentary. All items of Work called for by either shall be as binding as if called for by both. The Work described shall be complete in every detail, not withstanding the fact that every item necessarily involved is not particularly mentioned or shown.

2. The intent of the specifications and drawings is to include all items necessary for proper execution and completion of Work, thereby resulting in a completed and integrated whole, ready for Owner's occupancy.

3. Organization of Project Manual into Divisions, Sections, Articles and Paragraphs and arrangement of drawings is intended to provide order to sequence in which information is presented and is not intended to control division of Work among Contractor's various Subcontractors and material suppliers or to establish extent of Work to be performed by any trade. a. Contractor remains solely responsible for division or allocation of Work and

for including all items necessary to complete Work. b. Owner does not assume any responsibility or financial liability for

Contractor's failure to fully follow this requirement regardless of reason. 4. Titles of Divisions, Sections, Articles and Paragraphs in Project Manual and

arrangement of drawings are introduced for organization and convenience only and shall not be taken as a complete or correct segregation of various units of material and labor.

5. No responsibility, direct or implied, is assumed by Owner for omissions or duplications by Contractor or its Subcontractors due to arrangement of subjects in Contract Documents.

D. Minor Deviations: If Owner requests or if field conditions require that the exact

arrangement or location of any item be altered, it shall be done at no additional cost to Owner. Owner may request relocation of any general, mechanical or electrical item a

GPR-5

distance of 10 FT from where indicated without additional cost. E. Insurance - Contractor Provided: (See American Electric Power General Terms and

Conditions for Engineering, Procurement and Construction Work) 1. Contractor must include with its bid (as a Substitution) any requested changes

that it might want Owner to consider regarding these Insurance requirements. F. Regulatory Compliance:

1. General Requirements: a. The edition of each code adapted by the applicable Federal, State, County,

Municipal or other Local bodies having jurisdiction over the Work shall apply to this project. Note that in some cases, this may not be the current edition of the document.

b. Follow more stringent requirement in event of conflict between different codes or regulations.

c. Verify all regulatory compliance requirements prior to submitting bids. d. See individual specification sections for additional requirements.

2. All Work including design and engineering, material packaging, shipping and delivery, handling, labeling, storing and protecting and all construction Work shall be performed in strict compliance with all applicable Federal, State, County, Municipal or other Local bodies having jurisdiction over Work.

3. All Work shall comply with their applicable laws, statutes, codes, rules, regulations, standards and guidelines including IBC, NEC, NFPA.

4. All Work shall also comply with their applicable environmental laws, statutes, codes, rules, regulations, standards and guidelines including local, State or National EPA.

5. All Work shall be designed and installed to conform to Local Utility Company requirements and recommendations.

6. All Work shall be designed, engineered and installed in strict accordance with the requirements of Public Law 91 - 596 entitled Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) of 1970, as amended to date, and IBC ”Chapter 33, Safeguards During Construction”.

7. All Work shall be designed, engineered and installed in strict compliance with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), as amended to date. a. Contact Owner prior to installation if additional information is required.

G. Guarantees:

1. See General Conditions. 2. Provide Owner with the following guarantees:

a. A one-year guarantee against any defects in arising design, materials, equipment or workmanship for all Work required under this contract from the date of Substantial Completion. 1) Note that this includes maintaining the level of all finish surfaces

(without sinking) for all underground sewers, piping, conduit and other trenching.

b. All specified special or extended guarantees. c. All standard guarantees provided by the materials or equipment

manufacturers whether specifically mentioned or not.

GPR-6

3. See individual specification sections for additional information. H. Permits/Inspections/Approvals: Apply for, obtain and pay for all required city, county

and state building and zoning permits, inspections, reviews and approvals including those required individual trade permits. 1. See individual specification sections for additional information.

I. Taxes: Pay all legally required sales, consumers, B&O, use and other taxes.

Consider all material provided under this Contract to be “Real Property”. J. Diversity Contractor Participation:

1. Owner wishes to encourage the use of diversity/minority Contractors, Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors on this project.

2. Contractor shall provide Owner a complete, detailed list of all companies with certified minority ownership including its name, address, contact person and the amount of its subcontract with Contractor. Companies shall be certified by one of the following 3 agencies: a. National Minority Supplier Development Council and their affiliates

(NMSDC). b. Women’s Business Enterprise National Council (WBENC). c. Small Business Administration (SBA) for HUBZone and Small

Disadvantaged Businesses (SDB). K. Temporary Facilities and Controls:

1. Include in bid to Owner, cost of all required temporary facilities and controls including those that are indicated, normally provided for projects that are of this type, size and complexity and that being built at similar locations during the same time period and that are required to properly complete the entire scope of Work indicated within the required Contract Time.

2. General Requirements: a. Include the cost of all connection and use charges unless specifically noted

otherwise. b. Provide energy efficient temporary service installations including local

controls. c. Comply with applicable local regulations for all temporary facilities and

controls. Obtain required permits, tests, inspections and certificates. d. Operate and maintain all required temporary facilities and controls

throughout the construction period. e. Remove all temporary facilities and controls and restore site and building

when they are no longer needed and prior to Substantial Completion. f. Note that a building/construction sign is not required.

3. Utilities including: a. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting service (with local switching)

immediately following partial or complete building enclosure until date of substantial completion. Lighting levels shall be as specified or as required to provide proper illumination for construction operations, safety of the workers, inspections, security and protection of the Work including the minimum lighting levels: 1) At least 2 watts PSF for construction activities.

GPR-7

2) At least 1 light in every room

3) At least 1 light on 20 foot centers

regardless of square foot area of room, except rooms designated as closets or pipe spaces.

in all corridors

4) Exterior lighting required to provide proper illumination for construction operations, safety of the workers, inspections, security and protection of the Work.

. Short corridors less than 20 feet in length shall be provided with 1 light.

b. Water: Provide temporary water service and distribution piping required to properly complete the Work. 1) Coordinate requirements with local water utility. Pay service charges

for connection to existing municipal water service. c. Electricity: Provide temporary electric power service and distribution

system of sufficient size and capacity for required construction operations. 1) Coordinate connection requirements with Local Utility. 2) Install temporary electric service per NFPA 70.

d. HVAC: Provide temporary heat, cooling, ventilation and humidity control required by construction activities for curing and drying of completed installations or for protecting completed construction. 1) Provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane gas or fuel-oil heaters

with individual space thermostatic control. Do not use electric powered temporary heating units.

4. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary self-contained portable chemical toilets and enclosures, wash facilities, paper supplies and drinking water for use by construction personnel. New permanent fixtures facilities may not be used by construction personnel.

5. Security: Provide appropriate construction barriers, temporary fences, lighting, signage and other devices indicated or required to provide for the security of the existing site, building and materials. Equip with required vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks as required by specific project conditions. Design and materials are at Contractor’s option with approval by Owner.

6. Field offices and storage trailers. 7. Fire protection including portable fire extinguishers. 8. Communications including telephones, fax machines and computer connections. 9. Site access including roads, parking areas, storage areas and traffic control. 10. Water control including dewatering facilities. 11. Environmental protection including erosion and sediment control and storm water

control. 12. Waste disposal including dumpsters and their associated dumping fees. 13. Housekeeping:

a. Contractor shall maintain the building and site in a clean and orderly condition at all times.

b. Construction debris shall not be allowed to accumulate. All debris shall be collected and put in a dumpster on a daily basis.

c. All Work areas shall be cleaned at the end of each day and each area left broom clean.

d. Perform final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. See Adjusting and Cleaning herein.

L. Safety: Perform all Work in strict accordance with OSHA, state and local safety

GPR-8

requirements. 1. See General Conditions. 2. Schedule regular safety meetings at the site throughout the project. 3. Notify Owner of any accidents, incidents or near misses that occur at the jobsite

within 24 hours and follow up with a complete report of the occurrence. 4. All construction personnel shall wear appropriate clothing including hard hats,

steel-toed shoes, safety glasses and safety vests. Shorts and tennis shoes are unacceptable.

5. Provide appropriate construction barriers, temporary fences, signage and other devices required to provide safety of construction personnel, Owner's personnel and the public at and adjacent to the Site. Design and materials are at Contractor’s option with approval by Owner.

M. Construction Schedule: Contractor will be required to submit a detailed construction

schedule for Owner’s approval prior to beginning any Work. 1. Break down schedule into each separate required construction activity and

material required. 2. Break activities down to underground Work, above ground rough-in Work and

finish Work (as applicable). 3. Update schedule on a monthly basis and submit updated schedules with each

pay request. N. Schedule of Values: Contractor will be required to submit and Owner’s obtain

approval of a detailed Schedule of Values prior to submitting its first Pay Request. 1. General Requirements:

a. Use AIA Documents G702 “Application and Certificate for Payment” and G703 “Continuation Sheet”.

b. Break down schedule into separate line items for each construction activity and material required.

c. Break down each line item into separate labor and material costs. d. Provide subtotals for each specification division. e. Provide subtotals and percentage complete on each page. f. Provide the grand total and total percentage complete on final page. g. Subdivide Sections requiring both interior and exterior Work. h. Subdivide Sections requiring both below grade and above grade Work. i. Subdivide Sections requiring both rough-in and finish Work. j. Subdivide Sections requiring different products, different types of Work or

Work to be performed at different times to identify each major item therein. 1) For example, subdivide cast-in-place concrete Work into foundations,

retaining walls, exterior slabs- on-grade, curbs, interior slabs-on-grade, interior elevated slabs and other applicable separate, individual, distinct activities.

k. Subdivide Sections requiring different systems such as lighting, power, compressed air, etc.

l. Subdivide Sections additionally as requested. 2. Schedule shall also include a complete breakdown of project General conditions

costs including separate line items for: a. Fees and permits. b. Insurance premiums.

GPR-9

c. Job mobilization. d. Field supervision and layout. e. Temporary facilities, utilities and controls. f. Demolition. g. Final cleaning. h. Job demobilization.

O. Pay Applications:

1. Use AIA documents G702 and G703 Continuation Sheet for Pay Application forms.

2. During the next to last week of each month, submit a preliminary copy of the pay application indicating all Work that has been successfully completed during that month for Owner’s review and comment.

3. During the last week of each month, submit a final pay application including all revisions requested by Owner.

4. Pay periods include all Work successfully completed from the first day of each month through the last day of that month unless otherwise requested by Owner. Include a detailed updated construction schedule with each Pay Application.

5. Owner will withhold 10% retainage throughout the construction period. 6. After completion of all required Work (including correction of all deficiencies

noted in the project’s punch-list), Contractor must submit a separate Pay Application for release of the retainage.

7. See General Conditions for additional information. P. Submittals: Submit the following items to Owner.

1. General Requirements: a. Submit all required submittals in a timely manner so as not to delay the

project. Coordinate with the project’s Construction Schedule. b. Obtain approval of all required submittals prior to ordering any product or

proceeding with the Work. c. Submittals shall have Contractor’s stamp on them indicating their

acceptance prior to submission to Owner. d. Revise and resubmit all required submittals as required to obtain Owner’s

approval. 2. Pre-Construction Submittals – For Owner’s Approval. Obtain approval prior to

first pay application: a. Signed Contract. b. Insurance Certificate. See Insurance Requirements herein. c. Labor and Equipment Rates. Provide for all trades and equipment to be

used at the Site. d. Detailed Schedule of Values. See Schedule of Values requirements

herein. e. Detailed Construction Schedule. See Construction Schedule requirements

herein. f. Diversity Contractor Participation list. See Diversity Contractor

Participation requirements herein. 3. Construction Submittals – For Architect’s Review, Approval and Selection.

a. Product Data: Submit complete product data for every product to be provided on the project including manufacturer’s brochures, detailed

GPR-10

material specifications, catalog cut sheets, wiring diagrams, performance characteristics, installation instructions and maintenance recommendations.

b. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings for every product to be provided on the project including detailed plans and elevations (at appropriate scale to properly review the design) showing all pertinent dimensioning, details, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, relationship with adjacent materials, schedules, notes and complete design calculations.

c. Manufacturer’s Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit current MSDS for every product used on the project except for those made of glass, metal, wood, cork and natural rubber.

d. Color and Finish Samples: Provide complete color and finish samples for every product requiring a color or finish selection on this project including its current complete available color range. Include manufacturer’s full range or special finish selections where specified.

e. Test Results. f. HVAC Balance Report. g. Contractor’s Pay Applications. See Pay Application requirements herein. h. Submit electronically or provide a sufficient number of hard copies of each

required construction submission to allow Owner to keep 3 copies of each submission.

4. Construction Submittals – For Owner’s Records. Obtain approval prior to submitting final Pay Application. a. Permits (including final Occupancy Permit). b. Test Reports.

5. Post-Construction Submittals – For Owner’s Approval and Records. Obtain approval prior to submitting final Pay Application. a. Record Drawings. See Record Documents requirements herein. b. As-Built prints. See Record Documents requirements herein. c. O & M Manuals: See Record Documents requirements herein. d. Owner’s Substantial Completion Certificate, Affidavit of Completion and

Contract Completion Certificate. See General Conditions for Affidavit of Completion Form. Request other forms from Owner.

6. Revise and resubmit all submittals as required to obtain Owner’s approval. Q. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the required location of all equipment and devices with Owner’s conceptual furniture and equipment layout.

2. Coordinate layout with other trades making required minor adjustments in location.

3. Location of structure and ceilings shall take precedence over final location of all mechanical and electrical Work where conflicts occur.

4. Coordinate required voltage and phase of each equipment item with Electrical Subcontractor before ordering any materials.

5. Coordinate installation of access panels and doors to allow convenient access to the item requiring access.

6. Do not install any equipment and devices that will restrict Owner’s intended use of the site or building.

GPR-11

R. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more criteria is shown or two or

more standards are specified and the criteria or standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities, quality levels or other requirements, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Owner for a decision before proceeding.

S. Request for Information (RFIs):

1. Immediately on discovery of the need for an interpretation of the Contract Documents, prepare and submit an RFI to Owner in the form specified.

2. RFIs shall originate from the Contractor only. 3. Use CSI Form 13.2A or comparable form approved by Owner. Electronic copies

are also acceptable. 4. Include a complete, detailed legible description of the item needing

interpretation. 5. Owner will review each RFI, determine action required and return it to Contractor

within 5 working days after receiving all information required to properly respond to it.

T. Notice of Commencement: As a utility, Owner has the option by State law to be

exempt from the state’s requirement to provide Contractor and its Subcontractors with a Notice of Commencement for a construction project and it elects not to do so.

1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Site Examination:

1. Contractor and each Subcontractor shall become familiar with the conditions including any restrictions under which the Work is to be performed.

2. Field verify actual project requirements prior to bid date to determine obstacles that may be encountered, the actual demolition requirements and the size, location and availability of utility tie-ins needed to properly complete the scope of Work indicated or required.

3. Examine bidding documents and construction site carefully to obtain firsthand knowledge of existing conditions and limitations under which Work is to be performed and to correlate these observations with requirements of Bidding Documents.

4. Contact Owner during bid period (or assume responsibility for) for any additional information or clarification that is needed to properly bid the project based on existing site conditions.

5. Contractor will not be given extra compensation for conditions that can be determined by thoroughly and carefully examining Site and documents.

B. Use of Site:

1. Contractor shall have unrestricted use of the site. When necessary, coordinate use of site with Owner and any of Owner’s Subcontractors.

2. See Temporary Facilities and Controls herein for additional information. C. Hazardous Materials:

1. Unless specifically shown otherwise, Contractor shall assume that no hazardous

GPR-12

materials are present at the Work site. 2. Stop Work and notify Owner immediately if any suspicious conditions are

discovered.

1.5 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS A. See General Conditions. B. In entering into a contract covering this Work, Contractor agrees to accept the

specifications and drawings and guarantees that the Work shall be carried out in accordance with their requirements therein or with such authorized modifications made to them.

C. Contractor is only eligible to receive additional compensation for any part of this scope

of Work if: 1. Owner changes the scope of this Work. 2. Documented unknown conditions are encountered that could not have been

reasonably assumed by Contractor as being included as part of the scope of Work.

D. Contractor is not eligible to receive additional compensation for overtime costs, “quick-

ship” costs or similar costs that may be incurred by Contractor to comply with Contract terms such as meeting the required date for Substantial Completion.

E. Contractor Requested Changes:

1. Should Contractor believe that it is entitled to either an increase in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time, it shall notify Owner within 10 days after such an occurrence has taken place. a. Contractor shall provide Owner with a detailed explanation of the proposed

change to the Contract within this 10 day time frame or Owner does not have any obligation to consider the request.

2. Cost: Contractor’s Change Order Requests (COR) for any requested cost change shall be the complete compensation to Contractor for performing the proposed change including all related additional Office and Field costs. See Definitions herein. a. The COR shall be broken down as requested by Owner, shall include

separate labor and material costs and shall be accompanied with copies of material quotations, subcontractor’s proposals, time sheets, wage scales, etc. as required by Owner to adequately document the proposed change.

3. Time: Contractor’s CORs for any requested or required change shall include any schedule impact for the change being considered. Performance of any Work included in a Change Order by Contractor shall not change Contract Time, extend Contract schedule or relieve Contractor from schedule commitments in the Contract unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Change Order approved by Owner. a. Should Owner, solely at its option, elect to approve a Contract Time

extension requested by Contractor for any other reason (including that for inclement weather, labor or material acquisition related problems, additional time necessitated by Work included in a previously approved

GPR-13

change order or by the accumulative effect on the schedule caused by multiple change orders), it shall be done at no additional cost to Owner.

F. Owner Requested Changes:

1. Should Owner want to make a change to the contractual scope of Work, it will issue a Request for Proposal (RFP) detailing the requested change to Contractor.

2. The RFP will identify if the Contractor’s proposal should be prepared on a lump sum, unit price, time and material, cost-plus or other basis.

3. Contractor shall prepare a complete COR as noted above in response to Owner’s RFP for Owner’s consideration within the time frame requested.

4. The issuance of this RFP does not authorize Contractor to proceed with the Work outlined therein nor obligate Owner in any way. Contractor will be authorized to proceed only upon the issuance of a Change Order by Owner.

G. Markups:

1. Markups shall be Contractor's total installed prices to Owner including all related Office Costs and Field Costs for any added or deleted Work requested by Owner or required to complete Work (and previously approved by Owner) in addition to that which is beyond the Scope of Work indicated. See Definitions herein.

2. Contractor's and its Subcontractors' allowable markups for material, labor, equipment, Subcontracted Work, etc. included in a Contract modification for extra work or premium time work shall not exceed those identified in the Contract or which are otherwise previously agreed upon prior to commencing any of this work.

3. No other cost increases for any reason can be applied to these approved markups.

4. Approved markups shall be applicable throughout the Contract Time. H. Unit Prices:

1. General Requirements: a. Unit prices shall be Contractor's and its Subcontractor’s total installed

prices to Owner including all related Office Costs and Field Costs for any added or deleted Work requested by Owner or required to complete Work (and previously approved by Owner) in addition to that which is beyond the Scope of Work indicated. See Definitions herein.

b. Contractor's and its Subcontractors' allowable unit prices for material, labor, equipment, Subcontracted Work, etc. included in a Contract modification for extra work or premium time work shall not exceed those identified in the Contract or which are otherwise previously agreed upon prior to commencing any of this work.

c. No other markups for any reason can be applied to these approved unit prices.

d. Approved unit prices shall be applicable throughout the Contract Time. 2. Earthwork:

a. Unit prices for all types of excavation, fill and backfill shall include all materials, equipment charges (including freight, fuel and operator costs), "unclassified" material removal, compaction and off-site material procurement or disposal costs and fees where required unless specifically

GPR-14

noted otherwise. b. Separate unit prices will be required for loading and hauling materials on

site or to or from Site if required. c. Unit prices for "general" (bulk or mass) excavation and fill shall apply to

Work in areas accessible to larger earthwork equipment and utilizing conventional construction techniques such as rough grading, underground tank installation or establishment of an engineered building pad.

d. Unit prices for trenching and backfill Work shall apply to Work in areas inaccessible to larger earthwork equipment and that requires special construction techniques such as small machine or hand compaction due to restricted working areas or protection of existing construction such as foundation or utility line installation.

3. Unsuitable Soil: If encountered, Contractor will receive additional compensation to remove (over excavate) any Unsuitable Soil and to replace it back to the required sub-grade elevation using the Unit Prices on the Bid Form if the following conditions are strictly complied with. a. The project’s geotechnical engineer will identify Unsuitable Soil. b. The project’s geotechnical engineer will be responsible to document the

exact locations, limits and quantities where Unsuitable Soil was removed. c. Each day, the project’s geotechnical engineer shall survey the area to

identify top of Unsuitable Soil and limits of Unsuitable Soil at all locations where Unsuitable Soil removal is required during the day.

d. Each day Contractor shall notify Owner of the estimated quantity of Unsuitable Soil requiring removal on that day before any Unsuitable Soil is removed.

e. Each day, the project’s geotechnical engineer shall prepare a signed, stamped, certified, accurate computerized drawing showing exact location of Unsuitable Soil, top of Unsuitable Soil, limits of Unsuitable Soil, depth of Unsuitable Soil and quantities of “unsuitable soil” removed during that day and Contractor shall submit this drawing to Owner within 10 days of the Unsuitable Soil removal. Hand drawn sketches are not acceptable

f. All required fill and backfill shall provide a minimum 95% compaction following ASTM D698 (cohesive materials) or 80% ASTM D4253 and D4254 (granular materials) as applicable.

g. Failure to comply with these requirements will result in Contractor forfeiting its right for any additional compensation for this work.

1.6 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. Owner Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment: Owner will furnish FOB jobsite all

items shown to be Owner Furnished/Contractor Installed. Contractor shall unload, store, protect, install and connect all of these products following General Installation Requirements herein. These include: 1. Carpet tile (and adhesive). 2. Owner and Contractor shall jointly inspect all Owner Furnished/Contractor

installed equipment as it arrives at the site B. Owner Furnished/Owner Installed Equipment: Owner will furnish and install the

following loose equipment items. Contractor shall provide all utilities indicated for this

GPR-15

equipment unless specifically noted otherwise. 1. Office Equipment: Includes cubicles, desks, chairs, tables, cabinets, bookcases,

shelves and file cabinets. 2. Shop/Storeroom Equipment: Includes pallet racks, shelving and bins. 3. Break Room Equipment: Includes tables and chairs, vending machines,

refrigerators.

C. Coordinate installation of these products including applicable delivery and installation schedules with Owner.

1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. See Definitions herein. B. When the Contractor believes that the project is substantially complete, it shall request

that Owner performs a pre-final inspection of the project. C. Prior to this inspection, Contractor shall have performed the following tasks:

1. Submit to Owner the project’s Occupancy Permit. 2. Perform the project’s final cleaning. 3. Removed its temporary facilities from the site. 4. Submit to Owner a punch list that it has compiled noting any Work that is either

not completed or is not in compliance with the Contract Documents and a schedule for when this Work will be completed.

D. Owner will then inspect the project to confirm that it is Substantially Complete and will

issue a list (punch list) of any deficiencies that it observes and a schedule for when the corrections need to be completed.

E. If the project meets the criteria to be Substantially Complete at this time, Owner will

issue a Substantial Completion Certificate to Contractor. F. Contractor shall diligently purse correction of all of the items noted in the Owner’s

punch-list and shall advise Owner when they have been completed. G. Owner will then perform a final inspection of the project to confirm that all of the noted

deficiencies have been corrected in a satisfactory manner.

1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide Owner with the following Record Documents within 45 days after the date of

Substantial Completion. Acceptance by Owner of all Record Documents must occur prior to Contractor requesting its release of retention.

B. Record Drawings: Provide Owner with 1 complete set of marked up Record Drawings

clearly showing all changes made by Extra Work Order, Change Order or field requirements.

C. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals:

GPR-16

1. Applicability: Provide complete operating and maintenance data on all general contract, fire protection, plumbing, HVAC and electrical systems and equipment used in the project.

2. Note that this is a contract closeout requirement and release of retention will not be made until these have been satisfactorily submitted.

3. Title/Cover Sheets: Identify manuals with typed or printed titles "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", name of Project and subject matter included on binder spines and front cover.

4. Table of Contents: Prepare a title page and table of contents for each binder, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in 3 parts as follows: a. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of

Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors and major equipment suppliers. b. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system,

subsystem and equipment subdivided by specification Section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1) Significant design criteria. 2) List of equipment.

c. Part 3: Complete parts list for each component. 5. Binders:

a. Compile material in heavy duty, loose-leaf, vinyl covered, commercial quality, 3-ring binders sized to hold 8-1/2” x 11 paper with durable plastic covers and thickness(es) necessary to accommodate contents.

b. Binders shall have clear plastic sleeves on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversized drawings.

c. Organize into sets of manageable size. d. Clearly label and divide with reinforced pre-punched binder tabs using

Project Manual's Table of Contents. e. Provide separate binders for each trade.

6. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem an equipment. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

7. Submit 2 complete O & M manuals to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.0 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Selection Procedures:

1. The term Product as used herein shall mean a specific manufacturer’s product, a specific manufacturer or a specific product source identified in the specifications.

2. Basis of Design: Project requirements shown on the Drawings including sizes, clearances, utilities, weights, substrate requirements, etc. are based on the Basis of Design. a. Should Contractor elect to provide any product other that the Basis of

Design, it shall be responsible to coordinate and pay for all changes needed to be made to the project to properly install the product that it has elected to provide.

GPR-17

3. Proprietary: When only one product is identified followed by the word “proprietary”, it is the Basis of Design product, it is the only acceptable product and it must be provided on this project without exception.

4. When only one product is identified without being followed by the word “proprietary” or followed by the term “Approved Equal”, it is the Basis of Design product. Its specific requirements are shown to illustrate Owner’s minimum required level of quality, finish, size, appearance, function, operation, etc. and it is not intended to be proprietary. Contractor may provide either the Basis of Design product or an “Approved Equal” product subject to compliance with requirements of the Basis of Design product. See Definitions herein.

5. When a list of products is identified without the term “Approved Equal” at the end of the list, the first listed product is the Basis of Design. Contractor must provide either the Basis of Design product or any one of the other products listed subject to compliance with the Basis of Design product.

6. When a list of products is identified with the term “Approved Equal” at the end of the list, the first listed product is the Basis of Design. Contractor may either provide the Basis of Design product, any one of the other products listed or an “Approved Equal” product subject to compliance with requirements of the Basis of Design product.

7. References: When a product is identified using one or more reference to a building code, industry standard, trade association or construction organization’s publication (such as an ASTM, Federal Specifications, ASHRAE, ANSI, ADA, NEC, SMACNA, NRCA, UL or NMCA document), the specifications, requirements and recommendations of that referenced publication or publications become part of this Contract and Contractor shall provide a product in compliance with all applicable provisions of that document or those documents.

8. Substitutions: When a product does not comply with requirements of proceeding items 1 through 6 (as applicable), it is a Substitution. See Definitions herein. a. Contractor must propose any substitution within 60 days after the Contract

Date for it to be considered by Owner for possible inclusion in the project. 9. Color and Finish Selections:

a. Standard Range: When specifications include a phase such as “selected by Owner from manufacturer’s standard range of colors, finishes, patterns or textures”, Owner will make selections from manufacturer’s product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: When specifications include a phase such as “selected by Owner from manufacturer’s full range of colors, patterns or textures”, Owner will make selections from manufacturer’s product line that includes both standard and premium items.

c. Custom Color: When specifications include a phase such as “color to match adjacent siding”, Owner will provide manufacturer with a color and finish sample for it to provide a custom color match.

d. If the specifications do not mention whether Owner requires the manufacturer to provide a standard range, full range or custom color selection, it will be assumed that a standard selection will be required.

10. All products shall comply with current local and state building code requirements including required fire resistance rating, flame spread, smoke developed and surface burning characteristics and shall be acceptable with the jurisdiction

GPR-18

having authority over the project. 11. All products shall be new, undamaged and in good working condition unless

specifically shown otherwise. 12. Wherever possible, provide similar products from the same source such as

hollow metal doors and frames, hardware, gypsum wall assemblies, paint, toilet accessories and fire extinguishers and cabinets.

13. Field verify dimensions and other governing conditions prior to ordering and fabricating materials.

B. Incidental Items:

1. These Drawings and specifications are intended to provide for a complete and finished project. They are complimentary and all items of Work called for by either shall be binding as if called for by both.

2. The Work described shall be complete in every detail, not withstanding the fact that every item necessarily involved is not particularly mentioned or shown.

3. Contractor shall include within its bid to Owner all incidental and accessory items needed provide for a complete and finished project.

C. Fire Resistance Ratings: In general, fire ratings listed are based on tests performed

by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Contractor may provide products complying with testing performed by other accredited testing laboratories such as Factory Mutual or Intertek Testing Services (Warnok Hershey) if they are accredited and approved by State and local government officials in which Project is located.

D. Electrical Characteristics:

1. All electrical equipment and devices shall be UL, NEMA and NEC compliant (as applicable).

2. Coordinate available voltages, phases, NEMA plug configurations and all other job specific electrical requirements with Electrical Sub-Contractor prior to ordering any equipment.

3. Adjust equipment electrical characteristics as required by specific project conditions.

4. Do not order any product requiring electrical power until after this coordination has been made.

E. Firestopping:

1. Firestop all interruptions to fire and smoke rated assemblies, materials and components using UL approved materials and designs.

2. Seal all penetrations through and perimeter openings above, below, between and all round fire rated walls to prevent spread of heat, flame, toxic gases, hot gasses and cold smoke required to continue specified assembly fire rating following applicable building codes and regulations for General Construction only.

3. Each individual trade shall provide firestopping for its own Work. 4. Firestop Designs: Selection of the appropriate firestop designs is by Contractor.

Designs selected must be approved by the code authority having jurisdiction over the project and shall maintain the integrity of the firewall being protected.

5. Products: Provide all required caulks, sealants, foams, putties, packing materials, sprays, mats, pillows, tapes and other materials and accessories

GPR-19

required to properly install the selected designs. 6. Approved Manufacturers: 3M Fire Protection Products, HILTI, Inc., W. R. Grace

Construction Products, Tremco, Inc., Approved Equal. 7. Submittals:

a. See Submittal Requirements herein. b. Provide complete product data for each firestop design to be used on this

project. Include current UL Design approvals. F. Sample Panels/Mockups:

1. Where called for in the individual specification Sections, provide a sample panel or mockup to verify the selections made and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.

2. The sample panel or mockup is to clearly indicate the materials and methods, aesthetic effect and minimum quality of workmanship to be provided

3. Sample panels and mockups shall be of sufficient size to allow Owner to review them for this purpose.

throughout the project.

4. Correct or rebuild sample panels or mockups until approved by Owner. 5. Do not remove sample panels or mockups until final acceptance of the

applicable Work. 6. Acceptance of a sample panel or mockup by Owner does not constitute approval

of deviations from the Contract requirements unless specifically approved by Owner in writing.

G. Maintenance (Extra) Materials:

1. Provide all required maintenance materials prior to date of Substantial Completion.

2. Provide maintenance materials in the types and quantities specified. See individual specification sections for requirements.

3. Provide maintenance materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging that is clearly marked with its contents.

4. Store maintenance materials on site as directed by Owner. 5. Obtain Owner’s written acceptance of all required maintenance materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.0 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General Requirements:

1. Quality Control: All products shall be shipped, handled, labeled, stored, protected and installed in strict compliance with specified regulatory compliance requirements and with their manufacturers and referenced standards specifications, instructions, recommendations and other requirements.

2. Schedule: Each Subcontractor shall coordinate its equipment delivery and installation schedules with the Contractor’s overall project construction schedule so as not to delay the project.

3. References: When a reference is made to a building code or industry standard organization’s publication (such as included in an ASTM, Federal Specifications, ASHRAE, ANSI, ADA, TAS, OSHA, NEC, SMACNA, NRCA, UL or NMCA document), the specifications, requirements and recommendations of that

GPR-20

referenced publication become part of this Contract and Contractor shall provide installation methods and techniques in compliance with all applicable provisions of that document or documents.

4. Install all products plumb, level, flat, true to line with established lines and grades, neatly cut and fitted and secure.

5. Provide fasteners that are appropriate for the substrate indicated. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. Use rust resistant fasteners for all exterior Work and in interior “wet” areas such as showers and truck wash bays.

6. Corrosion Protection: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and/or other adjacent materials to avoid direct contact with incompatible materials.

7. Do not load structure with weights that will endanger structure. B. Delivery, Storage and Handling:

1. Coordinate delivery schedules, storage locations and installation sequencing and scheduling with Contractor to assure that they do not negatively impact the project schedule.

2. Transport, handle and store material in manufacturer’s original unopened protective packaging or containers in secure, locked storage locations. a. Promptly inspect shipments upon arrival to ensure that Products follow

Project requirements, quantities are correct and Products are undamaged. b. Store and protect Products following referenced standards' and

manufacturers' instructions with seals and labels intact and legible. c. Provide necessary dunnage, tarpaulins, protective materials, equipment

and personnel to properly handle Products using methods that prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage.

d. Be responsible for the safe and sanitary condition and protection of delivery, storage and setup areas and for security and safety of equipment, material and supplies stored on site.

e. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify Products are undamaged and are being maintained in acceptable condition.

f. Move on-site equipment or materials when required to expedite Work or which interfere with construction activity or operations of Owner.

g. Return all storage areas to equal or better than original condition before use (unless shown otherwise) when no longer needed.

C. Environmental Conditions:

1. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Product.

2. Store Products to provide protection from weather and damage. Store sensitive Products in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures. Do not deliver to Site until such storage is available.

3. Do not deliver any temperature, moisture or otherwise environmentally sensitive materials to the site until after the building is enclosed with either temporary or permanent heating and ventilating systems are operating.

4. Acclimate applicable materials at site as recommended by their manufacturers prior to installation.

GPR-21

D. Project Conditions: 1. Field measure all governing dimensions at site prior to fabrication of any

products with critical dimensions including overhead doors, windows, casework, toilet partitions, lockers, accordion folding partitions, built-in and recessed items.

2. Recesses: Installation Subcontractor shall coordinate recess requirements including cut-out sizes and locations, wood blocking, concealed reinforcing, built-in anchors and other required supports and utility requirements for all products to be built into the Work with the applicable Subcontractor. a. Provide detailed approved shop drawings to the applicable substrate

Subcontractor well in advance of the actual construction. 3. Verify that environmental conditions and substrates are in compliance with

manufacturer’s maximum moisture content prior to drywall finishing and installation of painting, acoustical ceiling tile, flooring materials and other environmentally sensitive products.

4. Protect in-place adjacent substrates and finishes from damage due to installation of subsequent Work.

E. Examination:

1. Products: Contractor and Installation Subcontractor shall examine all products upon their arrival at site to assure that they are the correct product and that they have arrived in good condition and in sufficient quantities. a. Remove any rejected product immediately from the site and order its

replacement as required to maintain the project schedule. 2. Substrates: Installation Subcontractor shall examine substrates, openings,

supports (including concrete bases, wood blocking, steel and structural supports), moisture content, surface conditions, installation tolerances, critical dimensions, utility size and location requirements, environmental conditions and other conditions affecting proper installation and performance of its Work to confirm that they comply with the product manufacturer’s tolerances and other requirements. a. Substrates for all finish flooring materials shall be free of cracks, ridges,

depressions, scale and foreign deposits that might interfere with the adhesion or appearance of the finish flooring material.

3. Do not install any damaged material into the Work. 4. Do not proceed with the installation of any product until unsatisfactory conditions

have been corrected. 5. Beginning installation implies that conditions are acceptable with the Installation

Subcontractor who shall be responsible for the final installation.

F. Preparation 1. Take field measurements required to properly perform this Work, 2. Obtain Owner's approval of previous Work prior to proceeding wherever

required. 3. Verify that Work of other trades concealed by this Work has been inspected and

approved before proceeding with this Work. 4. Cooperate with trades whose Work comes in contact with this Work. Provide

such information or installations necessary to assure proper installation of this Work.

GPR-22

5. Ensure availability of sufficient labor, equipment and materials to correctly and continuously precede with this Work once this Work has begun. .

6. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors and other embeds supplied by this Work to other Sections or required for this Work and supplied by other Sections.

7. Provide temporary bracing during installation of this Work wherever required. Maintain in place until no longer required.

8. Prepare substrate surfaces following manufacturer's specifications, requirements, instructions and recommendations. Thoroughly clean substrate removing oil, grease, paint, varnish, hardeners and other items which would adversely affect installation of this Work. Provide primers required by manufacturer for various substrates surfaces if required. Vacuum substrate immediately prior to installation where applicable.

9. Starting this Work implies that Contractor is satisfied that surfaces and substrates are in manufacturer's required conditions and that it will be held responsible for failure to secure results required.

G. Cutting and Patching:

1. General Contractor and each Subcontractor are responsible for all costs associated with the necessary cutting and patching required for the proper installation of their Work.

2. Do not cut, alter or reduce any load-bearing member without the specific written approval of the project’s Structural Engineer.

3. Avoid cutting of concrete, masonry, tile and other finished materials by use of properly sized and installed sleeves and inserts. a. Sleeves shall be flush with surfaces of walls and 2” above floors. b. Sleeves shall be sized to accommodate the penetrating item plus ¼”

annular clear space on all sides. c. Seal annular space between the penetrating item and sleeve with a

material that is appropriate for both its required location and compatible with the penetrating item.

d. All piping passing through floors (except for slab on grade) or exterior walls shall have the sleeves packed with oakum and caulked watertight, and rodent-proof.

4. Cut holes through concrete, masonry, tile and other finished materials (when necessary) using rotary core drilling.

5. Patching shall be performed by the trade proper for each material to be patched. 6. Patching shall leave the premises and finishes in a complete and neat condition

comparable to the original. All repairs shall blend in inconspicuously with adjacent surfaces.

7. All painting shall be done by the project’s painting Subcontractor. 8. Maintain the fire integrity of all walls, floors and ceilings. Provide firestopping at

all sleeves penetrating fire rated construction as required to maintain its fire rated integrity. See Firestopping herein.

H. Concrete Housekeeping Pads, Foundations and Other Supports:

1. The Contractor or Subcontractor whose equipment the concrete pad, foundation or other support services, is to design, locate, size and pay for the concrete pad, foundation or other support.

GPR-23

2. All interior and exterior concrete pads, etc. above grade, exposed to view or exposed to weather shall be installed by the project’s Concrete Subcontractor. a. Exception: All exterior concrete light standard (pole) bases shall be

provided by the Electrical Subcontractor. 3. All interior and exterior below grade concrete required for piping, conduit, etc.

shall be installed by the Subcontractor whose material the concrete services. 4. Install all interior and exterior floor-mounted mechanical and electrical equipment

on a reinforced concrete pad or foundation. Verify requirements with the equipment manufacturer.

5. Fabricate the base 4” high and a minimum 4” larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the equipment that it will support. Provide a 1” chamfer on top edge and corners of pad.

I. Protection:

1. Protect products from damage due to weather including high and low temperatures, condensation and other water damage, direct sunlight, construction activities and other causes of deterioration during construction.

2. After installation, cover and prohibit traffic all flooring materials as recommended by the product manufacturer. Remove at final cleaning.

3. After installation, provide and maintain protective coverings on all pre-finished and site-finished products as required to protect their finishes in accordance with their manufacturer’s recommendations. Remove at final cleaning.

4. Remove and replace all damaged components or the entire unit if the product cannot be restored to its original condition.

J. Adjusting and Cleaning:

1. After completion of each product installation, clean finished surfaces in accordance with their manufacturer’s recommendations to remove all labels, excessive adhesive, marks, soiled surfaces, dust, blemishes and other foreign materials. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

2. Remove all paint drips and overspray from surfaces not intended to be painted. 3. Touch up all damaged areas with same material used as for shop priming or

finish painting. 4. Adjust and lubricate all moving parts including hardware, limit switches, etc.

according to manufacturer’s written instructions to assure proper operation. 5. Adjust all doors and hardware for unencumbered, smooth operation without

warping or binding. 6. Where applicable, remove temporary protective coverings and strippable film at

time of installation unless otherwise recommended by the product manufacturer. 7. Perform a thorough final cleaning of the building and site just prior to the

project’s final inspection and Owner’s acceptance. Thoroughly clean all products to their original condition in accordance with their manufacturer’s recommendations. This cleaning shall include all: a. Exterior asphalt paved areas including drives and parking areas, concrete

areas including sidewalks and storage pads and stone paved areas including storage yards.

b. Building exterior surfaces. c. Lawn and landscaped areas including removal of all trash, construction

materials and other debris.

GPR-24

d. Floor surfaces including vacuuming of all carpeted areas and mopping of all VCT and tiled floors.

e. Interior and exterior glass. f. Mirrors and toilet accessories. g. Plumbing fixtures. h. Interiors of all cabinets, drawers, lockers, etc.

END OF GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

American Electric Power 00 31 32.16 – 1 Corpus Christi Service Center SITEWORK LABORATORY TESTING SCHEDULE

SECTION 00 31 32.16 - SITEWORK LABORATORY TESTING SCHEDULE 1.01 DENSITIES A. Compacted Embankment Minimum 1 per 500 SY per 12” Lift B. Building Pad Subgrade 1 per 4,000 SF C. Building Pad Select Fill 1 per 4,000 SF per 12” Compacted Lifts D. Stabilized Subgrade Minimum 1 per 500 SY of Paving E. Utility Trench Backfill As Req’d (Min. 1 per 12” lift/200 LF) Proctors (Moisture - Density Relationships): F. Raw Site Material 1 Unless Material Changes G. Compacted Embankment 1 Unless Material Changes H. Limestone Base 1 Unless Material Changes I. Select Fill Utilities 1 Unless Material Changes 1.02 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE A. Field Sieve Analysis After Final Mixing 1 per Day B. Eades & Grim Test for Lime 1 for each Type Soil Stabilizing Agent Certification Receive Mill Certificate from Supplier on each Load (Stabilized Subgrade and Base) 1.03 ATTERBERG LIMITS AND GRADATION

A. Caliche (if utilized) 1 per 5,000 CY of Material 1.04 LOS ANGELES ABRASION LOSS A. Limestone Base 1 per 5,000 CY of Material 1.05 HOT MIX CONTROL A. Surface Course Design Furnished by Supplier B. Lab Site Sampling, Molding, Lab Density, Stability, Max. Theo. Specific Gravity (Rice Gravity) and Extraction 1 per Project or 500 Tons C. Cored In-Place Density Air Voids, Thickness of Compacted Mix 1 per 2,500 SY 1.06 CONCRETE A. Curb/Gutter 1 set (3) per 500’ B. Inlets 1 set (3) per 3 inlets C. Trash Dumpster Pad 1 set (3) per pad D. Sidewalks 1 set (3) per 4,000 SF E. Concrete Pavement 1 set (3) per 75 CY

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 00 31 32 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS

SECTION 00 31 32

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SOIL BORINGS A. Test borings have been made at the site of the improvements. Logs of the test

borings are included in a report titled, "Geotechnical Engineering Report for Proposed AEP Service Center, Corpus Christi, Texas (#03281774). The investigation and report were prepared by Professional Service Industries, Inc. (PSI), Harlingen, Texas.

1. A copy of the report is included in this Project Manual. B. Logs of the test borings are not warranted by the Owner or the Architect, except

that they reflect the best and only information available at the time of design.

END OF SECTION

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY AEP NEW SERVICE CENTER

AYERS STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS

Prepared for:

American Electric Power Service Corporation 1 Riverside Plaza

Columbus, Ohio 43125

Prepared by:

Tolunay-Wong Engineers, Inc. 826 South Padre Island Drive Corpus Christi, Texas 78416

April 20, 2017

Project No. 17.53.016 / Report No. 15237

Tolunay-Wong~Engineers, Inc. 826 South Padre Island Drive • Corpus Christi , Texas 78416 • Phone (361) 884-5050

April 20, 2017

American Electric Power Service Corporation 1 Riverside Plaza Columbus, Ohio 43125

Attn: Mr. David A. Rinaldi, NCARB Senior Architect [email protected]

Ref: Geotechnical Engineering Study AEP New Service Center Ayers Street Corpus Christi, Texas TWE Project No. 17.53.016 I Report No. 15237

Dear Mr. Rinaldi,

Tolunay-Wong Engineers, Inc. (TWE) is pleased to submit this report of our geotechnical engineering study for the above referenced project. This report contains a detailed description of the field program and laboratory services performed for this geotechnical engineering study as well as soil boring logs. Also included in this report are our geotechnical design and construction recommendations for the proposed AEP New Service Center in Corpus Christi, Texas.

We appreciate the opportunity to work with you on this phase of the project and look forward to the opportunity of providing additional services as the project progresses. If you have any questions or comments regarding this report or if we can be of further assistance, please contact us.

Sincerely,

TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. Texas Board of Professional Engineers Firm Registration Number F-000124

. P_f ,(I I !~~

Raul A. Saavedra, E.I.T. Project Engineer

DRR/ras/drr

TWE Project No. 17.53.016 Report No. 15237 i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION 1-1 1.1 Introduction 1-1 1.2 Project Description 1-1

2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES 2-1

3 FIELD PROGRAM 3-1 3.1 Soil Borings 3-1 3.2 Drilling Methods 3-1 3.3 Soil Sampling 3-1 3.4 Boring Logs 3-2 3.5 Groundwater Measurements 3-2

4 LABORATORY SERVICES 4-1

5 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 5-1 5.1 General 5-1 5.2 Site Description and Surface Conditions 5-1 5.3 Subsurface Conditions 5-1 5.4 Subsurface Soil Properties 5-1 5.5 Groundwater Observations 5-2

6 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS 6-1 6.1 Discussion 6-1 6.2 Drilled and Underreamed Piers 6-1 6.3 Grade Beams 6-3 6.4 Building Floor Slabs 6-4

7 EARTHWORK CONSIDERATIONS 7-1 7.1 Subgrade Preparation and Structural Select Fill 7-1 7.2 Drainage 7-2

8 LIMITATIONS AND DESIGN REVIEW 8-1 8.1 Limitations 8-1 8.2 Design Review 8-1 8.3 Construction Monitoring 8-1 8.4 Closing Remarks 8-1

TWE Project No. 17.53.016 Report No. 15237 ii

TABLES AND APPENDICES

TABLES

Table 4-1 Laboratory Testing Program 4-1

Table 5-1 Groundwater Level Measurements 5-2

Table 7-1 Compaction Equipment and Maximum Lift Thickness 7-1

APPENDICES

Appendix A: Soil Boring Location Plan TWE Drawing No. 17.53.016-1

Appendix B: Log of Project Borings and a Key to Terms and Symbols used on Boring Logs

TWE Project No. 17.53.016 1-1 Report No. 15237

1 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Introduction

This report presents the results of our geotechnical engineering study performed for the AEP new Service Center between Ayers Street and State Highway 286 in Corpus Christi, Texas. Our geotechnical engineering study was conducted in accordance with TWE Proposal No. P17-C043 dated March 10, 2017. The study was authorized by Professional Services Agreement No. 02913661X211 between American Electric Power Service Corporation and Tolunay-Wong Engineers, Inc. on March 17, 2017.

1.2 Project Description

The project consists of a new service center between Ayers Street and State Highway 286 in Corpus Christi, Texas for American Electric Power Service Corporation. The new facility will include a new 95,000 square-foot, one-story building. It is anticipated that the new structure will have steel interior framing with heavy tilt-wall exterior panels. The roof will be ballasted with composite concrete slab on metal deck. We understand that maximum column loads may be on the order of 300 kips (1 kip = 1,000lbs) and maximum wall loads of up to 3 kips per lineal foot. The new building will be constructed within 1 to 2-ft. of existing grade.


2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES

The purposes of our geotechnical engineering study were to investigate the soil and groundwater conditions within the project site and to provide geotechnical design and construction recommendations for the proposed facility.

Our scope of services performed for the project consisted of:

1. Drilling six (6) soil borings to depths of 25-ft. to 60-ft. within the proposed building footprint to evaluate subsurface stratigraphy and groundwater conditions;

2. Performing geotechnical laboratory tests on recovered soil samples to evaluate the physical and engineering properties of the strata encountered;

3. Providing geotechnical design recommendations for support of the proposed building with either (1) drilled and underreamed piers, if feasible, or (2) drilled straight sided shafts as an alternate, if necessary;

4. Providing estimation of potential vertical rise for the building area and recommendations for use of slab-on-grade construction; and,

5. Providing geotechnical construction recommendations including site and subgrade preparation, excavation considerations, fill and backfill requirements, compaction requirements, foundation installation and overall quality control monitoring, testing and inspection services.

Our scope of services did not include any environmental assessments for the presence or absence of wetlands or of hazardous or toxic materials within or on the soil, air or water within this project site. Any statements in this report or on the boring logs regarding odors, colors or unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the Client. A geological fault study was also beyond the scope of our services associated with this geotechnical engineering study.


3 FIELD PROGRAM

3.1 Soil Borings

TWE conducted an exploration of subsurface soil and groundwater conditions at the project site on March 30 and March 31, 2017 by drilling and sampling six (6) soil borings to depths of 25-ft. and 60-ft. below existing grade at time of the field program. The soil boring locations are presented on TWE Drawing No. 17.53.016-1 in Appendix A of this report. Drilling and sampling of the soil borings were performed using conventional truck-mounted drilling equipment. Our field personnel coordinated the field activities and logged the boreholes. The boring locations were staked at the site by TWE. The final latitude and longitude coordinates for each boring were determined using a hand held GPS unit and are presented on the boring logs in Appendix B of this report.

3.2 Drilling Methods

Field operations were performed in general accordance with the Standard Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings [American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 1452]. The soil borings were drilled using truck-mounted drilling equipment with a rotary head. The boreholes were advanced using dry-auger and hollow stem drilling methods. Samples were obtained continuously from existing ground surface to a depth of 12-ft., at the 13-ft. to 15-ft. depth interval, and at intervals of 5-ft. thereafter until the boring completion depths were reached.

3.3 Soil Sampling

Fine-grained, cohesive soil samples were recovered from the soil borings by hydraulically pushing 3-in diameter, thin-walled Shelby tubes a distance of about 24-in. The field sampling procedures were conducted in general accordance with the Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils (ASTM D 1587). Our geotechnician visually classified the recovered soils and obtained field strength measurements using a pocket penetrometer. A factor of 0.67 is typically applied to the penetrometer measurement to estimate the undrained shear strength of the Gulf Coast cohesive soils. The samples were extruded in the field, wrapped in foil, placed in moisture sealed containers and protected from disturbance prior to transport to the laboratory.

Cohesionless and semi-cohesionless samples were collected with the standard penetration test (SPT) sampler driven 18-in by blows from a 140-lb hammer falling 30-in in accordance with the Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and Spilt-Barrel Sampling of Soils (ASTM D 1586). The number of blows required to advance the sampler three (3) consecutive 6-in depths are recorded for each corresponding sample on the boring logs. The N-value, in blows per foot, is obtained from SPTs by adding the last two (2) blow count numbers. The compactness of cohesionless and semi-cohesionless samples are inferred from the N-value. The samples obtained from the split-barrel sampler were visually classified, placed in moisture sealed containers and transported to our laboratory.

The recovered soil sample depths with corresponding pocket penetrometer measurements and SPT blowcounts are presented on the boring logs in Appendix B.


3.4 Boring Logs

Our interpretations of general subsurface soil and groundwater conditions at the soil boring locations are included on the boring logs. Our interpretations of the soil types throughout the boring depths and the locations of strata changes were based on visual classifications during field sampling and laboratory testing in accordance with Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) (ASTM D 2487) and Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure) (ASTM D 2488).

The boring logs include the type and interval depth for each sample along with its corresponding pocket penetrometer measurements and SPT blow counts. The boring logs and a key to terms and symbols used on boring logs are presented in Appendix B.

3.5 Groundwater Measurements

Groundwater level measurements were attempted in the open boreholes during dry-auger drilling. Water level readings were attempted in the open boreholes when groundwater was first encountered and after a fifteen (15) minute time period. The groundwater observations are summarized in Section 5.5 of this report entitled “Groundwater Observations.”


4 LABORATORY SERVICES

A laboratory testing program was conducted on selected samples to assist in classification and evaluation of the physical and engineering properties of the soils encountered in the project borings. Laboratory tests were performed in general accordance with ASTM International standards. The types of laboratory tests performed are presented in Table 4-1. A brief description of the testing methods is listed below.

Table 4-1: Laboratory Testing Program

Test Description Test Method

Amount of Material in Soils Finer than No. 200 Sieve ASTM D 1140 Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil (UC) ASTM D 2166

Water (Moisture) Content of Soil ASTM D 2216 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils ASTM D 4318

Density (Unit Weight) of Soil Specimens ASTM D 7263 Amount of Materials in Soils Finer than No. 200 (75-µm) Sieve (ASTM D 1140) This test method determines the amount of materials in soils finer than the No. 200 (75-µm) sieve by washing. The loss in weight resulting from the wash treatment is presented as a percentage of the original sample and is reported as the percentage of silt and clay particles in the sample.

Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil (ASTM D 2166) This test method determines the unconfined compressive (UC) strength of cohesive soil in the undisturbed or remolded condition using strain-controlled application of an axial load. This test method provides an approximate value of the strength of cohesive materials in terms of total stresses. The undrained shear strength of a cohesive soil sample is typically one-half (1/2) the unconfined compressive strength.

Water (Moisture) Content of Soil by Mass (ASTM D 2216) This test method determines water (moisture) content by mass of soil where the reduction in mass by drying is due to loss of water. The water (moisture) content of soil, expressed as a percentage, is defined as the ratio of the mass of water to the mass of soil solids. Moisture content may provide an indication of cohesive soil shear strength and compressibility when compared to Atterberg Limits. Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils (ASTM D 4318)

This test method determines the liquid limit, plastic limit and the plasticity index of soils. These tests, also known as Atterberg limits, are used from soil classification purposes. They also provide an indication of the volume change potential of a soil when considered in conjunction with the natural moisture content. The liquid limit and plastic limit establish boundaries of consistency for plastic soils. The plasticity index is the difference between the liquid limit and plastic limit.


Dry Unit Weight of Soils This test method determines the weight per unit volume of soil, excluding water. Dry unit weight is used to relate the compactness of soils to volume change and stress-strain tendencies of soils when subjected to external loadings.

Standard geotechnical laboratory test results and soil properties encountered in the project borings are presented on the boring logs in Appendix B of this report.


5 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

5.1 General

Our interpretations of soil and groundwater conditions within the project site are based on information obtained at the soil boring locations only. This information has been used as the basis for our conclusions and recommendations included in this report. Subsurface conditions may vary at areas not explored by the soil borings. Significant variations at areas not explored by the soil borings will require reassessment of our recommendations.

5.2 Site Description and Surface Conditions

The project site is located on a tract of land between Ayers Street and State Highway 286, south of Holly Road and north of Saratoga Boulevard in Corpus Christi, Texas. At the time of the field exploration, the site was covered by a young corn crop. The proposed building area is located on the north central portion of the site. The site is flat and natural drainage appears to be poor to fair.

5.3 Subsurface Conditions

The soil profile encountered in the project borings consisted of stiff to very stiff, but occasionally firm, cohesive clay soils and medium dense semi-cohesive sands. Specifically, FAT CLAYS (CH), FAT CLAYS with SAND (CH), and occasionally LEAN CLAYS (CL) were encountered above a depth of about 33-ft. in boring B-1 and above the termination depth of the remaining borings (B-2 through B-6). Borings B-2 through B-6 were terminated at depths of 25-ft and 60-ft below existing grade. Below about 33-ft in boring B-1, CLAYEY SANDS (SC) were encountered and extended to a depth of about 55-ft. below existing grade. SANDY LEAN CLAYS (CL) were then encountered in boring B-1 and continued to the termination depth of 60-ft. Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered at the boring locations are presented on the boring logs in Appendix B.

5.4 Subsurface Soil Properties

Results of Atterberg Limit tests on selected cohesive soil samples from the project borings indicated liquid limits (LL) ranging from 26 to 80 with corresponding plasticity indices (PI) ranging from 10 to 59. In-situ moisture contents of the cohesive soils ranged from 18% to 33%. The amount of material passing the No. 200 sieve ranged from 65% to 100% within the selected cohesive soil samples tested for grain size distribution.

Undrained shear strengths of the cohesive soils derived from field pocket penetrometer readings ranged from 0.50-tsf to 4.25-tsf. Undrained shear strengths derived from laboratory unconfined compressive (UC) strength testing ranged from 1.05-tsf to 3.954-tsf with corresponding dry unit weights ranging from 87-pcf to 113-pcf.

The recorded SPT N-values from the semi-cohesive soil strata encountered at boring B-1, ranged from 21 to 65 blows per foot indicating a medium dense to dense relative density for this stratum. In-situ moisture content tests on the selected semi-cohesive soil samples ranged from 22% to 25% with corresponding amount of materials finer than the No. 200 sieve from 15% to 40%.


Tabulated laboratory test results at the recovered sample depths are presented on the boring logs in Appendix B.

5.5 Groundwater Observations

Groundwater measurements were attempted in the project borings during dry-auger drilling. Groundwater level measurements are shown in Table 5-1 below.

Table 5-1: Groundwater Level Measurements

Boring No.

Boring Depth (feet)

Groundwater Level Depth

Encountered During Drilling

(feet)

Observed in the Open Borehole after 15 minutes (feet)

B-1 60 20 15.25

B-2 25 Dry 3.01

B-3 25 18 12.25

B-4 25 19 16.1

B-5 25 18 13.1

B-6 60 35 10.1

Note: 1. Water level depth after 24 hour waiting period.

Groundwater levels may fluctuate with climatic and seasonal variations and should be verified before construction. Accurate determination of the static groundwater level is typically made with a standpipe piezometer. Installation of a piezometer to evaluate the long-term groundwater condition was not included within the current scope of services.


6 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS

6.1 Discussion

The project consists of the construction of a new service center between Ayers Street and State Highway 286 in Corpus Christi, Texas for American Electric Power Service Corporation. We understand that the new building will be constructed at or near existing grade and that maximum loads on the order of 300 kips for columns and 3.0 kips per lineal foot for walls are to be expected.

The soils above the zone of most significant seasonal moisture change (about 10-ft. to 12-ft. at this site) consist of high plasticity fat clays and medium plasticity lean clays which can experience varying degrees of shrink/swell movements with change in moisture content. Based on the expansive nature of the clay soils, a foundation system that is capable of transferring loads to below the zone of most significant seasonal moisture change is desirable for this project, unless foundation movements are acceptable.

A foundation system consisting of drilled and underreamed piers can be considered for support the new service center building. Properly designed and constructed drilled and underreamed piers will transfer foundation loads to below the zone of seasonal moisture change resulting in isolation of the superstructure from the expansive clay soils at the site. Recommendations for design and construction of drilled and underreamed piers are provided below.

If larger load carrying capability is needed, deep foundation systems such as drilled straight sided shafts can be considered for this purpose. Recommendations for design and construction of deep foundation systems for support of the proposed building can be provided upon request.

The proposed foundation should satisfy two (2) fundamental and independent design criteria. First, the structure loads transmitted to the foundation soils should not exceed the load carrying capacity of the foundation soils. The foundation system should be designed to distribute the loads to the support soils without causing a bearing capacity failure. Second, total and differential movements resulting from settlement of the support soils due to the sustained loads should be within tolerable limits. The foundation design recommendations provided below are intended to satisfy both criteria. Earthwork recommendations are provided in Section 7 of this report entitled “Earthwork Considerations”.

6.2 Drilled and Underreamed Piers

Drilled and underreamed piers can be used for support of the new service center building at the site. Geotechnical design and construction recommendations for a foundation system utilizing drilled and underreamed piers are provided in the following sections.

Pier Depth

Drilled and underreamed piers should be founded at a depth of 12-ft. below existing ground surface within the natural clay soils. We recommend that drilled and underreamed piers have a minimum shaft diameter of 18-in. to facilitate inspection of the excavation and reinforcement placement.


We recommend the ratio of underream to shaft diameter be no greater than 3. The angle of underreamed bells to horizontal should not be less than 45° to avoid potential collapse of the bells. In the event of borehole sloughing or caving at the time of bell drilling, a larger angle of 60° should be used. If stable excavation of bells cannot be completed because local anomalies are encountered or sloughing and caving occurs, TWE should be contacted at once to investigate the problem and modify our recommendations as needed.

Allowable Bearing Pressure

The recommended net allowable bearing pressures for drilled and underreamed piers founded on undisturbed natural soils at a depth of 12-ft. from existing grade within the project site are 5,000 pounds per square foot (psf) for dead plus sustained live load or 7,500-psf for total load conditions. The piers should be designed for whichever condition governs. These net allowable bearing pressure values contain a factor of safety of 3.0 and 2.0 against bearing capacity failure, respectively. The clear spacing between underreamed piers should be a minimum of one (1) underream diameter to avoid influence of adjacent footings.

Settlement

Settlement of properly constructed drilled and underreamed piers bearing on natural clay soils at a depth of 12-ft. below existing grade with maximum diameters of 96 inches and designed using the allowable bearing pressures presented above should be less than 1-in. Drilled piers should have a clear spacing of one (1) underream diameter of the larger adjacent underream. Differential settlements between drilled piers will be governed by variation in subsurface conditions, structural loading conditions, and quality of the pier construction such as cleanliness of the underream.

Uplift Load due to Swell Pressure

Swell pressure induced uplift loads acting on the drilled piers can be estimated using a unit uplift skin friction (fs) in pounds per square foot (psf) acting on the outer perimeter of the shaft from existing grade or the bottom of the structural select fill pad, if present, to the top of the underream. The estimated uplift skin friction derived from the subsurface conditions encountered in the project borings can be taken as 750-psf.

Uplift Resistance

The allowable uplift capacity of drilled and underreamed piers within the project site could be calculated using the following equations:

For Df/B > 1.5

Qa = Wf/1.2 + [10.1(B2 – b2)/FS]

For Df/B < 1.5

Qa = Wf/1.2 + [3.9(Df/B)2(B2 – b2)/FS]


where:

Qa = Allowable Uplift Capacity (kips) Wf = Weight of Footing (kips) Df = Depth of Base of Footing below Ground Surface (ft) B = Diameter of Underream (ft) b = Diameter of Shaft (ft) FS = Factor of Safety (2.0 for transient loads, 3.0 for sustained loads)

It is recommended that a total unit weight of 150-pcf be used for concrete to calculate the weight of the footing. The weight of the footing should be reduced by a factor of safety of 1.2.

Underreamed Pier Construction

The following items will be important to the successful completion of drilled and underreamed piers.

All pier excavations should be observed by TWE to determine when the proper bearing stratum is encountered and to record other observations regarding pier excavations. Pier excavations should be checked for size and depth prior to the placement of concrete. Precautions should be taken during the placement of the pier reinforcement and concrete to prevent loose excavated material from falling into the excavation.

Drilled piers should be installed in accordance with the Manual on Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and Design Methods, [U.S. Department of Transportation-Federal Highway Administration (Pub. No. FHWA-IF-99-025) and ADSC: The International Association of Foundation Drilling Contractors (Pub. No. ADSC-TL-4), August 1999] by Lymon, C. Reese and Michael W. O'Neill.

Since the groundwater level encountered in the soil borings for this project was considerably deeper than the recommended underream depth, we expect that seepage into drilled excavations will be very minimal, if encountered at all. TWE should be contacted immediately if groundwater seepage is encountered during drilled pier installation.

Reinforcement steel cages placed in pier shafts should be designed to be stable during the placement of concrete. Prompt placement of concrete in excavations as they are completed, cleaned and inspected is strongly recommended to limit deterioration of the bearing stratum. Under no circumstances should a pier be drilled that cannot be filled with concrete before the end of the working day.

6.3 Grade Beams

Grade beams spanning between drilled piers should be structurally suspended above the subgrade. A minimum 6-in. void space should be provided between the bottom of the grade beams and the top of the subgrade. Cardboard carton forms are commonly used for this purpose. The sides of beam excavations should be protected from sloughing, thus, filling the void space.


6.4 Building Floor Slabs

As previously discussed, the clay soils above 10-ft. to 12-ft. at this site possess very high shrink/swell potential. Based on the results of our field and laboratory programs, the Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) calculated for the existing soil profile at the site determined by Test Method TEX-124-E is on the order of 2½-in to 3-in. for “average” moisture conditions. It is generally accepted that a primary source of foundation distress is soil movements associated with shrink/swell behavior of the underlying supporting soils. It is therefore recommended that measures be incorporated into design of floor slabs for the proposed new building to either (1) protect the floor slabs from the expansive soils or (2) reduce the shrink/swell potential of the foundation soils. Typically, potential movements below lightly loaded interior floors supported on-grade are reduced to the order of one (1)-in. or less.

The most positive means of reducing potential floor slab movement at this site is the use of structurally suspended floor systems. The floor slabs are structurally suspended above the subgrade with a minimum crawl space of 6-in. Loads from the floor slabs are carried to the grade beams which transfer the loads to columns and the drilled shaft foundation. The crawl space subgrade should be shaped and graded to avoid ponding of water on its surface. Water should be drained to the perimeter of the crawl space and carried away from the building prior to discharging.

As an alternate, floor slabs for the proposed buildings may also consist of ground-supported units provided that potential shrink/swell movements are reduced to tolerable levels. A typical method of reducing the swell potential includes removal of a portion of the existing clay soils and installation of non-expansive structural fill beneath the floor slabs. This method has beneficial results but does not totally eliminate the potential for shrink/swell movements.

Removal of existing soils to a depth of at least 54-in. and replacement with at least 60-in. of non-expansive structural fill is recommended. This should reduce expansive soil related movements to 1-in. or less. The excavation and subsequent structural fill limits should extend to the interior face of perimeter grade beams. The subgrade to receive structural fill should be proof-rolled as indicated below in Section 7.1. After proofrolling, the subgrade should be scarified to a depth of 8-in., moisture adjusted to above (0 to +4%) optimum moisture content, and compacted to at least 95% of maximum dry density determined by ASTM D 698. After testing and acceptance, the first lift of structural fill should be immediately placed and compacted.

Material and compaction requirements for non-expansive structural fill are provided below in Section 7.1 of this report. It is recommended that select fill be used for elevation of the building pad above existing grade at least 6 inches to provide positive drainage away from the building.

It should be noted that these methods for reducing shrink/swell movements are designed for normal seasonal changes in soil moisture content of the subgrade soils. Excessive shrink/swell movements can be expected if increases in soil moisture content occur as a result of broken water and sewer lines, improper drainage of surface water, shrubbery and trees planted near the foundation slab and excessive lawn or shrubbery irrigation. Gutter and downspouts should be provided and runoff should be carried away from the building before discharging unto flatwork or paving.


Due to the expansive nature of the subgrade soils at this site, special care should be taken not to allow the exposed subgrade soils to become extremely wet or extremely dry of the existing moisture content. Therefore, delays between excavation and fill placement should be avoided. If construction occurs during rainy weather and the exposed subgrade soils are allowed to become wet or saturated, removal and replacement of excessively soft, wet soils or lime-stabilization should be anticipated. The depth of undercutting should be determined in the field by TWE.

It is recommended that a vapor barrier such as polyethylene sheeting be provided beneath ground supported floor slabs. Adequate construction joints and reinforcement should be provided to reduce the potential for cracking of the floor slab due to differential movement and volume change in concrete. Crawl spaces below suspended floor systems should be thoroughly ventilated to reduce the potential for moisture to be trapped below floors.


7 EARTHWORK CONSIDERATIONS

7.1 Subgrade Preparation and Structural Select Fill

Areas designated for new construction should be stripped of all surface vegetation, loose topsoil and major root systems. Tree stumps shall be completely removed and backfilled, if applicable. Any subgrade to receive fill soils or pavements should be proof rolled with at least a 20-ton pneumatic roller, loaded dump truck, or equivalent, to detect weak areas. Such weak areas should be removed and replaced with soils exhibiting similar classification, moisture content, and density as the adjacent in-place soils. Subsequent to proof rolling, and just prior to placement of non-expansive structural fill, the exposed subgrade should be compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density at a moisture above (0 to +4%) the optimum moisture in accordance with Standard Proctor (ASTM D 698) procedures.

Proper site drainage should be maintained during construction so that ponding of surface runoff does not occur and cause construction delays and/or inhibit site access. Due to the nature of the subgrade, the cohesive soils can become wet and soft. If the subgrade becomes wet and soft, consideration can be given to removal or replacement of the wet material with structural fill material or lime stabilization and compaction of the subgrade soils.

The maximum loose thickness for each lift will depend on the type of compaction equipment used. Recommended fill layers are summarized in Table 7-1 below.

Table 7-1: Compaction Equipment and Maximum Lift Thickness

Compaction Equipment Maximum Lift Thickness Mechanical Hand Tamper 4.0-in

Pneumatic Tired Roller 6.0-in Tamping Foot Roller 8.0-in

Sheepsfoot Roller 8.0-in

Non-expansive structural fill for this project should consist of a clean low-plasticity sandy clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC) material with a liquid limit of less than 40 and a plasticity index between 7 and 20. The select fill should be placed in thin lifts, not exceeding 8-in. loose measure, moisture conditioned to between -2% and +3% of optimum moisture content, and compacted to a minimum 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor).

Prior to any filling operations, samples of the proposed borrow materials should be obtained for soil classification and laboratory moisture-density testing. The tests will provide a basis for evaluation of fill compaction by in-place density testing. A qualified soil technician should perform sufficient in-place density tests during the earthwork operations to verify that proper levels of compaction are being attained.


7.2 Drainage

The performance of the foundation system for the proposed building and site pavement will not only be dependent upon the quality of construction but also upon the stability of the moisture content of the near surface soils. Therefore, we highly recommend that site drainage be developed so that ponding of surface runoff near the building or pavements does not occur. Accumulations of water near the structure foundation or pavements could cause significant moisture variations in the soils adjacent to the foundation and pavements thus increasing the potential for structural distress.


8 LIMITATIONS AND DESIGN REVIEW

8.1 Limitations

This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of American Electric Power Service Corporation and the project team for specific application to the design and construction of the proposed AEP New Service Center in Corpus Christi, Texas. Our report has been prepared in accordance with the generally accepted geotechnical engineering practice common to the local area. No other warranty, express or implied, is made.

The analyses and recommendations contained in this report are based on the data obtained from the referenced subsurface explorations within the project site. The soil boring indicates subsurface conditions only at the specific location, time and depth penetrated. The soil boring does not necessarily reflect strata variations that could exist at other locations within the project site. The validity of our recommendations is based in part on assumptions about the stratigraphy made by the Geotechnical Engineer. Such assumptions may be confirmed only during construction and installation of the project structures. Our recommendations presented in this report must be reevaluated if subsurface conditions during the construction phase are different from those described in this report.

If any changes in the nature, design or location of the project are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report should not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and the conclusions modified or verified in writing by TWE. TWE is not responsible for any claims, damages or liability associated with interpretation or reuse of the subsurface data or engineering analyses without the expressed written authorization of TWE.

8.2 Design Review

Review of the design and construction drawings as well as the specifications should be performed by TWE before release. The review is aimed at determining if the geotechnical design and construction recommendations contained in this report have been properly interpreted. Design review is not within the authorized scope of work for this study.

8.3 Construction Monitoring

Construction surveillance is recommended and has been assumed in preparing our recommendations. These field services are required to check for changes in conditions that may result in modifications to our recommendations. The quality of the construction practices will affect foundation performance and should be monitored. TWE would be pleased to provide construction monitoring, testing and inspection services for the project.

8.4 Closing Remarks

We appreciate the opportunity to be of service during this phase of the project and we look forward to continuing our services during the construction phase and on future projects.

TWE Project No. 17.53.016 Report No. 15237

APPENDIX A

SOIL BORING LOCATION PLAN TWE DRAWING NO. 17.53.016-1

Sheet: 1

File: C:\Users\ecrochet\Desktop\Desktop_Folder\CAD\CAD\XREF\TWE_Logo.pdf

Missing or invalid reference

COPYRIGHT © 2015 GOOGLE EARTH. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

COPYRIGHT © 2015 GOOGLE MAP. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

B-1

B-2

B-3

B-4

B-5

B-6

AutoCAD SHX Text

Drawn

AutoCAD SHX Text

Scale

AutoCAD SHX Text

Checked

AutoCAD SHX Text

Approved

AutoCAD SHX Text

BORING

AutoCAD SHX Text

LONGITUDE

AutoCAD SHX Text

LATITUDE

AutoCAD SHX Text

DEPTH

AutoCAD SHX Text

LEGEND

AutoCAD SHX Text

SOIL BORING COORDINATES

AutoCAD SHX Text

SYMBOL

AutoCAD SHX Text

DESCRIPTION

AutoCAD SHX Text

TWE DRAWING NO.

AutoCAD SHX Text

VICINITY MAP

AutoCAD SHX Text

R.S.

AutoCAD SHX Text

03/28/2017

AutoCAD SHX Text

R.A.S.

AutoCAD SHX Text

03/28/2017

AutoCAD SHX Text

D.R.R.

AutoCAD SHX Text

03/28/2017

AutoCAD SHX Text

N.T.S.

AutoCAD SHX Text

17.53.016 - 1

AutoCAD SHX Text

B-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

60'

AutoCAD SHX Text

N 27° 43' 21.66"

AutoCAD SHX Text

W 97° 26' 16.37"

AutoCAD SHX Text

B-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

25'

AutoCAD SHX Text

N 27° 43' 20.60"

AutoCAD SHX Text

W 97° 26' 16.04"

AutoCAD SHX Text

B-3

AutoCAD SHX Text

25'

AutoCAD SHX Text

N 27° 43' 21.01"

AutoCAD SHX Text

W 97° 26' 14.60"

AutoCAD SHX Text

B-4

AutoCAD SHX Text

25'

AutoCAD SHX Text

N 27° 43' 19.78"

AutoCAD SHX Text

W 97° 26' 14.53"

AutoCAD SHX Text

B-5

AutoCAD SHX Text

25'

AutoCAD SHX Text

N 27° 43' 20.30"

AutoCAD SHX Text

W 97° 26' 12.86"

AutoCAD SHX Text

B-6

AutoCAD SHX Text

60'

AutoCAD SHX Text

N 27° 43' 18.99"

AutoCAD SHX Text

W 97° 26' 12.96"

AutoCAD SHX Text

Proposed Boring Location Plan American Electric Power Service Corp. New Service Center - Ayers Street Corpus Christi, Texas

AutoCAD SHX Text

PROPOSED SOIL BORING LOCATION

AutoCAD SHX Text

PROJECT LOCATION

TWE Project No. 17.53.016 Report No. 15237

APPENDIX B

LOGS OF PROJECT BORINGS AND A KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED ON BORING LOGS

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Stiff dark gray FAT CLAY (CH) with gypsum crystalsand ferrous stains

-color changes to dark gray and gray

-color changes to gray and tan

Firm to stiff tan, gray, and brown FAT CLAY with SAND(CH) with gypsum crystals and ferrous stains

-color changes to reddish brown and tan with selenite

Very stiff reddish tan and tan LEAN CLAY (CL) withgypsum crystals, ferrous stains, and calcareousnodules

Stiff to very stiff reddish brown FAT CLAY (CH),slickensided with trace gypsum crystals and ferrousstains

-color changes to reddish brown and tan

-color changes to tan and light brown


Medium dense tan and gray CLAYEY SAND (SC)

(P) 1.50

(P) 1.00

(P) 1.50

(P) 1.00

(P) 1.50

(P) 3.50

(P) 2.50

(P) 2.50

(P) 3.00

(P) 3.50

2/6"8/6"13/6"

32

31

18

26

33

25

88

93

113

102

90

68

43

80

46

31

59

1.38

1.90

2.41

15

3

3

86

85

89

98

90

27

TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC.

LOG OF BORING B-1PROJECT: New Service Center - Ayers Street

Corpus Christi, TexasCLIENT: American Electric Power Service Corporation

Columbus, Ohio

COMPLETION DEPTH: 60 ft REMARKS: Free water was encountered at a depth of 20-ft. below existing grade duringdry-auger drilling operations. After a 15-minute waiting period, water was at adepth of 15'-3" below grade. At the completion of drilling and sampling, theopen bore-hole was backfilled with soil cuttings.

DATE BORING STARTED: 03/30/2017DATE BORING COMPLETED: 03/30/2017LOGGER: J. GonzalezPROJECT NO.: 17.53.016

Page of1

DE

PTH

(ft)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

SY

MB

OL/

US

CS

MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

COORDINATES: N 27° 43' 21.66"W 97° 26' 16.37"

SURFACE ELEVATION: --DRILLING METHOD:

Dry Augered: 0-ft. to 60-ft.Wash Bored: -- to --

(P) P

OC

KE

T P

EN

(tsf

)(T

) TO

RV

AN

E (p

sf)

STD

. PE

NE

TRA

TIO

NTE

ST

(blo

ws/

ft)

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

(%)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T(p

cf)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT(%

)

PLA

STI

CIT

YIN

DE

X (%

)

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

STR

EN

GTH

(tsf

)

FAIL

UR

E S

TRA

IN (%

)

CO

NFI

NIN

GP

RE

SS

UR

E (p

si)

PA

SS

ING

#20

0S

IEV

E (%

)

OTH

ER

TE

STS

PE

RFO

RM

ED

2

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

Medium dense tan and gray CLAYEY SAND (SC)

-color changes to reddish tan with ferrous stains

-color changes to tan

-becomes dense, color changes to reddish tan and tanwith gypsum crystals

-becomes medium dense

Very stiff tan and reddish brown SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL) with gypsum crystals and ferrous stains

Bottom @ 60'

22/6"30/6"29/6"

10/6"27/6"38/6"

7/6"19/6"23/6"

8/6"11/6"12/6"

4/6"11/6"11/6"

22

25

23 26 10

15

40

65




Columbus, Ohio



Page of2

DE

PTH

(ft)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

SY

MB

OL/

US

CS


COORDINATES: N 27° 43' 21.66"W 97° 26' 16.37"



(P) P

OC

KE

T P

EN

(tsf

)(T

) TO

RV

AN

E (p

sf)

STD

. PE

NE

TRA

TIO

NTE

ST

(blo

ws/

ft)

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

(%)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T(p

cf)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT(%

)

PLA

STI

CIT

YIN

DE

X (%

)

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

STR

EN

GTH

(tsf

)

FAIL

UR

E S

TRA

IN (%

)

CO

NFI

NIN

GP

RE

SS

UR

E (p

si)

PA

SS

ING

#20

0S

IEV

E (%

)

OTH

ER

TE

STS

PE

RFO

RM

ED

2

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Soft to firm dark gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH)

-color changes to gray and dark gray with ferrousstaining

-becomes stiff, color changes to tan and gray with lesssand, gypsum crystals, and ferrous stains

-becomes firm

-color changes to reddish tan and gray with calcareousnodules

Stiff to very stiff reddish brown and tan FAT CLAY (CH)with trace selenite, ferrous stains, and silty sandpartings

-becomes slickensided

-color changes to light reddish brown and tan withgypsum crystals

Bottom @ 25'

(P) 0.50

(P) 0.75

(P) 0.75

(P) 1.00

(P) 1.25

(P) 2.25

(P) 3.00

(P) 3.50

29

31

29

27

32

91

91

93

101

91

64

70

38

52

1.29

1.89

3.05

13

4

5

81

88

85

89

90




Columbus, Ohio

COMPLETION DEPTH: 25 ft REMARKS: Free water was not encountered during dry-auger drilling operations. After a24-hour waiting period, water was at a depth of 3-ft. below existing grade. Atcompletion of ground water measurements, the open bore-hole wasbackfilled with soil cuttings.


Page of1

DE

PTH

(ft)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

SY

MB

OL/

US

CS


COORDINATES: N 27° 43' 20.60"W 97° 26' 16.04"



(P) P

OC

KE

T P

EN

(tsf

)(T

) TO

RV

AN

E (p

sf)

STD

. PE

NE

TRA

TIO

NTE

ST

(blo

ws/

ft)

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

(%)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T(p

cf)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT(%

)

PLA

STI

CIT

YIN

DE

X (%

)

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

STR

EN

GTH

(tsf

)

FAIL

UR

E S

TRA

IN (%

)

CO

NFI

NIN

GP

RE

SS

UR

E (p

si)

PA

SS

ING

#20

0S

IEV

E (%

)

OTH

ER

TE

STS

PE

RFO

RM

ED

1

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Firm to stiff dark gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) withferrous stains


-color changes to gray and tan with gypsum crystals

-color changes to tan and gray with selenite

-color changes to reddish tan and gray

Stiff reddish tan and gray LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)and ferrous stains

Stiff reddish brown and tan FAT CLAY (CH) with ferrousstains

-color changes to reddish brown and gray, becomesslickensided

-color changes to reddish tan and light gray withgypsum crystals and ferrous stains

Bottom @ 25'

(P) 1.25

(P) 1.25

(P) 1.25

(P) 2.00

(P) 2.00

(P) 2.00

(P) 2.25

(P) 3.50

(P) 3.50

33

25

21

21

25

87

99

104

108

98

51

44

38

33 1.05

1.36

1.87

4

3

7

85

80

84

95

98




Columbus, Ohio



Page of1

DE

PTH

(ft)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

SY

MB

OL/

US

CS


COORDINATES: N 27° 43' 21.01"W 97° 26' 14.60"



(P) P

OC

KE

T P

EN

(tsf

)(T

) TO

RV

AN

E (p

sf)

STD

. PE

NE

TRA

TIO

NTE

ST

(blo

ws/

ft)

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

(%)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T(p

cf)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT(%

)

PLA

STI

CIT

YIN

DE

X (%

)

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

STR

EN

GTH

(tsf

)

FAIL

UR

E S

TRA

IN (%

)

CO

NFI

NIN

GP

RE

SS

UR

E (p

si)

PA

SS

ING

#20

0S

IEV

E (%

)

OTH

ER

TE

STS

PE

RFO

RM

ED

1

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Firm to stiff dark gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH)

-color changes to dark gray and gray with ferrous stains

-color changes to gray and tan with less sand andgypsum crystals

-color changes to tan and gray


-with silty sand partings

Stiff reddish brown and tan FAT CLAY (CH),slickensided, with gypsum crystals, ferrous stains, andsilty sand partings

-color changes to light reddish brown, tan and gray

Bottom @ 25'

(P) 1.25

(P) 1.25

(P) 1.00

(P) 1.00

(P) 1.25

(P) 4.00

(P) 1.50

(P) 3.50

(P) 3.00

30

33

23

19

30

91

88

102

108

93

63

69

47

38

1.32

1.73

1.58

7

5

2

83

88

85

84

89




Columbus, Ohio



Page of1

DE

PTH

(ft)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

SY

MB

OL/

US

CS


COORDINATES: N 27° 43' 19.78"W 97° 26' 14.53"



(P) P

OC

KE

T P

EN

(tsf

)(T

) TO

RV

AN

E (p

sf)

STD

. PE

NE

TRA

TIO

NTE

ST

(blo

ws/

ft)

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

(%)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T(p

cf)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT(%

)

PLA

STI

CIT

YIN

DE

X (%

)

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

STR

EN

GTH

(tsf

)

FAIL

UR

E S

TRA

IN (%

)

CO

NFI

NIN

GP

RE

SS

UR

E (p

si)

PA

SS

ING

#20

0S

IEV

E (%

)

OTH

ER

TE

STS

PE

RFO

RM

ED

1

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Stiff to very stiff dark gray FAT CLAY (CH)


-color changes to gray and tan with gypsum crystals

-color changes to tan and gray with sand

-color changes to tan and reddish brown

-becomes slickensided with trace selenite


-color changes to tan and reddish brown

Bottom @ 25'

(P) 1.50

(P) 1.00

(P) 0.75

(P) 1.00

(P) 1.50

(P) 3.00

(P) 2.50

(P) 1.75

(P) 2.50

32

28

21

20

28

89

96

105

109

98

61

53

38

39

1.40

2.19

2.70

15

9

4

86

84

86

86

98




Columbus, Ohio



Page of1

DE

PTH

(ft)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

SY

MB

OL/

US

CS


COORDINATES: N 27° 43' 20.30"W 97° 26' 12.86"



(P) P

OC

KE

T P

EN

(tsf

)(T

) TO

RV

AN

E (p

sf)

STD

. PE

NE

TRA

TIO

NTE

ST

(blo

ws/

ft)

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

(%)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T(p

cf)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT(%

)

PLA

STI

CIT

YIN

DE

X (%

)

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

STR

EN

GTH

(tsf

)

FAIL

UR

E S

TRA

IN (%

)

CO

NFI

NIN

GP

RE

SS

UR

E (p

si)

PA

SS

ING

#20

0S

IEV

E (%

)

OTH

ER

TE

STS

PE

RFO

RM

ED

1

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Firm to stiff dark gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH)

-color changes to dark gray and gray with gypsumcrystals and ferrous stains

-color changes to gray and tan

-color changes to tan and gray

Stiff to very stiff reddish tan and tan FAT CLAY (CH),slickensided with gypsum crystals and ferrous stains

-with silty lenses

-color changes to tan, gray, and reddish brown


(P) 1.25

(P) 1.25

(P) 1.75

(P) 1.50

(P) 1.50

(P) 2.75

(P) 2.50

(P) 2.75

(P) 4.25

(P) 3.50

(P) 4.00

32

31

25

25

33

18

87

91

99

101

88

108

63

51

54

46

35

39

1.73

1.59

3.95

2

2

4

81

85

84

96

91

92




Columbus, Ohio



Page of1

DE

PTH

(ft)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

SY

MB

OL/

US

CS


COORDINATES: N 27° 43' 18.99"W 97° 26' 12.96"



(P) P

OC

KE

T P

EN

(tsf

)(T

) TO

RV

AN

E (p

sf)

STD

. PE

NE

TRA

TIO

NTE

ST

(blo

ws/

ft)

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

(%)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T(p

cf)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT(%

)

PLA

STI

CIT

YIN

DE

X (%

)

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

STR

EN

GTH

(tsf

)

FAIL

UR

E S

TRA

IN (%

)

CO

NFI

NIN

GP

RE

SS

UR

E (p

si)

PA

SS

ING

#20

0S

IEV

E (%

)

OTH

ER

TE

STS

PE

RFO

RM

ED

2

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

Stiff to very stiff reddish brown and tan FAT CLAY (CH),slickensided with gypsum crystals and ferrous stains

-with interbedded sand layers

Stiff tan SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL)

Bottom @ 60'

(P) 4.00

(P) 4.25

(P) 4.25

(P) 1.75

5/6"13/6"13/6"

30

30

25

94

94

98

77 45

3.08

3.36

2

4

100

98

69




Columbus, Ohio



Page of2

DE

PTH

(ft)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

SY

MB

OL/

US

CS


COORDINATES: N 27° 43' 18.99"W 97° 26' 12.96"



(P) P

OC

KE

T P

EN

(tsf

)(T

) TO

RV

AN

E (p

sf)

STD

. PE

NE

TRA

TIO

NTE

ST

(blo

ws/

ft)

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

(%)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T(p

cf)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT(%

)

PLA

STI

CIT

YIN

DE

X (%

)

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

STR

EN

GTH

(tsf

)

FAIL

UR

E S

TRA

IN (%

)

CO

NFI

NIN

GP

RE

SS

UR

E (p

si)

PA

SS

ING

#20

0S

IEV

E (%

)

OTH

ER

TE

STS

PE

RFO

RM

ED

2

KEY TO SYMBOLS AND TERMS USED ON BORING LOGS FOR SOIL

Most Common Unified Soil Classifications System Symbols

~ LeanClay(CL) 1:::::: I Well Graded Sand (SW)

Sampler Symbols Meaning

[I] Pavement core

I Thin - walled tube sample

~ Lean Clay w/ Sand (CL)

~ Sandy Lean Clay (CL)

1:+;1 Well Graded Sand w/ Gravel (SW-GM) 0 Standard Penetration Test (SPT)

~ Fat Clay (CH)

~ Fat Clay w/ Sand (CH)

~ Sandy Fat Clay (CH)

~ Silty Clay (CL-ML)

~ Sandy Silty Clay (CL-ML)

11::& I Silty Clayey Sand (SC-SM)

[2 Clayey Sand (SC)

[[I] Sandy Silt (ML)

[ill] Silty Sand (SM)

~HWJl Silt w/ Sand (ML)

1~ ;· :: ; I Poorly Graded Sand (SP)

1~~ ;·~ ::i~ I Poorly Graded Sand w/ Silt (SP-SM)

[Ill] Silt (ML)

rn Elastic Silt (MH)

I: ,l,'_·:1 Elastic Silt w/ Sand (MH-SP)

B Silty Gravel (GM)

~ Clayey Gravel (GC)

1·. ·:j Well Graded Gravel (GW)

r ~'.~:1 Well Graded Gravel w/ Sand (SP-GM)

~ L.] Poorly Graded Gravel (GP)

.Peat

Miscellaneous Materials

[ { J Concrete Asphalt and/or Base

RELATIVE DENSITY OF COHESIONLESS & SEMI-COHESIONLESS SOILS

The following descriptive terms for relative density apply to cohesionless soils such as gravels, silty sands, and sands as well as semi-cohesive and semi-cohesionless soils such as sandy silts, and clayey sands.

Relative Density

Very Loose Loose

Medium Dense Dense

Very Dense

Typical N6o

Value Range*

0-4 5-10 11-30 31-50

Over50

* N60 is the number of blows from a 140-lb weight having a free fall of 30-in. required to penetrate the final 12-in. of an 18-in. sample interval, corrected for field procedure to an average energy ratio of 60% (Terzaghi, Peck, and Mesri, 1996).

~ Auger sample

0 Sampling attempt with no recovery

B TxDOT Cone Penetrometer Test

Field Test Data

2.50 Pocket penetrometer reading in tons per square foot

(T)L13 Torvane Measurement in tons per square foot

8/6" Blow count per 6 - in. interval of the Standard Penetration Test

-=--- Observed free water during drilling

_y_ Observed static water level

Laboratory Test Data

We(%) Moisture content in percent

Dens. (pct) Dry unit weight in pounds per cubic foot

Qu (tst)

UU (tst)

Str. (%)

LL

PI

Unconfined compressive strength in tons per square foot

Compressive strength under confining pressure in tons per square foot

Strain at failure in percent

Liquid Limit in percent

Plasticity Index

#200 (%) Percent passing the No. 200 mesh sieve

( ) Confining pressure in pounds per square inch

* Slickensided failure

** Did not fail@ 15% strain

CONSISTENCY OF COHESIVE SOILS

The following descriptive terms for consistency apply to cohesive soils such as clays, sandy clays, and silty clays.

Typical Compressive Strength ( tst)

qu<0.25 0.25 s qu< 0.50 0.50 s qu< LOO LOO s qu < 2.00 2.00 s % < 4.00

qu;::.4.00

Consistency

Very soft Soft Firm Stiff

Very Stiff Hard

Typical SPT "N6o"

Value Range**

s2 3-4 5-8

9-15 16-30 ;::. 31

** An ''N 60 " value of 31 or greater corresponds to a hard consistency. The correlation of consistency with a typical SPT ''N60' value range is approximate.

REVISION DATE 1-5-12 GEOSYSTEM

Tolunay-Wong ~ Engineers, Inc.

American Electric Power 01 31 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction

operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). 5. Pre-Installation Conferences.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Project Meetings: Section 01 31 19. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the

Contract Documents. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 (calendar) days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and

by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.03 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best

results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.


2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special

procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if

coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1 Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2 Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3 Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4 Delivery and processing of submittals. 5 Progress meetings. 6 Preinstallation conferences. 7 Project closeout activities. 8 Startup and adjustment of systems. 9 Project closeout activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are

carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not

actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.04 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space

availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not

base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:


a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

c. Indicate required installation sequences and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

e. Indicate required installation sequences. f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make

specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

g. Complete sufficient demolition to confirm dimensions and clearances before submitting drawings.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs,

including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Show plumbing lines. Notate code required slope elevations. c. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves,

diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

d. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger and racks of smaller conduit are required.


b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, sprinkler heads and inspected test valve drains.

9. Review: Consultant will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Consultant determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Consultant will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according

to the following requirements:

1. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format.

2. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or

completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement

form acceptable to Owner and Architect. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with

other contractors. 1.06 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the

Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than

Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in

Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Date.


3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as

appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos,

Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include

dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs: Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and

sequential page number. D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same

content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and

return it. Allow 15 calendar days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the

Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract

Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the

RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 7 days if Contractor disagrees with response.

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the

RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:


1 Project name. 2 Name and address of Contractor. 3 Name and address of Architect. 4 RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5 RFI description. 6 Date the RFI was submitted. 7 Date Architect's response was received. 8 Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change

Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9 Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal

Request, as appropriate. 1.07 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Where required in individual specification Sections, conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators

involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.


3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 01 31 19 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center PROJECT MEETINGS

SECTION 01 31 19

PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings including:

1. Pre-Construction Meeting. 2. Progress Meetings.

3. Specially called meetings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Project Management and Coordination: Section 01 31 00. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Schedule and administer preconstruction meeting, progress meetings and

specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Preside at meetings. 3. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 4. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. B. Make physical arrangements for meetings. C. Representatives of the Contractors, subcontractors and suppliers attending the

meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

1.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Scheduled within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by Owner. C. Attendance 1. Owner's Representative 2. Architect and Consultants


3. Contractor’s Superintendent 4. Major Subcontractors 5. Major Suppliers D. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the

following:

1. Tentative construction schedule. 3. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. 4. Designation of key personnel and their duties. 5. Lines of communications. 5. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 6. Procedures for RFIs. 7. Procedures for testing and inspecting. 8. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 9. Distribution of the Contract Documents. 10. Submittal procedures. 11. Preparation of Record Documents. 12. Use of the premises. 13. Work restrictions. 14. Working hours. 15. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 16. Procedures for moisture and mold control. 17. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. 18. Construction waste management and recycling. 19. Parking availability and restrictions. 20. Office, work, and storage areas. 21. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 22. First aid. 23. Security. 24. Progress cleaning. 25. Owner's occupancy requirements. 26. Phasing. 27. LEED

1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings, as required. B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of work. C. Location of the Meetings: Project field office of the General Contractor. D. Attendance 1. Architect and consultants as needed. 2. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 3. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda. 4. Owner's Representative


E. Suggested Agenda 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede Construction Schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 8. Plan progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 12. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the project. 13. Status of RFIs.

14. Status of proposal requests. 15. Pending changes. 16. Status of Change Orders. 17. Pending claims and disputes.

18. Documentation of information for payment requests. 19. LEED 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Section 01 31 00.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 01 32 16 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. These requirements generally describe the form of the construction schedule, a

basic description of the schedule contents and the submittal procedures. This Section is a supplement to Article 12 of the AEP General Terms and Conditions for Engineering, Procurement and Construction Work.

B. Authorization to proceed with the work will not be given until the construction

schedule has been approved by the Owner. 1.02 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare schedules in the form of a time-scaled logic diagram, defined as a network

logic diagram with connecting lines specifically identifying relationships between all activities of the work using the "Critical Path Method".

1. Diagram may be machine plotted or hand drafted showing the activities

duration time-scaled to the appropriate calendar in an easily readable format as approved by Architect. Base schedule on the early start early finish dates of the activities. All relationships between activities must be clearly noted including associated lag times, if required. The diagram must also have the critical path (the series of activities with the least value of total float) clearly marked. In addition, the Contractor must provide a tabular report indicating the early start, early finish, late start, late finish, and total float for every activity in the schedule.

1.03 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Quantity of Activities: Defined by complexity of the project. An adequate number of

activities are to be included in the project in order that sufficient detail of the demolition process (and resulting temporary construction) and weekly progress requirements are clearly stated.

B. Where applicable, progress schedule must also include a shop drawing schedule

with the activities "Prepare Shop Drawings", "Architect Review and Approval", and "Fabricate and Deliver to the Jobsite". This sequential series of activities must be assigned to each item on the project which requires a shop drawing or performance data submittal prior to its installation. The shop drawing schedule shall be tied directly to the progress schedule, but shall be provided to the Architect as a separate time-scaled logic diagram.

American Electric Power 01 32 16 - 2 Corpus Christi Service Center CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

C. Architect reserves the right to request that the schedule of activities be presented in a different format or organization than described above.

1.04 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Update schedule and submit in the above format each month with pay requests.

Progress completion shall be defined as the remaining duration of any activity which started on or before the schedule update. In addition, revise the duration of all activities as more accurate scheduling information becomes available.

1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. 2. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: a. Major changes in scope. b. Activities modified since previous submission. c. Revised projections of progress and completion. d. Other identifiable changes. B. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit initial schedules within 15 days after award of Contract. 1. Architect will review schedules and return review copy within 10 days after

receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within 7 days after return of review copy. B. Submit revised progress schedules with each application for payment.

C. Submit four opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, in .pdf

format. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. 1.06 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Job site file. 2. Subcontractors. 3. Owner. 4. Architect. 5. Other concerned parties. END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 01 40 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality

assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by A/E, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Cutting and Patching (for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by

testing and inspecting activities): Section 01 73 29. B. Specific test and inspection requirements: Divisions 02 through 49 Sections.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed

before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions

during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by A/E.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and

materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.


D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for

the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an

NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the

source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site

for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor

as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction

activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having

successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or

certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification

required, submit a written request for additional information to A/E. 1.05 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to A/E for a decision before proceeding.


B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or

specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to A/E for a decision before proceeding.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and

other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality

Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work

complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspection.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of

permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum

qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.


B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or

systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to

those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that is similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific

construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and

regulations governing the Work. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency

with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR

1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National

Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized

representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform

preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.


b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to A/E, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

1.07 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner’s

responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone

numbers of testing agencies engaged. 2. Payment for these services will be made by the Owner. 3. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is

necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to

Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and

those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner,

unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work

that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's

responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.


6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized

service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing.

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's

technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections

were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with A/E and Contractor in

performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify A/E and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies

observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested

and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-control service to A/E, Engineer and Owner with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests,

inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require

testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require

control by testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting

equipment at Project site.


H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar

activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to A/E. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or

inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur.

Provide access to test and inspection log for A/E's reference during normal working hours.

3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar

services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 73 29, Cutting and Patching.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the

assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 01 45 29 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

SECTION 01 45 29

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. A qualified independent testing and inspection agency, selected and retained by the Owner and approved by Architect, will perform Special Inspection, material testing and other laboratory services specified herein.

B. Testing and inspection agency shall make and perform all Special Inspections and structural tests in accordance with the rules and regulations of Building Code, local authorities, specifications of ASTM, and these Contract Documents.

C. Materials and workmanship not meeting required standards or performance obligations are to be removed and replaced. Replacement and subsequent testing shall be at Contractor’s expense.

D. Where the term “Laboratory” is used, it means the approved testing and inspection agency engaged by the Owner. Where the term “Special Inspector” is used, it means the designated and accredited Special Inspector employed by or affiliated with the Laboratory.

E. Where the term “Geotechnical Service” is used, it means an agency specializing in soil analysis and professional geotechnical engineering, which is under the direction of a licensed engineer or licensed geologist and which is retained by the Owner for construction phase testing and inspection of foundation construction and earthwork. It shall be the same agency that produced the subsurface investigation and report from which the building foundation system is derived, and it may be the same agency as the laboratory.

F. Where the term “Geotechnical Engineer” is used, it means the licensed design professional in responsible charge of the subsurface investigation and report from which the building foundation system is derived. He shall be a member of the geotechnical service engaged by the Owner to perform construction phase services.

G. Testing, inspection, and certifications specified in other sections of these Specifications shall be paid by Contractor, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be by agencies approved by Architect.

H. Laboratory inspection shall not relieve Contractor or fabricator of its responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract Documents.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The testing and inspection agency shall meet all requirements of ASTM E 329, "Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of


Materials Used in Construction" and ASTM E 543, "Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing." Special Inspectors shall be qualified persons who have demonstrated competence to the satisfaction of the building official for inspection of the particular type of construction requiring Special Inspection.

B. The testing and inspection agency shall each be insured against errors and omissions by a professional liability insurance policy having a limit of liability not less than $2,000,000.00.

C. All Special Inspection and Testing services shall be under the direction of a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas, charged with engineering managerial responsibility and having at least 5 years engineering experience in Special Inspection and testing of construction materials.

D. Special Inspectors monitoring concrete work shall be ACI certified inspectors.

E. Special Inspectors performing structural steel inspection shall be currently certified AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI), in accordance with provisions of AWS QCI, "Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors." Special Inspector may be supported by assistant Special Inspectors who may perform specific inspection functions under supervision of the Special Inspector. Assistant Special Inspectors shall be currently certified AWS Certified Associate Welding Inspectors (CAWI). Work of Assistant Special Inspectors shall be regularly monitored by the Special Inspector, generally on a daily basis.

F. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address and telephone number, name of full time licensed Engineer in responsible charge, and name of each Special Inspector who will inspect the work.

G. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

1.03 RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR

A. See respective technical sections for specific requirements.

B. Deliver to the laboratory, without cost to Owner, adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested.

C. Advise inspecting agency and Architect sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow inspecting agency to assign personnel for Special Inspection and testing as specified.

D. Notify inspecting agency of each day’s construction operations expected to require Special Inspection, at least 24 hours in advance of such operations, to allow Special Inspector to complete any required checks or tests in a timely manner.

E. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test


samples on project site for the first 24 hours and also for subsequent field curing, as required by ASTM C 31.

F. Furnish such nominal labor and equipment as is required to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining and handling samples at the site and in accessing work for Special Inspection.

G. Furnish concrete mix designs, in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2, made by an independent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier. Where mix designs by an independent testing laboratory are required, laboratory shall be selected and paid by Contractor.

H. Obtain required inspections or approvals by Building Official. All inspection requests and notifications required by Building Code Section 109 are responsibility of Contractor.

I. Provide current welder certifications for each welder to be employed.

J. Furnish fabrication/erection inspection and testing of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter 6.

K. Submit prequalification of all welding procedures to be used in executing the work.

L. Review and sign the Statement of Special Inspections in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to the initiation of construction.

1.04 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF SPECIAL INSPECTOR AND TESTING LABORATORY

A. Special Inspector shall keep records of inspections. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the building official, Contractor, Architect (the registered design professional in responsible charge), and Engineer.

1. Reports shall indicate that work inspected was done in conformance with approved construction documents.

2. Discrepancies shall be brought immediately to the attention of the contractor for correction.

3. If the discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the building official and to the Architect prior to the completion of that phase of the work.

4. A final report documenting required Special Inspections and correction of any discrepancies shall be submitted at a date to be agreed upon prior to the start of work, by the permit applicant and the building official.

B. Perform all Special Inspection and testing duties as required by Chapter 17 of the International Building Code and as herein specified.

C. Special Inspectors or other representatives of the testing agency, who have reviewed and are familiar with the project and specifications, shall participate in all preconstruction conferences. They shall coordinate material testing and Special Inspection requirements with Contractor and his subcontractors


consistent with planned construction schedule. They shall also attend, throughout the course of the project, such conferences as may be required or requested to address quality control issues.

D. Test and/or inspect the work assigned for conformance with the approved construction documents, specifications and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the building code. Perform testing and inspection in a timely manner to avoid delay of the work.

E. Obtain a copy of current approved Contract Documents, including addenda, from the Owner or Architect for use during inspections.

F. Submit test and/or inspection reports to the Building Official, Contractor, the Architect, the Structural Engineer of Record and other designated persons in accordance with the schedule in the Statement of Special Inspections.

G. Review and sign the Statement of Special Inspections in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to the initiation of construction.

H. Special Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of the Contract Documents or to approve or accept any portion of work, except where such approval is specifically called for in Specifications.

I. Special Inspectors do not act as foremen, or perform other duties for Contractor. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not, in any way, prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Distribute copies of reports of each and every inspection as described above. In addition, copy concrete cylinder break reports to concrete supplier.

B. Test Reports Shall Include:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in the Project. 7. Type of test/inspection. 8. Date of test/inspection. 9. Results of test/inspection. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. 11. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.

C. In addition to furnishing a written report, notify Contractor verbally of any uncorrected conditions or failures to comply with requirements of Contract Documents and immediately fax or email corresponding report to Architect and Engineer.


D. At completion of each trade or branch of work requiring inspecting and/or testing, submit an interim report attesting to satisfactory completion of that work and full compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Upon completion of all work which requires Special Inspection, submit a final report documenting required Special Inspections and correction of any deficiencies noted in the inspections. Final report shall bear the seal of the supervising licensed engineer for the testing and inspection agency.

F. Submit copies of test results, sealed by a Licensed Engineer, to municipal authorities having jurisdiction, as they may require or request.

1.06 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. Latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply, unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and a referenced standard, Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.

B. ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.

C. ASTM C 1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.

D. ASTM D 3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.

E. ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing.

F. ASTM E 543 - Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

3.01 PIER DRILLING OPERATION

A. The Owner’s geotechnical service, acting as Special Inspector, shall provide services herein specified.

B. Special Inspector shall make continuous inspections of drilled pier construction to check the following for compliance with the approved soils report and the Contract Documents: 1. Verify soundness of bearing stratum and desired penetration. 2. Verify placement locations, plumbness and pier dimensions including shaft

diameter, bell diameter and length. 3. Verify reinforcing steel size, grade, quantity and placement, including concrete


cover. 4. Monitor condition of hole and removal of water and loose material from bottom.

Verify cleanliness/preparation of sides to develop skin friction. 5. Verify compliance with specified time limit regarding how long holes are permitted

to stand open and exposed to air before placing concrete. 6. Monitor placement of concrete and use of tremie or pumps. 7. Monitor extraction of casing, if used.

C. Special Inspector shall furnish complete pier log showing diameter, bell size, top and bottom elevations of each pier, casing required or not required, actual penetration into bearing stratum, elevation of top of bearing stratum, volume of concrete used, and deviations from specified tolerances.

D. Request probe holes when deemed necessary to confirm safe bearing capacity.

3.02 BUILDING PAD

A. The Owner’s geotechnical service, acting as Special Inspector, shall provide services herein specified.

B. Contractor shall make available, free of charge, adequate samples of each fill and backfill material from proposed sources of supply.

C. A 50 pound sample of each type of off-site and site-excavated material proposed for use shall be given to the geotechnical service by Contractor between 10 and 30 calendar days prior to start of specified work. Analyze samples as required to provide a soil description and to determine compliance with gradation and quality requirements, and test as follows:

1. Tests for liquid limit of soils in accordance with ASTM D 4318. 2. Tests for plastic limit of soils and plasticity index of soils in accordance

with ASTM D 4318. 3. Tests for moisture/density relations of soil in accordance with ASTM D

698 or D 1557, as applicable.

D. Furnish a report for each individual test, describing variances from specified requirements and stating whether material is acceptable for intended use.

E. Inspect underslab drainage material and placement for compliance with specified gradation, quality, and compaction.

F. Inspect excavated subgrade, confirm elevation, and identify to Contractor any remaining unsuitable material which must be removed, and any soft areas which must be recompacted.

G. Inspect and test prepared subgrade after initial rolling and compaction of scarified surface, before the placement of any fill.

H. Continuously inspect placement lift thickness and compaction of all fill materials, including continuous inspection of moisture conditioning of on-site soils. Verify fill material compliance with specified material properties.

I. Make in-place compaction test for moisture content and density relations, and


density of materials-in-place to determine that backfill and fill materials have been compacted to specified density. Tests shall be made at the following frequencies:

1. 1 test for each 5000 square feet of area of each lift placed under building or floor slab. Stagger test locations in each lift from those in previous lift. A minimum of 3 tests will be required of each lift.

2. 1 test for each 100 linear feet, or portion thereof, of each lift placed against foundation walls, with locations staggered as above.

3. 1 test of each lift placed below any isolated footing or similar support and every 100 linear feet under continuous footings, with locations taken on a different side in each case, from the lift below.

J. Check and report on compliance with the approved soils report and the Contract Documents. Reports may be combined on a daily basis, if desired, provided that location of each test and applicable lift are clearly identified and any problems are detailed.

3.03 CARTON FORM INSPECTION

A. Inspect carton forms for size, installation and integrity before each concrete pour.

1. Confirm that the carton forms are the detailed width and depth. 2. Confirm that all carton forms are solid and that all wet or damaged

cartons have been removed prior to placing concrete. 3. Confirm ends of cartons are properly capped and joints are properly

sealed per specifications. 4. Confirm round pier forms are being used per specifications and voids are

properly formed under pilasters.

B. Confirm protection board has been properly installed over slab voids prior to placement of vapor retarder.

C. If soffit of beams have been wood formed or formed with square cartons, confirm that the detailed void space has been maintained prior to installation of retainers with a tolerance of +/- 1”.

D. Confirm retainers are the proper size and have been properly installed per details prior to any backfilling operations.

3.04 REINFORCING STEEL MECHANICAL SPLICES

A. Visually inspect and report on completed condition of each mechanical splice of reinforcing steel.

B. Each mechanical splice shall be visually inspected to ensure compliance with ICC-ES Reports and manufacturer's published criteria for acceptable completed splices.

C. Special emphasis shall be placed on inspection of end preparation of each bar to be spliced, as required by ICC-ES Report.


D. Submit copies of manufacturer's published criteria for acceptable completed splices prior to observing mechanical splices.

E. Reports on each mechanical splice shall indicate location, size of bars, and acceptability or rejection of splice. Reasons for rejection shall be shown on each report.

3.05 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

A. A Special Inspector shall perform testing and inspection specified herein.

B. Welds shall be inspected by a certified welding inspector.

C. Inspect all concrete reinforcing steel prior to placing of concrete for compliance with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings.

D. Observe and Report on the Following:

1. Number and size of bars. Include spacing of stirrups and column ties. 2. Bending and lengths of bars. 3. Splicing. 4. Clearance to forms including chair heights. 5. Clearance to sides and bottom of trench if soil-formed. 6. Clearance between bars or spacing. 7. Rust, form oil, and other contamination. 8. Grade of steel. Verify that reinforcing being welded is ASTM A 706. 9. Securing, tying, and chairing of bars. 10. Excessive congestion of reinforcing steel. 11. Installation of anchor rods and placement of concrete around such rods. 12. Fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies, including

visual inspection of all welds. 13. Visually inspect studs and deformed bar anchors on embedded

assemblies for compliance with Contract Documents. Check number, spacing and weld quality. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that a sound weld or a full 360° fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud or bar, such stud or bar shall be struck with a hammer and bent 15° off perpendicular and then bent back into position. Anchors failing this test shall be replaced.

14. Shear head assemblies at columns in flat plate slabs, including condition, size, number and spacing of studs, bars or supports. Confirm proper placement, clearances, concrete cover and quality of welds.

3.06 CONCRETE INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. A Special Inspector shall perform testing and inspection specified herein, unless otherwise noted. Comply with ACI 311, "Guide For Concrete Inspection" and "ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection" (SP-2)

B. Receive and evaluate all proposed concrete mix designs submitted by Contractor. If mix designs comply with Drawings and Specifications, laboratory shall submit a letter to Architect certifying compliance. Mix designs not complying with Drawings and Specifications shall be returned by laboratory as


unacceptable.

C. Periodically inspect formwork for shape, location and dimensions of the concrete member being formed.

D. Verify use of the required mix design.

E. Secure composite samples of concrete at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 172.

F. Mold and cure the number of specimens required by code plus one from each sample in accordance with ASTM C 31 (ACI 318-08 stipulates that two 6” x 12” cylinders are required for a compressive strength test, but requires three 4” x 8” cylinders for that same test). Supervise curing and protection provided (by others) for test specimens in field, and transportation from field to laboratory. Test cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then be carefully transported to laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31.

G. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 39. 2 or 3 specimens (depending on specimen size) shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and 1 shall be tested at 7 days for information.

H. For concrete placed in piers, make 1 strength test (code required number of cylinders plus 1) for each 50 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any 1 day.

I. In addition, make two test cylinders from each truckload and test one at seven days to provide indicator information to test for gross mis-batching where concealed condition of placed concrete would inhibit discovery of major deficiency. Reserve second cylinder for confirmation testing at 28 days or as directed by the Architect, as needed.

J. For concrete other than that placed in piers, make 1 strength test (code required number of cylinders plus 1) for each 100 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any 1 day.

K. Make 1 slump test for each set of cylinders following procedural requirements of ASTM C 143 and C 172. Make additional slump tests whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary. Do not permit placement of concrete having a measured slump outside limits given on Drawings, except when approved by Architect. Slump tests corresponding to samples from which strength tests are made shall be reported with strength test results. Other slump tests need not be reported.

L. Determine total air content of air entrained normal-weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C 231.

M. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test.

N. Determine air content and unit weight of lightweight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C 173 and C 567.


O. Testing agency shall provide a competent inspector at the batch plant to observe the mixing of the first batch of each mix design destined for the project. Inspector shall examine concrete materials for compliance with Specifications and approved mix design, weighing and measuring devices, proportioning and mixing of materials, water and cement content, general operation of plant, and transportation of concrete to jobsite. Inspector shall verify that amount of free surface moisture contained in both fine and coarse aggregate has been properly accounted for in concrete proportioning to achieve required consistency and water cement ratio. Once proper procedures and quality assurance program have been confirmed by the inspector, in-plant inspections may cease.

P. Monitor addition of water to concrete at jobsite and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in the truck before placement. Inspector shall compare mixture with criteria on approved mix design and report any significant deviation to Architect, Contractor and concrete supplier. Do not permit addition of water which will exceed maximum water/cement ratio for the mix as given on approved mix design.

Q. Continuously observe placing of all concrete, except non-structural slabs-on-grade and sitework. Observe and report on placing method, consolidation, cold joints, length of drop, and displacement of reinforcement.

R. Certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered (or poured), amount of water added and time at which cement and aggregate was dispensed into truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from truck.

S. Evaluation and Acceptance:

1. If measured slump, or air content of air entrained concrete, falls outside specified limits a check test shall be made immediately on another portion of same sample. In the event of a second failure, concrete shall be considered to have failed to meet requirements of the specifications, and shall not be used in structure.

2. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results are equal to, or exceed, specified strength and no individual test result (average of 2 or 3 specimens, depending on specimen size, as specified, above) is below specified strength by more than 500 psi.

T. Concrete Test Reports:

1. Reports shall be made and distributed immediately after respective tests or inspections are made.

2. Where reports indicate deviations from Contract Documents, they shall also include a determination of probable cause of deviation and, where applicable, a recommendation for corrective action.

3. Whenever testing laboratory recognizes a trend of decreasing quality in concrete due to changing seasons, conditions of curing, or other cause, this shall be brought to Architects attention, along with a recommendation for corrective action to be taken before materials fall below requirements of Specifications.


U. Periodically inspect application of curing compound and monitor curing temperature and techniques for compliance with specified requirements.

3.07 CAST-IN BOLTS

A. Provide a qualified, experienced Special Inspector to inspect installation of cast-in bolts where such bolts are identified as requiring Special Inspection in the contract documents. Inspection shall be continuous and include verification of bolt size, material, placement, and adequate consolidation of concrete around bolt for conformance with the contract requirements.

3.08 DRILLED-IN ANCHOR BOLTS AND DOWELS

A. Provide a qualified, experienced Special Inspector to inspect drilling of each hole and installation of each anchor, including location, hole size, hole preparation and cleaning, number, spacing, edge distance, embedment, anchor size, installation of grout or adhesive (where applicable) and anchor installation procedures for compliance with contract documents and with the Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions (MPII).

B. Special Inspector shall verify installation torque for each expansion bolt for compliance with Manufacturer's Printed Installation Instructions.

C. Where adhesive anchors are installed in horizontal or upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained tension loads, they shall be continuously inspected during installation by an inspector specially approved for that purpose by the building official. The special inspector shall furnish a report to the licensed design professional and building official that the work covered by the report has been performed in accordance with, and that the materials used conform with, the approved contract documents and the Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions (MPII).

3.09 TILT-UP PANELS

A. Special Inspector shall inspect concrete reinforcing steel and embedded metal assemblies in accordance with corresponding earlier paragraph of the same name.

B. Concrete Inspection and Testing: Perform in accordance with corresponding earlier paragraph of the same name.

C. Special Inspection of Tilt-up Concrete During Erection:

1. Inspect members for cracks, spalls, and other deficiencies which occur during erection.

2. Inspect erection of tilt-up members for placement tolerances and to ensure that connections, bearing lengths, welding and grouting conform to Contract Documents.

3.10 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. A Special Inspector shall inspect structural steel and Pre-engineered Metal


Building Systems during fabrication and during and after erection for conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings. Review and report on fabricator's quality control procedures and capabilities.

B. Shop Inspection (In accordance with the Code, Special Inspections are not required where the work is done on the premises of a fabricator registered and approved to perform such work without Special Inspection. At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the building official stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents.):

1. Verify that the fabricator maintains detailed fabrication and quality control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanship and the fabricator’s ability to conform to approved construction documents and referenced standards. Review procedures for completeness and adequacy relative to the code requirements for the fabricator’s scope of work.

2. Periodic inspection of fabrication process, including verifying markings on bolts, nuts and washers to comply with ASTM standards and welding to monitor effectiveness of quality control program. Inspection of shop welding to be “verification inspection,” in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter 6.

3. Continuous inspection of complete and partial penetration groove welds, multi-pass fillet welds and single-pass fillet welds greater than 5/16".

4. Review manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for bolts, structural steel, and weld filler materials.

5. Ultrasonic testing of all full penetration welds. 6. Ultrasonic testing of all plates over 1 1/2" thick. 7. Examination of installation of shop welded shear studs.

C. Field Inspection:

1. Proper erection of all pieces. 2. Proper installation of all bolts, including checking of calibration of impact

wrenches used with high-strength bolts. See Paragraph E (Inspection of Bolted Construction), below.

3. Details of bracing and stiffening. 4. Continuous inspection of welding process for penetration welds and fillet

welds larger than 5/16", and periodic inspection of all other welding while in progress. See Paragraph F (Inspection of Field Welding), below.

5. Application of joint details at each connection. 6. Inspect all shop fabricated members, upon arrival at jobsite, for member

straightness and alignment and for defects incurred during transit and handling.

7. Measure and record camber of all beams upon arrival and before erection for compliance with specified camber. Measure lying flat with web horizontal. Members outside specified camber tolerance shall be returned to shop for correction.

8. Plumbness of structure and proper bracing. 9. Installation of field welded shear studs. See Paragraph G (Inspection of

Stud Welding), below.


10. Proper grouting of column base plates. 11. Proper painting and galvanizing.

D. Qualifications of Welders: Fabricator and erector shall provide testing laboratory with names of welders to be employed on work, along with certification that each welder has passed qualification tests within the last year, using procedures covered in American Welding Society "Structural Welding Code - Steel," D1.1, latest edition. Verify all welder qualifications.

E. Inspection of Bolted Construction Shall be in Accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings and as Follows:

1. All bolts shall be visually inspected to ensure plies have been brought into snug contact.

2. High strength bolting shall be inspected in accordance with Section 9 of "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

3. For all high strength bolts, unless specifically noted on Drawings to require only "snug- tight" installation, inspector shall observe required jobsite testing and calibration, and shall confirm procedure to be used does provide required tension. He then shall monitor the work to assure tested procedures are routinely followed. Tightening by calibrated wrench and turn-of-the-nut method without match-marking shall be continuously inspected.

4. For slip-critical connections, inspect contact surfaces for compliance with specifications prior to bolting.

5. Verify markings on bolts, nuts and washers to comply with ASTM Standards.

F. Inspection of Field Welding Shall Include the Following:

1. Visually inspect fillet welds for size, soundness, and proper return around ends. Check for seams, folds, and delaminations.

2. Ultrasonically test all penetration welds in accordance with ASTM E 164. 3. Inspect surfaces to be welded. Surface preparations, fit-up and

cleanliness of surface shall be noted. Electrodes shall be checked for size, type and condition.

4. Welding inspector shall be present during alignment and fit-up of members being welded, and shall check for correct surface preparation of root openings, sound weld metal, and proper penetration in root pass. Where weld has not penetrated completely, inspector shall order joint to be chipped down to sound metal, or gouged out, and rewelded. Root passes shall be thoroughly inspected for cracks. All cracks shall be gouged out and rewelded to 2" beyond each end of crack.

5. Inspector shall check that all welds have been marked with welder's symbol and shall mark welds requiring repairs and shall make a reinspection. Inspector shall maintain a written record of all welds. Work completed and inspected shall receive an identification mark by the inspector. Unacceptable material and work shall be identified by word "reject" or "repair" marked directly on material.

6. Testing agency shall advise Owner and Architect of any shop and/or field conditions which, in his opinion, may require further tests and


examination by means other than specified. Such further tests and examinations shall be performed as authorized by Owner and Architect.

7. Owner reserves the right to use ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to verify adequacy of all welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall be as specified in AWS D1.1.

G. Inspection of Stud Welding Shall be in Accordance with Section 7.8, of the AWS Structural Welding Code, D1.1, and as Follows:

1. A minimum of 2 shear studs shall be welded at start of each production period in order to determine proper generator, control unit and stud welder setting. These studs shall be capable of being bent 45° from vertical without weld failure.

2. When temperature is below 32° F., 1 stud in each 100 shall be tested after cooling. Studs shall not be welded below 0° F. or when surface is wet with rain or snow. If stud fails in weld, 2 new studs shall pass the test before resumption of welding.

3. Visually inspect studs for compliance with Contract Documents. Check number, spacing, and weld quality. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals a sound weld or a full 360° fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud, such stud shall be struck with a hammer and bent 15° off perpendicular in the direction away from missing weld. Studs failing this test shall be replaced.

3.11 METAL FLOOR DECK

A. Field Inspection Shall Consist of the Following:

1. Check types, gauges and finishes for conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings.

2. Examination for proper erection of all metal deck, fastenings, reinforcing of holes, deck reinforcing, miscellaneous deck supports, hanger tabs, shear studs, deck closures, painting or other coating.

3. Certification of welders. 4. Special Inspector shall inspect all floor deck welds, including field welded

shear studs used to fasten metal floor decking to supporting steel. Field welded shear studs shall be inspected and tested as described in the paragraph addressing structural steel.

3.12 METAL ROOF DECK

A. Field Inspection Shall Consist of the Following:

1. Checking types, gauges, and finishes for conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings.

2. Examination for proper erection of all metal deck, including fastenings at supports and side laps, reinforcing of holes, and miscellaneous deck supports.

3. Certification of welders, under AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel”.

4. Special Inspector shall periodically inspect roof deck welds. Visual inspection of at least 25% of all welds is required at a minimum.


3.13 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING FRAME

A. Refer to paragraph 3.10 for Special Inspection and other inspection requirements for Pre-Engineered Metal Building Frames.

3.14 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIAL

A. A Special Inspector shall perform testing and inspection specified herein on a periodic basis, except where otherwise noted.

B. Verify substrate surface preparation is in conformance with the approved fire-resistance design and the approved manufacturer’s written instructions prior to application of the sprayed fire-resistant material.

C. Verify that minimum ambient temperature before and after application of sprayed fire-resistant material is as specified in the approved manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Verify that the area for application is ventilated during and after application as required by the approved manufacturer’s written instructions.

E. Verify installation and coverage meets fire rating requirements of approved design.

F. Inspect and test that applied thickness of sprayed fire-resistant materials meet the fire rating of the approved design as follows:

1. Test thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material applied to floor, roof, and wall assemblies by taking the average of not less than four measurements for each 1000 square feet of sprayed area on each floor or part thereof.

2. Test 25% of the structural members on each floor.

G. Inspect and test that density of sprayed fire-resistant materials meets the density specified in the approved fire-resistant design.

H. Inspect and test that bond strength of sprayed fire-resistant materials meets the fire rating of the approved design as follows: 1 test for beams and 1 test for slabs for each 10,000 square feet of area.

1. Test bond strength of sprayed fire-resistant material applied to floor, roof, and wall assemblies by taking one sample from each floor, roof, and wall assembly at the rate of not less than one sample for every 10,000 square feet or part thereof of the sprayed area in each story.

2. Test bond strength of sprayed fire-resistant material applied to beams, girders, joists, trusses, and columns by taking samples from each type of structural framing member at the rate of not less than one sample for every 10,000 square feet of floor area or part thereof in each story.

I. Inspection and test procedures in accordance with ASTM E 605 and E 736.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 01 73 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 73 00

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements of this Section apply to the Work of all other Sections and enhance

the requirements of the General Project Requirements. B. Section Includes: 1. Examination of Substrate. 2. Preparation. 3. Installation. 4. Workmanship. 5. Protection. 6. Overhead Attachments. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Quality Control: Section 01 45 00. B. Cutting and Patching: Section 01 73 29. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Standards, codes and regulations published by Manufacturer's Associations,

governmental agencies and other regulatory authorities form a part of these Specifications as minimum requirements. Such references include the latest issue and all amendments up to 30 days prior to the Bid Date.

B. "Governing Authority" means all federal, state and local laws and regulations. C. Where differences occur between the Contract Documents and such standards,

the most restrictive requirement shall apply. D. Supply all materials and perform all work in accordance with the Manufacturer's

Specifications and installation procedures, and in conformance with published trade and manufacturer's association standards, unless specifically noted otherwise herein.

1.05 NON-CONFORMING WORK A. Faulty work or work not in conformance with the Contract Documents will not be

permitted.


1. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to propose a remedy by means of

detailed drawings and written documentation and submit such documentation to the Architect for comments.

2. All costs for the removal and reconstruction of such work, as well as additional services of the Architect, shall be paid for by the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF SUBSTRATE A. Examine the substrates or structure to which a product is to be applied or installed.

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Starting the work indicates acceptance of conditions and the installer assumes full responsibility for results.

B. Check the substrate or structure for proper tolerances and clearances. Tolerances

are listed under individual specification Sections. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Substrate: Where the products are applied to a substrate, prepare the substrate

as recommended by the product manufacturer. That generally includes the following:

1. Bringing substrate to a uniform surface by smoothing uneven surfaces and

filling holes, cracks and depressions with recommended filler or compatible type material.

2. Depressed Slabs: Bring to required elevation to receive finished materials where finished materials cannot completely fill depression. Use approved cementitious filler or compatible type material. Coordinate depressed slab locations with finish material locations.

3. Remove substances such as dust, oils and other foreign matter, not compatible with the product.

4. Surfaces shall be dry, unless moisture content or wetting requirement is specified or recommended.

B. Concrete Slabs: Provide steel shot abrasive cleaning of concrete slabs receiving

designated finish flooring materials. 1. Designated Finish Flooring Materials a. Cementitious or cementitious set materials. b. Sheet flooring materials. c. Waterproofing materials. 2. Equipment: Electric powered portable unit with self-contained dust

collection system. Size(s) of unit(s) and shot media suitable for conditions and proposed finish materials.


WHEELABRATOR CORP. "Blastrac" or similar type system by SASE

COMPANY INC., BW MANUFACTURING or INNOVATECH. 3. Cleaning: Remove concrete surfaces to sufficient depth to remove bond

breakers and contaminants such as curing compounds, oils, and other foreign matter which may be detrimental to the completed flooring installation.

a. Work smoothly and evenly over entire surface; avoid creating dips, ridges, or other imperfections which would show or telegraph in the completed installation.

b. Small transitions for different flooring materials may be obtained by multiple passes if carefully executed to create smooth even slope of not more than 1/8" in 2 feet.

4. Clean floor as near as possible to flooring installation to avoid contamination from work of other trades. Protect clean floor from soiling with suitable sheet materials. Reclean soiled areas.

C. Inserts and Anchorages 1. Anchorages where not detailed are the responsibility of the installer to

design a suitable connection, structurally sound, and aesthetically acceptable to the Architect. Furnish calculations, drawings and product data when requested by the Architect.

2. It is the responsibility of the installer to furnish built-in fastening devices for his/her product to the proper trade for installation as the work proceeds.

3. In the event such devices are not furnished in time to be built-in, it is the installer's responsibility to provide other methods for attaching their product. Submit drawings and other required data to the Architect.

D. Templates: Provide templates, diagrams and other coordinating documents to the

proper Contractor, manufacturer or supplier of related items affecting the Work. E. Dimensions 1. If the exact location of an item is not indicated by dimension on the

Drawings or noted in the Specifications, the Architect reserves the right to determine such location in the field prior to roughing-in.

2. If the exact dimensions of a product are not indicated, the Architect reserves the right to determine dimensions prior to the ordering or fabrication of a product.

3. Such dimensional changes shall not be a basis for changes in the Contract Sum.

4. Where miscellaneous devices, such as thermostats, switches, controls, grilles, pipes, or outlets of any nature are not specifically located by the Contract Documents, request such location or obtain approval of the location prior to installation. If approval has not been obtained, the Architect may direct the relocation of such devices at the expense of the installer.


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available

for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise

indicated. a. Where pipes occur in partitions, furred-out spaces and chases,

determine exact location and size and fit entirely concealed into allotted space. Report conflicts to Architect prior to installation.

b. Where two or more pipes are to installed in parallel, or parallel to the piping of other trades, the piping shall be installed with sufficient space between the pipes to allow for the proper application of pipe covering, painting, and servicing.

c. Furnish advance information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves and openings needed for the Work to installers.

4. Install work to allow for installation of future work identified on drawings. 5. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet

in spaces without a suspended ceiling.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations or the requirements of trade associations, listed standards, Shop Drawings and Contract Documents.

C. If a conflict exists between these references, the most strict requirements govern.

If printed instructions are not available, consult with the manufacturer or the manufacturer's field representative, where applicable.

D. Provide hangers, auxiliary framing, and other means for installing ceiling

suspension systems, lighting fixtures, diffusers, and other equipment in ceilings to avoid ductwork, piping, etc.

1. Suspend from structural members (i.e. joists, beams, etc.), and not from

ductwork or piping. 2. Provide supplemental framing members (i.e. angles, tubes, light gage steel

framing, etc.) to span between structural members where required to support items of this paragraph C.

E. Install work that will not interfere with the proper installation of the Work of other

trades. F. Install work in a manner to facilitate operating, servicing and repairing. G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will

ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction


from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. H. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual

components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision.

3.04 WORKMANSHIP A. Install products straight, plumb, level and in line. Securely attach items to the

substrate, using recommended adhesives, mechanical fasteners or other devices. Where holes are provided for attachment, do not field drill or cut new holes without the approval of the Architect.

B. Where applicable, match finished work to the approved samples or mock-ups. C. Conceal fasteners wherever possible, unless exposed fasteners are permitted or

specified. D. Weld in accordance with AWS standards; comply with AWS for qualifications of

operators and for workmanship. E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in

exposed work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision.

F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces of product being installed and surrounding products from

damage during installation. Provide protective devices as required and as recommended by the manufacturer. Cover work subject to damage at the end of each day's work.

B. Coat concealed surfaces of metal products with a bituminous or other approved

coating to prevent contact between dissimilar metals or other material which can cause deterioration.

C. Correct damage by repairing or replacing as directed by the Architect. Repairing

will be permitted only where the repair is undetectable and does not cause structural damage or interfere with proper functioning of the part.

D. Protect finish of installed products until Substantial Completion of the Project by

use of wrappings, covers or other approved protective devices. Remove such protection immediately prior to final cleaning.

E. Limiting Exposures: Coordinate and supervise construction activities to ensure that

no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful,


dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during construction. Maintain exposures within the manufacturers recommended limits. Where

applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading 2. Excessive internal or external pressure 3. Excessive high or low temperatures 4. Thermal shock 5. Excessively high or low humidity 6. Air contamination or pollution 7. Water or ice 8. Solvents 9. Chemicals 10. Light 11. Radiation 12. Puncture 13. Abrasion 14. Heavy traffic 15. Soiling, staining and corrosion 16. Bacteria 17. Rodent and insect infestation 18. Combustion 19. Electrical current 20. High speed operation 21. Improper lubrication 22. Unusual wear or other misuse 23. Contact between incompatible materials 24. Destructive testing 25. Misalignment 26. Excessive weathering 27. Unprotected storage 28. Improper shipping 29. Theft 30. Vandalism

F. Take precautions to protect existing concrete and asphalt pavement from damage due to vehicle loads, parking, and storage.

1. Schedule loading to minimize pavement material consolidation during hot

weather. Distribute wheel loads to the greatest extent possible. 3.06 OVERHEAD ATTACHMENTS A. Where overhead hangers are required, and not indicated on the drawings, provide

one or more of the following as required: 1. Concrete inserts prior to placement of concrete or drilled type inserts after

concrete is placed. 2. Trapeze from adjacent structure with suitable steel framing.


B. Where metal deck is furnished with hanger tabs or similar devices, applied total

load, including work of other trades, not to exceed 75 pounds for each device. Loads in excess of permitted limit to be supported by trapeze framing as specified above.

C. Verify support requirements of heavy or unusual loads not specifically shown on

drawings with Architect. 3.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall maintain all systems and equipment operated during

construction. The contractor responsible for the installation of the system shall operate and maintain it. Make all repairs and perform all maintenance to assure Work is turned-over to Owner in first class condition.

B. Maintenance work includes:

1. Lubrication 2. Adjustments 3. Filter replacements 4. Chemical treatment.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 01 73 29 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CUTTING AND PATCHING

SECTION 01 73 29

CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Execute cutting, fitting or patching of Work, required to: 1. Make several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective Work. 4. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of Contract

Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 6. Install specified Work in existing construction. B. In addition to contract requirements, upon written instructions of Architect: 1. Uncover Work to provide for Architect's observation of covered Work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing. 3. Remove Work to provide for alteration of existing Work. C. Do not endanger any Work by cutting or altering Work or any part of it. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety of Project, submit written notice to

Architect, requesting consent to proceed with cutting, including: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Description of Affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting. 4. Affect on other Work, on structural integrity of Project. 5. Description of proposed Work. Designate: a. Scope of cutting and patching. b. Contractor and trades to execute work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing. 6. Alternative to cutting and patching. B. Should conditions of Work, or schedule indicate change of materials or methods,

submit written recommendation to Architect, including: 1. Conditions indicating change. 2. Recommendations for alternative materials or methods.


3. Submittals as required for Substitutions. C. Submit written notice to Architect, designating time Work will be uncovered, to

provide observation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Patching of materials and surfaces shall be in accordance with the requirements of

the Contract Documents. Where not otherwise defined, patching shall match adjacent surfaces and proper materials shall be provided accordingly.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of Work, including elements subject to movement or

damage during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products. 3.02 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING A. Provide shoring, bracing and support as required to maintain structural integrity of

Project. B. Provide protection for other portions of the Project, including all Contractors'

personnel. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply

with specified tolerances, finishes. B. Execute cutting and demolition by method which will prevent damage to other

Work, and will provide surface to receive installation of repairs and new Work. 1. No cutting shall be performed which will, in any way, reduce the structural

strength of the building. Should such cutting be necessary, consult Architect and do not proceed with such operation unless written approval is given.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cur or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

C. Restore Work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide

completed Work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents.


D. Patching of materials and surfaces shall be in accordance with the requirements of

the Contract Documents. Where not otherwise defined, patching shall match existing or adjacent surfaces and proper materials shall be provided accordingly.

1. Wherever existing walls, floors, ceilings, etc., are cut, the exposed surfaces

must be neatly finished by patching, painting, wall covering, etc., as required to blend patched areas into adjacent existing surfaces. Patched areas shall not be visible when viewing entire wall surface.

a. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

2. Where painting or finishing of patched surfaces or application of wall or floor covering is required, finish the entire plane of surface in which patched area occurs.

3. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

3.04 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A. Where pipes, conduits, ductwork or other materials pass through new walls,

partitions, floors, roof or ceilings, provide suitable sleeves in these elements or provide openings where sleeves are not practical.

B. Close sleeves and openings to prevent passage of smoke or fire using approved

methods and materials to maintain the fire rating of the construction being penetrated. See Section 07 84 00.

C. Where pipes, conduit, ductwork etc., pass through, behind, or above existing

construction, provide all cutting, patching, and refinishing for doing this work as specified herein.

D. Lintels: Provide steel or precast concrete lintels to span openings in masonry walls

sized in accordance with schedule shown or as detailed on structural drawings. In general, lintels are not required for openings less than the width of masonry unit in which wall is being constructed. Penetrations under beams or other concentrated loads require approval of Architect.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 01 74 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CLEANING

SECTION 01 74 00

CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. These requirements supplement cleaning information specified in the General

Project Requirements. B. Execute cleaning, during progress of the work and at completion of the work, as

required by Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Cutting and Patching: Section 01 73 29. B. Cleaning for Specific Products or Work: Specification section for the work. 1.03 CLEANING AND DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: Maintain project in accord with the following safety and insurance

standards: 1. Applicable Federal and State Requirements. 2. National Fire Protection Association. B. Hazards Control 1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from

premises daily. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and

anti-pollution laws. 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner

in storm or sanitary sewers. 3. Do not dispose of waste into streams or waterways. 4. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent dust. D. Clean streets, highways, and private properties of all mud, earth, rubbish, rocks,

refuse or other debris of any kind resulting from such work or related transportation to and from the work site.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Select and use cleaning materials and equipment with care to avoid scratching,

marring, defacing, staining or discoloring surfaces cleaned. B. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surfaces to be

cleaned.

1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by the cleaning material

manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

B. Provide, maintain and empty 55 gallon metal and dumpster type containers for

collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Locate containers as directed by Architect.

1. Provide containers with adequate capacity to accommodate anticipated

needs. If containers do not have adequate capacity, increase intervals of waste removal or capacity of containers until adequate capacity is provided.

C. At reasonable intervals during progress of Work, but in no case less than once a

week, dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish. D. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

E. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or

vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

F. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.


G. Direct Special Attention To: 1. Provide non-staining layout lines and other markings on masonry and

concrete. Use chalk lines wherever possible and remove when no longer needed.

2. Remove all stains from concrete surfaces, including floors. 3. Shop marks shall not appear on exposed surfaces of any item. 4. Remove concrete, mortar and paint spatters. 5. Protect aluminum frames during construction and thoroughly clean upon

completion of the installation. H. Clean interior surfaces before start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an

as-needed basis until painting is finished. I. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning

process will not fall on wet or newly-coated surfaces. J. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not

drop or throw materials from heights. K. Vacuum interior building areas where work is performed prior to painting and other

finish work. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as needed basis until building is ready for occupancy.

L. Protect interior of ductwork during construction from accumulation of dirt, dust or

debris. M. Clean trash from all chases and concealed spaces before final enclosure. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

1. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. B. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners for final cleaning. C. At the completion of the work, remove all surplus material, false work, temporary

structures, including foundations thereof, plants of any description and debris of every nature resulting from their operations and put the site in a neat and orderly condition.

D. Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.


E. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

F. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

G. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. H. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints and other foreign materials

from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, including light fixtures and lenses; polish surfaces so designated to a shine finish.

1. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, films and other foreign substances. 2. Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished condition; remove

foreign substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine. I. Remove temporary protection and labels not required to remain J. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication. K. Remove debris, rubbish, dirt, etc. from open concealed spaces, chases and above

ceilings. L. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent

surfaces. M. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of

sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces. N. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris from roofs, gutters, areaways, and

drainage systems. O. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. P. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters

when units have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts, blowers, and coils when units have been operated without filters during construction.

Q. Clean light fixtures and lamps; polish lenses. R. Clean dirt and debris from interior of all electrical panels and user accessible

electrical enclosure boxes prior to installation of covers or in the case of hinged access doors, before final cleaning of adjacent space. Clean the exterior surfaces of all switchgear located in Mechanical and Electrical Rooms and spaces.


S. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

T. Clean dirt and dust from interior of air handling units before installing final filters.

Wipe down the exterior surfaces of all HVAC equipment located in Mechanical Rooms and spaces.

1. Exposed painted ductwork to be brushed clean of dust. U. Site/Exterior Items: Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by

construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

1. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains,

and other foreign deposits. 2. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even

textured surface. 3. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material

from Project site. 4. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces.

V. Maintain cleaning until Final Completion. W. Prior to Final Completion, or Owner occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an

inspection of sight exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 01 74 19 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Section 01 81 19. B. Concrete Unit Masonry – for disposal requirements for masonry waste: Section

04 22 00. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid

waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Disposal: Removal off-site of construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,

reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Recycle: Recovery of construction waste for subsequent processing in

preparation for reuse. D. Salvage: Recovery of construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in

another facility. E. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of construction waste and subsequent

incorporation into the Work. 1.04 PERFORMANCE GOALS A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by

weight of total nonhazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.



A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00, "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of

waste management coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste

and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify

availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to

recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 2 copies of plan within 14 days after the Notice

to Proceed.

B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include separate reports for construction waste. Include the following information:

1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a

percentage of total waste.

C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit three (3) copies of calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste

donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to

individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.


F. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of

recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of

waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

H. LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2, signed by Contractor,

tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements for the credit have been met.

I. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator and refrigerant recovery

technician. J. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician

responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: LEED Accredited Professional by U.S. Green Building Council.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction. C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply

with requirements in Section 01 31 19 "Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of

Waste Management Coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste

and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify

availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to

recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.08 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E1609 and requirements of this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.


B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be

salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and

reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with General Project Requirements for "Temporary Facilities and

Controls" for operation, termination, and removal requirements.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

1. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work

on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.


C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for

separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with General Project Requirements for requirements for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.02 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other

incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials

according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and

debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable

waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove

contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other

materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling

receiver or processor. 3.03 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove

pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.


4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees at landfill facility.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants" for use of

chipped organic waste as organic mulch.

C. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated

wood. a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants." for use

of clean sawdust as organic mulch.

D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small

mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. 3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, or otherwise reused,

remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be

disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on

adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of

them.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 01 81 13 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 81 13

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with

certain USGBC LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED-Certified certification based on USGBC's "LEED 2009 for New Construction & Major Renovations." 1. Other LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain certification

depend on material selections and may not be specifically identified as LEED requirements. Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits may be used as one (1) criterion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests.

2. Additional LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain the indicated certification depend on Architect's design and other aspects of project that are not part of the Work of the Contract.

3. A copy of the LEED Project checklist is attached at the end of this Section for information only.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Divisions 01 through 33 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of

each of these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to LEED.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying

that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. C. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically

harvested within a 10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo, cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool.


D. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of project site. If only a fraction of a product or material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.

E. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be

determined by weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to determine the recycled content value.

F. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households

or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.

G. "Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream

during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit additional LEED submittals required by other specification

sections. B. LEED submittals are in addition to other submittals. If submitted item is identical

to that submitted to comply with other requirements, submit duplicate copies as a separate submittal to verify compliance with indicated LEED requirements.

C. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for building

materials used for project, excluding mechanical, electrical, and plumbing components, and specialty items such as elevators and equipment.

D. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date

established for the Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met:

1. Waste Management Plan complying with Division 01 Section 01 74 19

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal - CMR." 2. Salvaged and Refurbished Materials List: Identify each material that will

be salvaged or refurbished, including its source and cost. 3. Recycled Content Materials List: Indicate cost, post-consumer recycled

content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content.

4. Certified Wood Products List: Indicate each product containing certified wood, including its source and cost of certified wood products.

E. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit

reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans for the following:

1. Waste Reduction Progress Reports complying with Division 01 Section

01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal - CMR."


2. Salvaged and refurbished materials. 3. Recycled content. 4. Regional materials. 5. Certified wood products. G. LEED Documentation Submittals:

1. Waste Management Plan: Comply with Division 01 Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal - CMR."

2. Salvaged and Refurbished Materials: Receipts for salvaged and refurbished materials used for project, indicating sources and costs for salvaged and refurbished materials.

3. Recycled Content: Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

4. Regional Materials: Product data indicating location and distance from project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

5. Certified Wood Products: Product data and chain-of-custody certificates for products containing certified wood. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.

6. Indoor Environmental Quality: a. Construction indoor-air-quality management plan. b. Product data for temporary filtration media. c. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy. d. Construction Documentation: Six (6) photographs at three (3)

different times during the construction period, along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed, documenting implementation of the indoor-air-quality management measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials.

7. Indoor Environmental Quality: a. Signed statement describing the building air flush-out procedures

including the dates when flush-out was begun and completed and statement that filtration media was replaced after flush-out.

b. Product data for filtration media used during flush-out and during occupancy.

c. Report from testing and inspecting agency indicating results of indoor-air-quality testing and documentation showing compliance with indoor-air-quality testing procedures and requirements.

8. Adhesives and Sealants: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L.

9. Paints and Coatings: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L.


10. Carpet Systems: Product data for carpet and carpet cushion installed in the building interior indicating that the product complies with the CRI Green Label Plus testing program. Product data for carpet adhesives used in the building indicating VOC content in g/L.

11. Composite Wood, Agrifiber or Wood Glues: Product data for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.


A. LEED Coordinator: Engage an experienced LEED-Accredited Professional to coordinate LEED requirements. LEED coordinator may also serve as waste management coordinator.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Provide products and procedures necessary to obtain LEED credits required in this Section. Although other Sections may specify some requirements that contribute to LEED credits, the Contractor shall determine additional materials and procedures necessary to obtain LEED credits indicated.

2.02 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS

A. Credit MR 4 - Recycled Content Materials: Provide building materials with

recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 20 percent of cost of materials used for project.

1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by

dividing weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item.

2. Cost of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item.

3. Do not include furniture, plumbing, mechanical and electrical components, and specialty items such as elevators and equipment in the calculation.

2.03 REGIONAL MATERIALS

A. Credit MR 5: Regional Materials: Provide 20 percent of building materials (by

cost) that are regional materials.


2.04 CERTIFIED WOOD A. Credit MR 7: Certified Wood Products: Provide a minimum of fifty (50%) percent

(by cost) of wood-based materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

1. Wood-based materials include, but are not limited to, the following

materials when made from wood, engineered wood products, or wood-based panel products: a. Rough carpentry. b. Miscellaneous carpentry. c. Heavy timber construction. d. Wood decking. e. Metal-plate-connected wood trusses. f. Structural glued-laminated timber. g. Finish carpentry. h. Architectural woodwork. i. Wood paneling. j. Wood veneer wall covering. k. Wood flooring. l. Wood lockers. m. Wood cabinets.

2.05 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS

A. Credit IEQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system,

adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following VOC content limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Metal-to-Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L. 4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. 7. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. 8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. 9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. 10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. 18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 19. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L.


20. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine-covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, rubber, or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250 g/L.

21. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L. 22. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L. 23. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L. 24. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 25. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 26. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L. 27. Sheet-Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L. 28. Aerosol Adhesive, General-Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight. 29. Aerosol Adhesive, General-Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight. 30. Special-Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight. 31. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. 32. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 33. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 34. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 35. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. 36. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 37. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 38. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 39. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.

B. Credit IEQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system,

paints and coatings shall comply with the following VOC content limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not

more than 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L. 8. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 9. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 13. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

C. Carpet Systems

1. Carpet: Meet the requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute’s (CRI)

Green Label Plus Program. 2. Carpet Cushion: Meet the requirements of CRI’s Green Label Program. 3. Carpet Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.

D. Credit IEQ 4.4: Composite wood, agrifiber products, and adhesives shall not

contain ureaformaldehyde resin.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Construction Waste Management: Comply with Section 01 74 19 "Construction

Waste Management and Disposal - CMR." 3.05 LEED ON-LINE DOCUMENTATION FOR LEED-NC PROJECTS

A. General Contractor shall complete the LEED On-line documentation for the following credits: 1. SSp1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention 2. MRc2 Construction Waste Management 3. MRc3 Materials Reuse 4. MRc4 Recycled Content 5. MRc5 Regional Materials 6. MRc6 Rapidly Renewable Materials 7. MRc7 Certified Wood 8. IEQ3.1 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan - During

Construction 9. IEQ3.2 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan - Before

Occupancy 10. IEQ4.1 Low Emitting Materials- Adhesives and Sealants 11. IEQ4.2 Low Emitting Materials- Paints and Coatings 12. IEQ4.3 Low Emitting Materials- Flooring Systems 13. IEQ4.4 Low Emitting Materials- Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products

B. Refer to the Architect’s LEED Checklist for the applicability of each credit to the Project.

C. The Construction Manager and/or General Contractor shall be responsible for

achieving the point total associated with each applicable credit, as noted on the Architect’s LEED Checklist for the Project.

END OF SECTION

Project Name: Corpus Christi Service Center Client: American Electric Power Service Corp.Project Number: R16429.01 Updated: 9/26/2016

86,500 David Rinaldi

August 19, 2016 Moody Nolan, Inc. Andre Gray (LEED Administrator)

78552

Certfied Urban Engineering

1000087735 SSP Design, LLC

Henderson Engineers

Outcome Construction Services

Yes ? No

45 2 9 110 Pts

Yes ? No

7 0 9 26 Pts D/C Notes Resp.

Y

1

1

PROJECT TOTALS (Certification Estimates)

Construction Activity Pollution Prevention

Site Selection

Create and implement an erosion and sediment control plan. Compliance with NPDES regs required even if site is less than 1 acre

SSc4.2

D

Do not develop on prime farmland; in floodplain; on habitat for endangered species; near wetlands; near waterbody; on public parkland

Arch / LA / Owner

(Below is for non-residential projects)

1

Alternative Transportation - Bicycle Storage & Changing Rooms

Provide shower and changing facilities in building or within 200 yards for 0.5% of building users (measured at peak periods).

P id bi l k d/ t ithi 200 d f b ildi t f 5% f ll b ildi

SSp1

Req'dCivil /

Contractor

Arch / Civil1 D

LEED 2009 for New Construction and Major Renovation

SSc1

Project Scorecard (based on April 1, 2013 updates to the Rating System)

C

SUSTAINABLE SITES

LightingSustainable

Project GSF

Date Registered

Certification Expected

GBCI Project #

LEED OnLine ID

Baseline EUI

Projected EUI

Energy Performance % Goal

Energy Performance % Model

% Water Reduction Goal

% Water Reduction Calculation

Owner Architect

Civil EngineerLandscape ArchMEP EngineerCommissioning

CM / GC

Zip Code

3

1 0 0

1

Yes ? No

5 0 0 10 Pts Resp.

Y Water Use Reduction

Heat Island Effect - Roof

Heat Island Effect - Nonroof

SSc7.2

OPTION 1

New ordinary concrete has an SRI of 38 - 52. Exemplary Performance is also achievable for 100% coverage

OPTION 1

Option 2- Alternative fueling stations for 3% of total vehicle capacity of site

1

ArchD

Civil / OwnerOption 3- Provide low-emitting and fuel-efficient vehicles for 3% of the FTE's (and preferred parking)

Exemplary Performance- Option 1: Comprehensive transportation management plan that demonstrates a quantifiable reduction in personal automobile use. Option 2: Quadruple the transit service requirements of the credit to achieve double transit ridership.

Owner

3 D

Alternative Transportation - Low-Emitting & Fuel-Efficient VehiclesOption 1- Preferred parking for low-emitting and fuel-efficient vehicles for 5% of total vehicle capacity of site

Exemplary Performance- Comprehensive transportation management plan that demonstrates a quantifiable reduction in personal automobile use

Provide secure bicycle racks and/or storage within 200 yards of a building entrance for 5% or more of all building users (measured at peak periods).

Option 4- Provide occupants to a low-emitting or fuel-efficient vehicle share program for 3% of the FTE's. Locate cars in the nearest available spaces in the nearest available parking area.

WEp1

1

SSc7.1

Exemplary Performance- 100% of roof area (excluding mech. equip, photovoltaic panels, and skylights) consists of vegetated roof

Exemplary Performance- Option 1: 100% of non-roof impervious surfaces have been constructed with high-albedo or open-grid paving or will be shaded within 5 years OR Option 2: 100% of the on-site parking spaces are located under cover.

Employ strategies that use 20% less water than the water use baseline calculated for the building (not including irrigation).

Option 1-Reduce heat island effect for 50% of the site hardscape by using any combination of the following: shade trees; shade from structures covered by solar panels; shade from arch devices/structures that have an SRI of at least 29; hardscape materials with an SRI of at least 29; open-grid pavement system (at least 50% pervious)

Plumbing

Option 1- For min. 75% of roof- SRI greater or eq to 78 for a low sloped roof and/or SRI greater or eq to 29 for a steep sloped roof. (2:12 or 15% is cut off between steep and low)

C

Option 2- Vegetated roof that covers at least 50% of roof area

Note: Total roof area excludes mechanical equipment, photovoltaic panels, and skylights

Option 2- Place min. 50% of parking spaces under cover. Roof must have SRI of at least 29, be vegetated, or covered by solar panels

Civil / LA

WATER EFFICIENCY

Option 3- Combo of high-albedo and vegetated roof (weighted average)

DReq'd

SSc4.3

2 2 to 4

Option 1- Reduce by 50%-- Reduce potable water consumption for irrigation by 50% over a baseline (Strategies include plants, efficient irrigation, captured rainwater, recycled wastewater, water treated by a public agency for nonpotable use)

2

Option 2- No potable use or irrigation-- Meet Option 1 AND use only captured rainwater, recycled wastewater, recycled graywater or water treated by a public agency for nonpotable use OR install lanscaping that does not require permanent irrigation (temporary OK if removed within 18 months)

4

3 2 to 4

Reduce by 30% 2

Reduce by 35% 3

Reduce by 40% 4

Yes ? No

14 2 0 35 Pts Resp.

Y

Y

Y

D

Water Efficient Landscaping

Fundamental Refrigerant Management

C

Must include HVAC systems and controls, lighting and daylighting controls, domestic hot water systems, renewable energy systems

Design Team must develop Basis of Design (BOD)

Develop and implement commissioning plan

Minimum Energy Performance

Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems

Water Use Reduction

OPTION 2 - Temporary Irrigation

1/4 FLUSH URINALS

Req'd D

CxA / Mech / Owner

Option 1. What's the required R Values for the walls??? MEP to follow up on codes for minimized heating and advise.

For commercial projects: Toilets-1.6 gpf; Urinals-1.0 gpf; Lav- varies; Showerheads- 2.6 gpm

Plumbing

EAp2

Req'd

WEc1

LA

WEc3

Option 2- Prescriptive Compliance Path: ASHRAE Advanced Energy Design Guide. This only applies to small office buildings (20,000 SF or less), small retails buildings (20,000 SF or less), small warehouse/self storage buildings (50,000 SF or less)

Option 3- Prescriptive Compliance Path: Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide. Building must be less than 100,000 SF, comply with Section 1 and Section 2. Healthcare, warehouse, and labs not eligible.

ENERGY & ATMOSPHERE

D

EAp3

This credit is in addition to the Pre-req

EAp1

Exemplary Performance- 45% reduction

Mech

Option 1- Whole Building Energy Simulation- Demonstrate a 10% improvement in the building performance rating for new buildings compared to a baseline (5% for major renovations to existing buildings). Baseline based on Appendix G of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007

No CFC refrigerants in new HVAC&R systems

Develop and incorporate commissioning requirements into contract documents

Verify installation and performance of systems to be commissioned

Owner must document Owner's Program Requirements (OPR)

Complete a summary commissioning report

10 1 to 19

Improve by 30% 10

2

2 0

0 2

Yes ? No

7 0 0 14 Pts Resp.

Y

EAc1

Mech

Exemplary Performance- Conduct comprehensive envelope commissioning; need to demonstrate the standards and protocol by which the envelope was commissioned.

Exemplary Performance-Option 1: New Building-50% / Renovation 46%; Option 2 and 3: N/A

IMPROVE BY 30%Optimize Energy Performance

CxA to review contractor submittals for the systems being commissioned

Develop a systems manual for the building's operating staff

CxA review the operation of the building with operations/maintenance staff and occupants within 10 months after substantial completion

Provide an easily-accessible dedicated area(s) for the collection and storage of materials for recycling for the entire building. At a minimum include paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals.

Storage and Collection of Recyclables

Green Power

Enhanced Refrigerant Management

Enhanced Commissioning

Req'd D Arch/ Owner

MRp1

Owner2 C

D

Option 1- Do not use refrigerants.

Mech

Engage in at least a 2-year renewable energy contract to provide at least 35% of the building’s electricity from renewable sources

2

Pursue only if needed

Verify that the operating personnal and building occupants have been trained

CxA to conduct a commissioning design review of OPR, BOD, and design documents prior to start of mid-construction documents phase and back-check the review comments in the subsequent design submission

This credit improves upon MRpr2

CxA must be involved prior to start of CD phase.

C2

When reusing existing equipment, complete a CFC phase-out conversion

Arch

Mech

option 2

Existing small HVAC units and other small equipment containing less than .5 pounds of refrigerant are not subject to these requirements

Option 2-Select refrigerants and HVAC&R equipment that minimizes or eliminate the emission of compounds that contribute to ozone depletion and climate change.

EAc4

Req'd

EAc6

Exemplary Performance: Offset 70% of energy usage (100% for CI projects)

MATERIALS & RESOURCES

D

Existing small HVAC units and other small equipment containing less than .5 pounds of refrigerant are not subject to these requirements

D

EAc3

No CFC refrigerants in new HVAC&R systems

2

50% Recycled or Salvaged 1

75% Recycled or Salvaged

2

2 1 to 2

10% of Content 1

20% of Content 2

2 1 to 2

10% of Materials 1

20% of Materials 2

1

Yes ? No

10 0 0 15 Pts Resp.

Y

Exemplary Performance- 95% or more of total construction waste diverted

Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance

Certified Wood

Regional Materials

Recycled Content

Construction Waste Management

MRc5

MRc4

Exemplary Performance- 30% recycled content

Arch/ Contractor

1 to 2

C

Include Divisions 3-10, foundations, paving, site improvements, planting

Exemplary Performance- 30% of materials

Arch/ Contractor

Include Divisions 3-10, foundations, paving, site improvements, planting

If only a fraction of a product of material is extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as manufactured locally, then only that only that percentage by weight can contribute.

Arch/ Contractor

Use products extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for minimum of 10% or 20% based on cost, of the total materials value.

MRc2

C

C

LEED on-line form- Include size of area, accessibility, expected volume for the building, collection frequency. If any storage areas exist, need to be sized per the guidelines in the reference guide.

Develop and implement a construction waste management plan that identifies the materials the materials to be diverted from the disposal and whether the materials will be sorted on-site or comingled.

Excavated soil and land-clearing debris do not contribute to this credit

Use FSC-certified wood products for minimum 50% based on cost for wood building components.

Exemplary Performance- FSC-certified wood content of 95% or more of the projects's total new wood

Arch/ Contractor

C1

MRc7

IEQp1

Recycle and/or salvage nonhazardous construction and demolition debris.

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

Calcs can be done with weight or volume, but must be consistant throughout

Use products with recycled content. The sum on postconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of the preconsumer content constitutes at least 10% or 20% based on cost, of the total value of the materials in the project.

Y

1

1

1

Option 2 - Air testing

y

IEQc4.1

1 CArch/

Contractor

Case 2. Naturally Ventilated Spaces. Must comply with ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007, Paragraph 5.1 (with errata but without addenda)

D

IEQp2

1

IEQc3.2

Develop an IAQ management plan and implement it after all finishes have been installed and the building has been completely cleaned before occupancy.

Option 2. Air Testing. Conduct baseline IAQ testing after construction ends and prior to occupancy using testing protocals as outlined in the LEED Reference Guide.

Option 1. Flush-out. Path 1. Perform building flush-out after construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed.

Option 1. Flush-out. Path 2. If building is occupied prior to completion of the flush-out, follow the guidelines in the LEED Reference Guide.

Adhesives, sealants, and sealant primers used on the interior of the building (inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) must comply with the SCAQMD Rule #1168. Aerosol Adhesives must comply with GS-36 requirements (refer to charts in LEED Reference Guide)

C

Req'd

Low-Emitting Materials - Adhesives and Sealants

Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan - Before Occupancy

Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan - During Construction

Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control

Protect stored on-site and installed aborptive materials from moisture damage.

Use filtration media at each return air griller for any permanently installed air handlers. Replace filter immediately prior to occupancy

OwnerOption 2. Case 1. Non-residential projects. Prohibit smoking in building except in designated smoking rooms. Prohibit smoking on the property within 25 feet of entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. Provide signage to allow smoking in designated areas, prohibit smoking in designated areas or prohibit smoking on the entire property.

Contractor

ContractorC

Develop and implement and IAQ management plan for the construction and preoccupancy phases.

During construction meet SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction.

Req'd D Mech

Case1. Mechanically Ventilated Spaces. Meet the minimum requirements of Sections 4 through 7 of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (with errata but without addenda).

Option 1. Prohibit smoking in the building. Prohibit smoking on the property within 25 feet of entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. Provide signage to allow smoking in designated areas, prohibit smoking in designated areas or prohibit smoking on the entire property.

Option 2. Case 2. Residential and Hospitality projects (see reference guide)

IEQc3.1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1 Thermal Comfort - Verification

Thermal Comfort - Design

Controllability of Systems - Thermal Comfort

Controllability of Systems - Lighting

Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control

Low-Emitting Materials - Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products

Low-Emitting Materials - Flooring Systems

1 C

Arch/ Contractor

Low-Emitting Materials - Paints and Coatings

Option 2. All flooring elements must meet testing and product requirements of Calif. Dept. of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions. Mineral-based flooring (tile, masonry, terrazzo, and cut stone) without integral organic-based coatings and sealants and unfinished/untreated solid wood flooring qualify without any IAQ testing requirements. Site-applied adhesives, grouts, finishes, and sealers must be compliant for a mineral-based or unfinished/untreated solid wood flooring system to qualify.

Option 1. The following must meet the requirements outlined the LEED Reference Guide--- Carpet, carpet cushion, carpet adhesive; All hard surface flooring; Stains, sealers, and floor finishes; Tile setting adhesives and grout.

Meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55-2004, Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy (with errata but without addenda)

Provide individual comfort controls for 50% of the occupants.

Credit 6.2

1

Arch/ Contractor

IEQc4.4

1 C

Arch/ Mech

IEQc5

Provide comfort system controls for all shared multi-occupant spaces to enable adjustments that meet group needs.

Mech

Mech

1 D

Each ventilation system that supplies outdoor air shall comply with the requirements in the LEED Reference Guide

Provide permanent entryway mats 10'-0" min. in direction of travel at regularly used exterior entrances. Use either grate/grill/slotted systems that allow for cleaning underneath or roll-out mats that are maintained on a weekly basis by a contracted service organization.

Exhaust spaces where chemicals are used (garages, housekeeping and laundry areas, copying and printing rooms); Provide self-closing doors and walls to deck or hard ceiling.

D1

D

D

Composite wood and agrifiber products and laminating adhesives used on interior of building must contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.

These products are defined as particleboard, MDF, plywood, wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates and door cores.

IEQc6.1

Provide individual lighting controls for 90% of the occupants

Provide lighting system controls for all shared multi-occupant spaces to enable adjustments that meet group needs.

IEQc7.1

C

Arch/ Contractor

1

Electrical

IEQc4.2

Paints and coatings used on the interior of the building (inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) must comply with GS-11, GC-03, SCAQMD Rule #1113 as outlined in the LEED Reference Guide.

IEQc4.3

IEQc7.2

1

1

Yes ? No

2 0 0 6 Pts Resp.

1 1 100% converage for SSc7.1

1

0 1

1

1

1 IDc2 LEED® Accredited Professional 1 C Arch

PROJECT INFORMATION Notes Resp.

Yes ? No

45 2 9 110 Pts

Certified: 40-49 points Silver: 50-59 points Gold: 60-79 points Platinum: 80+ points

Thermal Comfort - Verification

IDc1.1

IDc1.2

IDc1.3

IDc1.4

IDc1.5 Innovation or Pilot Credit

Innovation or Pilot Credit

Innovation or Pilot Credit or Exemplary Performance



PIf3 Occupant Usage Data

PIf4 Schedule and Overview Documents

PIf1

PIf2 Project Summary Details

Achieve IEQc7.1- Thermal Comfort- Design.

Mech / Owner

Innovation in Design

D

Owner to conduct survey after occupancy and develop a plan for corrective action if necessary.

Install permanent monitoring system to ensure that building performance meets the desired comfort criteria as determined by IEQc7.1.

1

Path 3. Pilot Credit (1-5 points) - Attempt credits available in Pilot Credit Library.D/C

IEQc7.2

INNOVATION IN DESIGN

PROJECT TOTALS (Certification Estimates)

1 to 5

Path 1. Innovation in Design (1-5 points) - Achieve significant measureable environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in LEED 2009

Path 2. Exemplary Performance (1-3 points) - Achieve exemplary performance in an existing pre-req or credit that allows exemplary performance.

Minimum Program Requirements

American Electric Power 26220013 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 019113

PART 1 GENERAL

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. These requirements shall be in addition to applicable Division 22, 23 and 26 Sections.

1. Division 22 Section “Commissioning of Plumbing Systems” for commissioning process activities for plumbing equipment, sub-systems, and systems.

2. Division 23 Section “Commissioning of HVACR Systems” for commissioning process activities for HVACR equipment, sub-systems, and systems.

3. Division 26 Section “Commissioning of Electrical Systems” for commissioning process activities for electrical equipment, sub-systems, and systems.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section defines the commissioning process requirements that apply to the implementation of commissioning without regard to Division of work or to specific equipment, sub-systems, and systems.

B. Commissioning is the process of ensuring that building system operate as intended through their life-cycle, as defined in the Owner’s Project Requirements, Basis of Design and illustrated by the Contract Documents.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS & DEFINITIONS

A. A/E: Architect, Architect/Engineer, Engineer.

B. BMS: Building Management System

C. Basis of Design (BoD): A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process.


D. Construction Administrator (CA): The entity holding the prime construction contract and responsible for coordinating the work of all Sub-Contractors that are governed by the prime contract.

E. Commissioning (Cx): A quality-focused process for enhancing the delivery of a project. The process focuses upon verifying and documenting that the facility and all commissioned equipment and systems are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated and maintained (as appropriate to the commissioning scope) to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements.

F. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.

G. Commissioning Team: The individuals who through coordinated actions are responsible for implementing commissioning.

H. CxA: Commissioning Authority, or their designated representative.

I. Deficiency: A condition in the installation or function of a piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents and has not been corrected prior to the submission of the final commissioning report.

J. Equipment, Sub-systems, and Systems: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" equipment, sub-systems, and systems.

K. FPT: Functional performance test.

L. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.

M. Non-Conformance: A deficiency that is accepted by the Owner as complete and acceptable or that has not been corrected prior to the submission of the final commissioning report.

N. O & M: Operations and maintenance.

O. Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR): A document developed as a collaborative effort between the Owner, design team and CxA that details the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include project goals, measurable performance criteria, and supporting information.

P. PFC: Pre-Functional Checklist.

Q. Systems Manual: A systems-focused composite document that includes the operation and maintenance manual and additional information of use to the Owner during the post-occupancy phase.


R. Test, Adjust & Balance (TAB): This term describes the actual performance related to HVAC&R systems of the Sub contracted for this purpose.

1.04 COMMISSIONING TEAM

A. This section outlines the commissioning process to be followed and the responsibilities of the Commissioning Team during the construction, acceptance, and post-occupancy project phases.

B. A multi-disciplinary team executes the commissioning process. The commissioning responsibilities of non-contractor team members during the construction, acceptance, and post-occupancy phases of the project are provided here for information, and to provide some context for the overall process. The composition of the commissioning team is fluid and changes throughout the project phases.

C. Team Members Appointed by Owner: CxA, Design Professional, Owners Representatives and Facility Operations Personnel.

D. Team Members Appointed by Contractor(s): CA, Representative of the following Sub-Contactors and Suppliers, deemed appropriate by the CxA.

1. Division 22 Sub-Contractors appropriate to the scope of commissioning described in Section “Commissioning of Plumbing Systems”.

2. Division 23 Sub-Contractors appropriate to the scope of commissioning described in Section “Commissioning of HVAC&R Systems”.

3. Division 26 Sub-Contractors appropriate to the scope of commissioning described in Section “Commissioning of Electrical Systems”.

1.05 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide the approved OPR documentation to the CxA and CA for information and use if not included as part of this Section.

B. Provide the approved BoD documentation, prepared by A/E, to the CxA and CA for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and maintenance training plan, if not included as part of this Section.

C. Facilitate and support the commissioning process and give final approval of the commissioning work.


1.06 OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Manage the contracts of the A/E, CxA, and CA.

B. Arrange for facility operating and maintenance personnel to attend various field commissioning activities.

C. Ensure that any seasonal or deferred testing and any deficiency issues are addressed.

D. Facilitate and support the commissioning process.

1.07 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Attend selected commissioning team meetings.

B. Provide any sequence of operation documentation requested by the CxA. The designers shall assist in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings, or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.

C. Coordinate resolution to deficiencies identified during commissioning according to the contract documents.

D. Review and comment on FPT plans to confirm that test procedures meet the intended operation of the systems.

E. Furnish a copy of architectural supplemental instructions (ASI) and A/E field reports to the CxA.

1.08 CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide representation with the means and authority to coordinate the implementation of the commissioning process as detailed elsewhere in the Contract Documents and supporting documents developed by the CxA.

B. Coordinate the commissioning process with Sub-Contractor(s).

C. Integrate commissioning process milestones in the construction schedule.

D. Attend, with responsible Sub-Contractor(s), commissioning progress meetings and cooperate with CxA for resolution of issues related to commissioning.

E. Furnish a copy of all requests for information (RFI), construction change notification (CCN), and other construction team generated documentation related to commissioning to the CxA.

F. Furnish a copy of Owner-Architect-Contractor (OAC) meeting minutes to the CxA.


G. Notify the CxA when equipment, sub-systems and systems are ready for PFCs and FPTs.

H. Authorize sub-contractors to make technicians available and/or coordinate with the manufacturer’s authorized technicians to startup equipment and systems, and to simulate conditions for the purpose of completing FPTs.

I. Review commissioning reports and other commissioning team generated documentation.

J. Provide equipment operational and maintenance and related information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation, including documentation for systems manual.

1.09 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The CxA is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with codes, general construction scheduling, or construction means and methods. The CxA may assist with problem-solving and deficiency resolution, but the final responsibilities lie with the A/E and CA.

B. The primary roles of the CxA are to develop, coordinate and execute testing plans, observe and document performance and verify-that systems are functioning in accordance with the OPR and BoD as illustrated in the Contract Documents.

C. Provide a Commissioning Plan that details the commissioning process recommended by the CxA.

D. Review construction-related submittals for compliance with OPR and BoD requirements for equipment to be commissioned.

E. Provide and execute FPT Plans.

F. Plan and conduct a commissioning kick-off meeting with the Owner and CA to establish the purpose and proposed process for commissioning, and to establish individual roles and responsibilities.

G. Document the progress of construction through collecting completed commissioning documentation, attending construction meetings, and leading commissioning related meetings.

H. Provide reports on commissioning progress.

I. Witness the initial startup and checkout activities of a sample of the commissioned equipment. Review checkout and start-up procedures and reports completed by the installing Sub-Contractors or manufacturers’ authorized technicians responsible for start-up.


J. Verify that testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work is completed as required by the Contract Documents and perform limited verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing report data with the assistance of the TAB Agency personnel and testing equipment.

K. Review the operations and maintenance manuals for completeness and warranty requirements for all commissioned equipment.

L. Verify training of Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel was completed.

M. Provide Systems Manual to Owner.

N. Plan and conduct a meeting during the tenth month of the CA’s 12-month warranty period to review the operation of the project with the facility’s operation and maintenance staff.

O. Recommend acceptance of the commissioned equipment and systems to the Owner.

P. Provide a final commissioning report that summarizes the work completed and demonstrates compliance with the OPR and BoD documents.

Q. Plan and conduct a meeting with the Owner and CA to close-out the commissioning process.

1.10 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

A. The CA shall provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the final commissioning report:

1. Copies of completed PFCs.

2. Copies of completed Plan and Documentation Requirements for Start-up and Initial Checkout.

3. Copies of completed Commissioning Corrective Action Reports.

1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. The requirements found in this Section shall be in addition to those listed elsewhere in Division 01 or in subsequent specification sections.

B. The CxA will identify submittals to the CA that are required concurrent with the submission to the A/E. The CxA’s review shall be limited to the equipment being commissioned with the commissioning review focused on confirming compliance with the OPR and BoD. The CxA will provide commissioning review comments to the A/E. The CA shall provide final approved copies of the submittals to the CxA for development of project FPTs.


1. The CxA will only review the initial submittal for equipment being commissioned. All re-submittals shall be provided to the CxA, it shall be at the CxA’s discretion to review any additional re-submittals.

C. The CA shall provide final approved copies of the submittals to the CxA for development of project specific commissioning documentation.

D. The CA shall provide the CxA with manufacturer’s installation instructions and start-up procedures, and initial operation and preventative maintenance data including troubleshooting instructions within 30 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process.

E. The CA shall provide the CxA with Sub(s) blank normally used field checkout documents applicable to the project within 30 days of equipment startup for use during the commissioning process.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance within the tolerances specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. Include special tools and instruments (only available from equipment manufacturer, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment in the base bid price to the CA.

C. Contractors shall comply with test equipment manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test equipment immediately after equipment has been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test equipment. Furnish calibration records to the CxA upon request.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COMMISSIONING PROCESS OVERVIEW

A. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the typical commissioning tasks during the construction, acceptance, and post-occupancy phases and the general order in which they occur.

1. Construction-related submittals for all commissioned equipment are provided to the CxA during the normal submittal process.

2. The CxA develops specific equipment PFCs.

3. Early during construction the CxA conducts a kick-off meeting and presents the commissioning process for the project. Additional


meetings with the commissioning team will occur throughout the project.

4. The CxA executes and documents the PFCs. The CxA reports on the PFC process including managing an issues report.

5. PFCs are completed before start-up and functional testing.

6. The CA and responsible Sub-Contractors shall document equipment start-up and initial checkout with assistance from manufacturer’s technicians. The CxA may request copies of the manufacturer’s or contractor’s field start-up reports.

7. The CxA develops specific FPT plans for review by the A/E, CA and responsible Sub-Contractors.

8. The CA and responsible Sub-Contractors complete installation and checkout of all building control systems.

9. Testing, adjusting and balancing of completed HVAC&R systems is completed.

10. The CxA coordinates and executes FPTs with the assistance of responsible Sub-contractors. The CxA reports on the testing process including all observed deficiencies.

11. Testing of other commissioned systems not requiring formal functional testing is completed.

12. The CxA verifies training as required by the Contract Documents is completed.

13. The CxA may review close-out documentation and schedule deferred testing.

14. The CxA submits a final commissioning report.

3.02 COORDINATION

A. The CA shall prepare the overall construction schedule in sufficient detail for the CxA to identify construction milestones important to completing the commissioning process. The CA shall update the schedule as required by other Division 01 specifications and integrate all commissioning activities into the schedule. The CA shall include the CxA on the distribution of revised schedules.

B. Sub-Contractors shall provide sufficient notice to the CA regarding their completion schedule for PFCs and start-up of all equipment and systems. Sub-Contractors shall transmit completed checklists and start-up documentation to the CxA without delay.


C. The CxA will schedule functional tests through the CA and responsible Sub-Contractors only upon completion of all checklists and start-up activities related to the equipment or system.

D. Individual Sub-Contractor’s shall be responsible for notifying the CA if commissioning activities involving a CxA site visit require rescheduling due to insufficient system completion. A Sub-Contractor’s failure to notify the CA or the CA’s failure to notify the CxA five (5) business days in advance of a scheduled CxA site visit shall result in the CxA back-charging the CA for all reasonable travel expenses and lost time.

1. At the direction of the CxA, the CA and responsible Sub-Contractors shall participate in a meeting prior to Functional Testing. The meeting shall be used to verify that all commissioned systems are properly installed and functional, and are ready for functional testing. Any known problems that may impact or prevent functional testing shall be discussed during the meeting. Based on the outcome of the meeting a date to commence functional testing will be determined.

3.03 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. The CxA will prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for systems, subsystems, and equipment described in the Commissioning Plan.

B. The responsible CxA shall perform PFCs on equipment and systems described in the Commissioning Plan.

C. The responsible Sub-Contractors shall have trained technicians available to assist in the execution FPTs and/or coordinate with equipment manufacturers to make available authorized technicians for the same purpose.

D. The CxA will coordinate and execute FPTs.

E. The CxA shall sign off when the PFC forms are complete to provide notice that the equipment is ready for start-up followed by functional testing.

F. Tests shall be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

G. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

H. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.


I. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

J. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the commissioned system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

K. If the Commissioning Plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

L. The CxA and the CA shall sign off when the Functional Performance Testing checklist forms are complete to provide notice that the equipment is ready to be turned over to the Owner.

3.04 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKOUT AND START-UP

A. Scope

1. The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned for this division.

B. Purpose

1. The purpose of the pre-functional checklists is to ensure that the commissioned equipment is properly installed and ready for start-up and initial operation. Each piece of commissioned equipment shall receive complete pre-functional checkout by the CxA, no sampling strategy is allowed. The pre-functional checklist for a given piece of equipment must be successfully completed and approved prior to start-up and functional testing.

2. The primary role of the CxA is to ensure that there is written documentation and that each of the equipment manufacturer’s recommended start-up procedures have been completed. The Sub-Contractor responsible for scheduling start-up shall ensure legible start-up documentation is submitted to the CxA through the CA.

C. Execution

1. The CxA shall complete the pre-functional checklists concurrently with construction.

D. Documentation, Deficiencies and Approval of Tests

1. The Sub-Contractors shall clearly document any outstanding items from the pre-functional checkout and initial startup that were


not completed successfully. The completed documentation shall be submitted, through the CA, to the CxA within five (5) business days of test completion.

2. The CxA will review the startup reports for completeness. The CxA will work with the Sub-Contractors to correct deficiencies or incomplete items involving the CA and others as necessary. The Sub-Contractors shall correct deficiencies or incomplete items in a timely manner, notifying the CA and CxA as soon as the outstanding items have been corrected. The Sub-Contractors shall submit corrected start-up reports.

3.05 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Scope

1. The following procedures apply to all commissioning functional performance testing for all divisions.

B. Purpose

1. The objective of functional performance testing is to demonstrate that each commissioned system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract Documents.

C. Execution

1. Each commissioned system shall be tested through its approved sequence of operation including all specified modes of operation.

2. Before test procedures are written, the CxA will be provided all requested documentation including the most currently approved controls submittals and any device parameters that could impact testing. The CxA will develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper system operation. The CA shall authorize the required Sub-Contractors and equipment manufacturers to provide assistance in developing the test procedures if requested by the CxA.

3. The CxA will submit the test procedures to the Sub-Contractors and equipment manufacturers for review for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection. The CxA will also submit the test procedures to the A/E for confirmation that the functionality matches the design intent. All review comments shall be submitted to the CxA and if necessary the CxA will revise the test procedures per the submitted review comments prior to scheduling functional testing.

a. The time required for the CxA to coordinate and execute any retesting due to a Sub-Contractor’s failure to disclose during this review that test procedures are not feasible


within the context of the control system installed, shall be back-charged on an hourly basis to the CA. Any required retesting shall not be considered justification for a claim of delay or request for time extension by the CA.

4. All training documentation, test reports, O&Ms, and submittals shall be at the jobsite before functional testing commences.

5. The Sub-Contractors shall have trained technicians available to assist in the execution of the functional testing and/or coordinate with equipment manufacturers to make authorized technicians available. The CxA will coordinate and execute the testing and document the testing results.

a. The related commissioning specification sections include sample functional performance tests to inform the CA and Sub-Contractor(s) of the rigor required to complete these documents during acceptance

D. Documentation, Deficiencies and Approval of Tests

1. The CxA will document the results of the functional performance tests using the specific procedural forms developed for that purpose.

2. All deficiencies shall be noted and reported to the CA by the CxA within five (5) business days of test completion. The CxA may recommend corrective actions to deficiencies found, however the burden of responsibility to clear any deficiency is with the CA and A/E.

3. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during testing at the discretion of the CxA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution shall be documented in the functional test plan.

4. As testing progresses and deficiencies are identified, the CxA will discuss the deficiencies with the responsible Sub-Contractor(s).

a. When there is no dispute regarding the deficiency and the Sub-Contractor(s) accepts responsibility to perform the approved corrective action:

1) The CxA documents the deficiency and the Sub-Contractor(s) response and the testing proceeds. At the discretion of the CxA retesting of the corrected deficiency is rescheduled and the test is repeated.

b. If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether a deficiency exists or who is responsible for corrections:


1) The CxA documents the deficiency and the Sub-Contractor(s) response and reports to the CA within five (5) business days.

2) Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with the A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the Owner. The CxA documents the resolution process.

3) The appropriate party performs the approved corrective actions. The CxA reschedules the test and testing is repeated until the deficiency is cleared.

4) Any deficiencies accepted by the Owner as found, or not corrected prior to submission of the final commissioning report, shall be marked as a non-conforming item for the purpose of the final report.

c. The time required for the CxA to coordinate and execute any retesting due to a specific pre-functional checklist or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully completed, but determined during functional testing to be faulty, shall be back-charged on an hourly basis to the CA. Any required retesting shall not be considered justification for a claim of delay or request for time extension by the CA.

d. The CxA notes each accepted functional test on the test plan. Formal approval of the completed functional performance test is contingent on the final review by the CxA and the A/E. The CxA recommends acceptance of each completed test to the Commissioning Team.

3.06 DEFERRED AND SEASONAL TESTING

A. If any pre-functional check or functional performance test cannot be completed due an unforeseen condition not within control of the CA, execution of the pre-functional check or functional test shall be deferred based on the recommendation of the CxA and approval of the Owner. The affected testing shall be completed as soon as practical.

B. During the warranty period tests purposely delayed until weather conditions are closer to the system’s design conditions shall be completed as part of this contract. The CxA will coordinate this activity. Tests shall be executed and documented by the CxA with deficiencies corrected by the appropriate Sub-Contractor(s), with the Owner’s operations staff witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and/or as-built drawings due to the testing shall be made by the CA.


3.07 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

A. The CA shall be responsible for coordination and scheduling of training, and ultimately for ensuring that training is completed in accordance to the Contract Documents.

B. The CxA will verify that the training required by the Contract Documents was completed, but the actual training shall be the responsibility of the Sub-Contractors and/or equipment manufacturers authorized representatives.

3.08 SYSTEMS MANUAL

A. The CxA will coordinate the development of a Systems Manual with the CA. The Systems Manual shall expand upon the more traditional operating and maintenance documentation to include information gathered during the commissioning process. The Systems Manual shall also serve as a training tool to inform those not involved in the design and construction phases of the project. The Systems Manual does not replace the operation and maintenance documentation required by the Contract Documents.

B. The CA shall provide the following information to the CxA.

1. As-built control schematics of each commissioned system.

2. As-built control sequences including final setpoints and including lists of all control points.

3. Final parameters of all peripheral equipment (e.g. final parameters resident in a variable frequency drive).

4. Recommended operating procedures for each piece of primary equipment and instructions for integrated building systems.

5. Recommended schedule of maintenance requirements and frequency, troubleshooting guidelines, and emergency procedures.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 03 10 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this Section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work Included: Furnish labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required in conjunction with design, fabrication and erection of formwork for cast-in-place concrete complete including but not limited to the following:

1. Wood forms. 2. Permanent metal forms. 3. Cardboard carton forms (void boxes). 4. Installation in formwork of items furnished by other trades. 5. Construction joint bulkheads, keys, blockouts, and sleeves.

B. Extent of formwork is indicated by cast-in-place concrete structures shown on Drawings.

C. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:

1. Forms for sitework concrete: Section ____________. 2. Metal floor decking for floor slabs: Section 05 31 13. 3. Sustainable construction for LEED requirements: Section 01 81 13.


A. Latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply, unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between Contract Documents and a referenced standard, Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between Contract Documents and Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.

B. Referenced Standards: American Concrete Institute (ACI); "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork," (ACI 347), and SP-4 "Formwork for Concrete."

C. Design of Forms and Falsework: Forms, shores, reshores, falsework, bracing, and other temporary supports shall be engineered by Contractor to support all imposed construction loads, including weight of construction equipment, allowance for live loads, lateral forces due to wind, and temporary imbalance or discontinuity of building components. Contractor is also responsible for determining when temporary supports and bracing may be safely removed, but in no case shall curing time before form removal be less than specified herein.


D. Construct Formwork to Provide Completed Cast-in-place Concrete Surfaces Complying with Tolerances as Follows:

1. Variations from plumb in lines and surfaces of columns, and walls: 1/4" in any 10'-0" of length, but not more than 1" total for entire height. Exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other conspicuous lines: 1/4" in any 20'-0" of length; 1/2" maximum for entire height.

2. Variations from level or grade in slab soffits, ceilings, and beam soffits, measured before removal of supporting shores: 1/4" in any 10'-0" of length; 3/8" in any 20'-0" of length; and 3/4" maximum for entire length of structure. For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1/4" in any bay or any 20'-0" of length; and 1/2" maximum for entire length of structure.

3. Variations of distance between walls, columns, partitions, and beams: 1/4" per 10'-0" of distance, but not more than 1/2" in any one bay; and not more than 1" total variation.

4. Variation from position of linear building lines, such as slab edges and recess lines, from established position in plans: 1/2" in any one bay, not more than 1" on entire structure.

5. Variation in sizes of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings: Minus 1/4" to plus 1/2". Variation in location: 1/2".

6. Variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and beams and thickness of slabs and walls: Minus 1/4" to plus 1/2".

7. Variation in footing plan dimensions: Minus 1/2" to plus 2"; misplacement or eccentricity: 2% of footing width in direction of misplacement, but not more than 2"; thickness reduction: minus 5% of thickness.

8. Variation in steps in a flight of stairs: 1/8" for risers and 1/4" for treads. 9. Forming irregularities (within a 5 foot distance in any direction):

a. Class A - Architecturally exposed surfaces and exposed surfaces in generally finished spaces: 1/8", either gradual or abrupt.

b. Class B - Surfaces receiving plaster or stucco: 1/4", either gradual or abrupt.

c. Class C - Exposed surfaces in generally unfinished spaces: 1/2", either gradual or abrupt.

d. Class D - Concealed surfaces, unless other tolerances govern: 1", either gradual or abrupt.

10. Checking formwork: a. Before concrete placement check lines and levels of erected

formwork. Make corrections and adjustments to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems.

b. During concrete placement check formwork and related supports to ensure forms are not displaced and completed work will be within specified tolerances.

11. Combined tolerances for formwork, reinforcing fabrication and reinforcing placement shall not permit a reduction in specified concrete cover of reinforcing steel.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data and installation instructions for


proprietary materials used in exposed concrete work including form liners, release agents, manufactured form systems, ties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit for fabrication and erection of forms for concrete surfaces exposed to view. Show general construction of forms including jointing and special formed joints or reveals, location, pattern of form tie placement and other items affecting exposed concrete visually. Include details of inserts and anchorages.

2. Architect’s review will be for general architectural implications and features only. Formwork design for structural stability and sufficiency is Contractor’s responsibility.

C. Submit Duplicate Samples of each of the Following:

1. Corner chamfer strips. 2. 2'-0" square samples of form liners. 3. Form ties for architecturally exposed concrete.

D. Documentation for LEED Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled content. Indicate percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

E. Documentation for LEED Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: For products that are extracted, harvested or recovered and manufactured from within 500 miles of Project. Indicate location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw or recycled material. Include statement indicating costs for each product that is regionally extracted, harvested or recovered and manufactured.

F. Documentation for LEED Credit EQ 4.1 and 4.2: Paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, stains, caulk, firestopping, etc. **((inside the weatherproofing systems and))** applied on site only in this specification must comply with the VOC limits in Section **((01352))**. Include product data sheet or MSDS clearly showing VOC content of product in grams/Liter.

G. LEED 2009 for Healthcare Documentation Submittals: These submittals are to be submitted one time with related submittals and/or if any changes exist during construction.

1. LEED 2009 for Healthcare MRc3: Provide a final summary at the end of construction documenting total pre- and post-consumer recycled content in building materials and total materials sourced (extracted) and manufactured within 500 miles of project site. a. For products with recycled content, provide product data and

certification letter indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content.

b. For products with regionally sourced/manufactured materials, provide Product Data and certification letter indicating cost, and distance from point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to Project


for each raw material and final manufactured product used. c. Provide complete and accurate Material Green Sheets as

appropriate to submittal content with actual values input (including transportation and taxes, excluding installation and labor).

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle form materials in conformance with manufacturers' printed instructions. Store materials subject to damage by elements, under cover and off ground.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate formwork with work of other trades. Give other trades ample lead time for installation of their work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to Compliance with Requirements, Manufacturers Offering Products Which May Be Incorporated in Work Include, but Are Not Limited To, the Following:

1. Laminated column forms:

a. Jefferson Smurfit Corp. b. Sonoco Products Co. c. Consolidated Papers, Inc.

2. Fiberglass column forms: a. Ceco Corp. b. Molded Fiberglass Concrete Forms. c. Symons Corp.

3. Textured form liners: a. Doron Plastics Co. b. Scofield Construction Specialties. c. Scott System. d. Symons Corp.

4. Pan forms: a. Ceco Corp. (steel and plastic). b. Molded Fiberglass Concrete Forms (plastic). c. Symons Corp. (plastic). d. Doron Plastics Co. (plastic). e. Commercial Forms, Inc.

5. Formwork and accessories: a. Burke Co. b. Gates and Sons. c. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. d. Dayton Superior Corp. e. Williams Form Engineering Corp. f. Symons Corp.


6. Cardboard carton forms: VoidForm Products, Inc.

2.02 FORM MATERIALS

A. All products shall be extracted, harvested or recovered and manufactured from within 500 miles of Project. All reinforcing bar and steel components shall contain minimum 95% recycled content, all raw materials shall be manufactured and extracted within 500 miles of Project site and all recycled materials shall be manufactured and recovered within 500 miles of the Project site.

B. All paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, stains, caulk, firestopping, etc. applied on site only in this specification must comply with the VOC limits in Section 01 81 13. In submittal, include product data sheet or MSDS clearly showing VOC content of product in grams/Liter.

C. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood-faced panels or other panel-type materials designed to provide continuous straight and smooth as-cast surfaces. Furnish in largest sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to a regular joint pattern. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of placed concrete without bow or deflection beyond allowable tolerances. Joints shall be made tight and strongly backed so edges of adjoining formwork will remain flush and true. Unsightly joint marks will not be permitted. Form joints shall be vertical or horizontal, unless otherwise noted.

2. Wood forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed of 3/4" thick finish plywood (4'-0" wide by 8'-0" long), complying with U.S. Product Standard PS 1-83, A-C or B-B Concrete Form Panels, Class I, Exterior Type. Panels shall be mill-oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing DFPA inspection trademark. Contractor may use forms built of other materials at his option, with linings of one of the following types: a. Plywood: A-C Grade or better Douglas Fir concrete form, exterior

3 ply, not less than 1/4" thick, having one smooth face and bearing DFPA inspection trademark.

b. Fiberboard: Treated, hard pressed fiberboard having a low degree of water absorptivity, not less than 3/16" thick, with one smooth side.

3. Forms for textured finish concrete: Provide special forming materials to produce surfaces with face design, arrangement, and configuration as shown on drawings or as required to meet Architect's control sample. Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of textured form liners.

4. Rustications and bevels in exposed concrete shown on Drawings shall be formed with steel, polyvinyl chloride or milled and sealed white pine.

5. Cylindrical forms: Form round section members with paper or fiber tubes, fabricated steel forms, or molded fiberglass. a. Paper or fiber tubes shall be constructed of laminated plies, using

water-resistant adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection and plastic lined interior. Units


shall have sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation. Tubes shall be furnished full length without splices. 1) Provide manufacturer's standard plastic-lined interior units. 2) Provide units having "seamless" interior to minimize spiral

gaps or seams. 3) Provide “premium” architectural grade tubes to eliminate

any seam marks. b. Manufactured steel and fiberglass forms shall be of sufficient

thickness to prevent bulges and warps. Butt sections together with bolted or keyed joints. Forms shall be new or reconditioned, free of bends, warps, tears, holes, and dents.

D. Forms for Unexposed Concrete Surfaces:

1. Form with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Use lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

2. Wood forms shall be of No. 2 Common Southern Yellow Pine lumber, 1½" minimum, commercial standard Douglas fir form plywood, or other material of equal qualifications, of sufficient thickness to sustain loads imposed thereon, dressed to uniformly smooth contact surfaces, and constructed to be readily removable.

3. Provide adequate shores in crawlspaces, supported on mud pads seated firmly in the subgrade. Prepare subgrade as required to prevent settlement of formwork.

E. Carton Forms (Void Boxes): Shall be pre-manufactured corrugated paper cartons, as manufactured by VoidForm Products, Inc., Englewood, Co. Exterior surface of void box forms shall be moisture-resistant (wax coated). Forms shall have interior cross walls forming a uniform cellular configuration. Carton forms shall be manufactured from medium wax impregnated paper using waterproof adhesive. Interior liners of corrugated paper shall have no wax.

1. Slabs: Use "Regular" strength "SlabVoid” with interior cell sizes 8" x 8" or smaller, capable of sustaining a working load of 1000 psf, for slabs 12" thick or less. For slabs thicker than 12", a higher working load is required. Contact the structural engineer for requirements.

2. Grade beams and walls: Rectangular or Trapezoidal shape as shown on details. Provide end caps at end of forms and corners. Provide premanufactured curve-ended units, “ArcVoid” or “SureRound PierVoid”, against tops of drilled piers for tight fit. Cartons shall be capable of sustaining a working load of 200 PSF times the height of pour, in feet, without significant deformation.

F. Protection Board: Used over carton forms under slabs and under grade beams or walls wider than 12". Board shall be hot-pressed cellulose fiber hardboard equal to Masonite, 3/16" minimum thickness, furnished in 4'-0" x 8'-0" sheets.

G. Soil Retainers: Precast concrete or hadite squares of sufficient thickness to withstand installation and compaction forces, or “SureRetainer” by Motzblock, VoidForm Products, Inc.


H. Form Ties: Provide factory-fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties designed to break off at least 1" from outer concrete surface, or to be fully removable leaving a hole not larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface.

I. Form Release Agent: Provide a commercially formulated non-toxic, bio-based, bio-degradable release agent that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces; will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. Volatile organic compound (VOC) content shall not exceed 125 g/l.

Acceptable products include: Duogard II by WR Meadows Enviroform by Conspec Bio-Form by Leahy-Wolf Crete-Lease 20-VOC by Cresset Chemical Greenplus by Greenland Soy Form Release and Natural Form Oil by Natural Soy Soysolv Concrete Form Release Agent by SOYsolv

J. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Shall have a nominal 9/64" shank diameter and a 1 1/4" shank length. Acceptable manufacturers are Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, Ok.; Ramset Fastening Systems, East Alton, Ill.; and ITT Phillips Drill Division, Michigan City, Ind.

K. Reglets: Provide sheet metal reglets formed of same type and gauge as flashing metal, unless otherwise indicated. Where resilient or elastomeric sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of not less than 26 gauge galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

L. Penetrations: Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves and blockouts may be formed with galvanized metal, galvanized pipe, PVC pipe, fiber tubes, or wood, sized to hold shape during concrete placement.

2.03 DESIGN OF FORMWORK

A. Design and engineering of formwork, as well as its construction, is responsibility of Contractor. Concrete members shall be adequately shored to safely support all loads and lateral pressures outlined in "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork" (ACI 347) without distortion, excessive deflection or other damage. Necessary forms, centering, shores and molds shall be built to conform to shapes, lines and dimensions of various members of concrete construction, as shown or scheduled on Drawings. They shall be sufficiently tight and so substantially assembled as to prevent bulging, or leakage of cement paste. All forms shall be assembled to facilitate their removal without damage to concrete. Construct forms with such care as to produce concrete surfaces which will not leave unsightly or objectionable form marks in exposed concrete surfaces. Lumber once used as forms shall have all contact surfaces thoroughly cleaned before reuse.


B. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to safely support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Carry vertical and lateral loads to the ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained adequate strength for that purpose.

C. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on formwork, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of structure during construction.

D. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.

E. Fabricate formwork to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required, to prevent leakage and fins.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. General: Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts, and other features required. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes.

B. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, etc., to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal.

C. Support form facing materials by structural members, spaced sufficiently close to prevent deflection. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregularities and within allowable tolerances.

1. Construct forms to cambers shown or specified to allow for structural deflection of hardened concrete.

2. Provide additional elevation or camber in formwork as required for anticipated formwork deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh concrete and construction loads. Make adjustments to allow for closure of form joints, settlement of mud sills, shrinkage of lumber, dead load deflections, and elastic shortening of form members.

3. Carefully inspect falsework and formwork during and after concrete placement operations, to determine abnormal deflection or signs of failure; make necessary adjustments to produce work of required dimension.


D. Form intersecting planes to provide true, clean-cut corners, with edge grain of plywood not exposed as form for concrete.

E. Falsework: Erect, support, brace, and maintain it to safely support vertical, lateral and asymmetrical loads applied until such loads can be supported by in-place concrete structures.

F. Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment, capable of taking up formwork settlement during concrete placing operations, using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof. Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured.

G. Forms for Exposed Concrete: Drill forms from contact face to outside, to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes. Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared holes.

1. Do not use metal cover plates for patching holes or defects in forms. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes without visible edges

or offsets. Back joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections. Form joints shall be vertical and horizontal unless otherwise requested and approved by Architect.

3. Use extra studs, walers, and bracing to prevent bowing of forms between studs and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete. Do not use narrow strips which will produce bow for form material.

4. Assemble forms so they may be readily removed without damage to exposed concrete surfaces.

5. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth-finish materials, and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement.

6. Locate form ties in level horizontal rows, plumbed vertically, and in symmetrical arrangement with openings, unless otherwise noted.

H. Corner Treatment: Form exposed corners of beams, walls and columns to produce chamfered, smooth, solid, unbroken lines, except as otherwise indicated.

1. Form chamfers with 1" X 1" strips, unless otherwise indicated, accurately

formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edge joints. Extend terminal edges to required limit and miter chamfer at changes in direction.

2. Unexposed corners may be formed either square or chamfered.

I. Control Joints: See "Cast-in-place Concrete" Section for treatment of control and construction joints including wood screeds, metal keyways and sawcuts. Locate as indicated.

J. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide sleeves, blockouts, and inserts in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades, including those under separate prime contracts (if any). Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades requiring such items. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into forms. In case of conflict with reinforcing or structural embeds, consult Architect before placing.


K. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before placing concrete. If required to eliminate leaks retighten forms after concrete placement. Where forms are extended for subsequent concrete placement at a construction joint, extended area shall be recleaned and retightened before the next pour. Align and secure extended portion to prevent an offset at joint.

L. Forming Foundation Elements: Sides of all below grade portions of grade beams, pier caps and walls shall be formed straight and to lines and grades detailed. Do not cast sides of foundation elements directly against earth excavation except where specifically permitted by note on Drawings. Backfill as specified after form removal.

3.02 FORM COATINGS

A. Coat form contact surfaces with form release agent before reinforcement is placed. Do not allow excess material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with reinforcement or surfaces which will be bonded to fresh concrete. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coat steel forms, except for corrugated permanent metal forms, with non-staining, rust-preventative release agent or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.

B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs, to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units to support types of screeds required.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF CARTON FORMS (VOID BOXES)

A. Install carton forms in bottom of all grade beam and wall forms, under slabs, around piers, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. Bottoms of concrete members which are supported on piers including walls, pilasters, grade beams and overhanging portions of pier caps shall be separated from the expansive clay by carton forms.

B. Provide end caps at discontinuous ends of void boxes at piers and corners, and tape all joints with reinforced packing tape so concrete will not enter void space during placement of concrete. Butt pre-manufactured carton forms into sides of piers, using special pieces as required, so concrete will not run down between the pier and void box. Do not leave gaps between void box sections. Do not allow any part of carton form to fall within pier circumference causing a reduction in load transfer area.

C. Protect carton forms from rain and on-site seepage. Do not install carton forms


during wet weather or on wet ground. Carton forms which become saturated and weak prior to pouring concrete shall be removed and replaced. Void material must be kept dry prior to placement.

D. Exercise care in placement of concrete to avoid crushing carton forms under dead weight of concrete. Collapsed forms under beams shall be dug out after concrete has cured and a proper void space shall be created by installing precast concrete soil retainers. Collapsed forms under slabs will require removal of affected slab and reconstruction. Submit details of proposed corrective work before proceeding.

E. Subgrade below slab forms must be fine graded to provide a smooth level surface. Use fine select fill material if necessary, but do not use sand or gravel which will create a capillary break and limit moisture access necessary for carton form deterioration. Install slab carton forms side-by-side and end-to-end without gaps for full coverage. Provide specially fitted pre-manufactured units around piers equal to "SureRound Pier Void" by VoidForm Products, Inc., Englewood, Co.

F. Carton forms under slabs shall be protected on top by a layer of protection board under the specified vapor retarder. Take care in grading and placement of forms to provide full minimum thickness of slab called for on Drawings. Do not install carton forms under soil-supported slab-on-grade.

3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Formwork not supporting concrete such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50° F. (10° C.) for 12 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete has hardened sufficiently to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided that curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of conventionally reinforced concrete, such as beam soffits, joist bottoms, and slab forms, shall not be removed until concrete has attained 100% of its specified 28 day compressive strength as established by tests of field cured cylinders. In the absence of cylinder tests, supporting formwork shall remain in place until concrete has cured at a temperature of at least 50° F. for the minimum cumulative time periods given in ACI 347. When temperature of the air surrounding concrete is below 50° F., that time period, in hours or days, shall be added to the minimum listed time periods.

C. Responsibility for obtaining strength tests for purposes of form removal rests solely with Contractor.

D. Forms for two-way conventionally reinforced slabs shall remain in place for at least the minimum cumulative time periods specified for one-way slabs of the same maximum span, however, they shall be immediately reshored. Reshores shall remain in place until two-way slab has attained its full 28-day design strength.

E. Minimum cumulative time periods may be reduced by use of high-early strength cement or forming systems which allow form removal without disturbing shores,


but only after Contractor has conclusively demonstrated, to the satisfaction of Architect, that earlier form removal will not cause excessive sag, creep, distortion nor damage of any kind to member or structure.

F. Observance of the minimum cumulative time periods specified does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for safety of the structure during construction.

G. Forms for post-tensioned concrete shall not be removed before tensioning operation has been completed.

H. Wood forms shall be completely removed from under floors, ramps, steps, and similar places (through temporary openings, if necessary) so that no material will be left to rot or be infested by insects. Exercise care, in removal of any form, to avoid damaging concrete surfaces.

I. Where stripping time is less than specified protective curing time, measures shall be taken to provide adequate curing and thermal protection to the stripped concrete.

J. Areas required to support construction loads in excess of 20 psf shall be reshored as necessary to properly distribute loads. Construction loads up to the rated live load capacity may be placed on unshored concrete construction once concrete has attained its 28-day design strength.

3.06 REUSE OF FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form release agent to concrete contact surfaces as specified for new formwork.

B. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect.

C. Replace damaged pan forms. Pan forms used for exposed surfaces shall be free of dents, warps, and kinks, and shall nest tightly to produce straight and true surfaces.

3.07 CLEANUP

A. Clean up all debris caused by the work of this Section, keeping the area clean and neat at all times.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 03 10 01 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CONCRETE FORMWORK

SECTION 03 10 01 - CONCRETE FORMWORK (CIVIL SITEWORK)

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for designing, providing and installing

concrete forms for any concrete structure (including curb and gutter, inlets, sidewalk and driveways) required to complete the project. With the exception of slabs, flatwork, and curb and gutter, concrete form work systems shall be designed for a minimum rate of concrete placement in the forms of ten (10) vertical feet per hour.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FORMS A. Form lumber shall be seasoned, of good quality, free from loose or unsound knots, knot holes,

twists, shakes, decay or other imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. Lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be surfaced on at least one side and two edges. All exposed concrete edges shall be chamfered. Molding used for chamfer strips shall be of redwood, cypress or pine of quality that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to true lines. Chamfer strips to predetermined elevations just prior to placing final lift.

2.02 STEEL FORMS A. Metal forms shall provide a smooth straight surface and shall line up properly. Rivets and bolt

heads in contact with concrete will be countersunk, level with surrounding surface. Metal surfaces in contact with concrete will be free from rust, paint or other foreign material that will disfigure or discolor concrete. Mount chamfer strip by Engineer approved methods and maintain as to grade and alignment.

2.03 FORM LINING A. Surfaces to be given a rubbed finish are to have form surfaces or form lining surfaces free of

irregularities. Lining is to be of plywood made with waterproof adhesive, of 1/4 inch minimum thickness, preferably oiled at the mill and then re-oiled or lacquered on the job before using. An alternate to the plywood lining is tempered masonite concrete form presswood having a minimum 3/16 inch thickness. Keep presswood moist at least 12 hours before applying to sheathing. Use smooth hard face as concrete contact surface. Facing may be constructed of 3/4 inch plywood made with waterproof adhesive, backed by adequate studs and wales; and, in this case, form lining will not be required. Carefully align edges and faces of adjacent panels.

2.04 FORM TIES A. Form ties shall be threaded rod or coil tie type designed and of such length to provide a cone

shaped formed "setback" of 3/4" on each wall face. After removal of forms, the cone shaped void shall be grouted. All form ties shall incorporate a waterstop manufactured as an integral feature of the tie. Form ties shall be part of the form system design and shall be adequate for all aspects of said system including a minimum rate of concrete placement in the forms of ten (10) vertical feet per hour. The use of wire ties, "snap ties" or similar products will not be permitted, except that Engineer will consider Contractor proposals to utilize such products on a case by case basis. Temporary form spreaders will be removed as concrete is placed. Engineer will consider details of permanent form spreaders that Contractor may propose to use.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FALSEWORK

A. Falsework shall be of rigid construction to prevent excessive settlement or deformation under imposed loading and to insure the safety of the workmen and the structure. Only sound timber shall be used for falsework. Falsework shall be designed using 150 pounds per square foot of horizontal surface of form.

3.02 FORMS - GENERAL A. Forms are to be constructed and placed in such a manner as to insure mortar tightness,

rigidity to prevent excessive settlement or deformation under imposed loading and to insure the safety of the workmen and the structure. Forms shall be constructed in such a manner as to allow cleanout before placing of concrete; adequate access by tremies and vibrators; and removal without damage to concrete. Adequate cleanout openings shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. If excessive settlement or deformation occur, remove the concrete and steel, reset forms, replace the steel and pour fresh concrete. If existing steel is to be reused, Section 03 20 01 Concrete Reinforcement (2.6) must be met.

3.03 FORMS - CURB AND GUTTER, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS A. Form shall be straight durable and have a depth equal to the required concrete depth; they

shall be securely staked to line and grade in such manner that there will be no movement when the concrete is placed.

3.04 FORMS - DESIGN A. Forms shall be designed for a fluid pressure of 150 pounds per cubic foot and a live load of 50

pounds per square foot on horizontal surfaces with maximum unit stress of 125% of allowable stresses.

3.05 OILING FORMS A. All surfaces of forms that will be in contact with concrete will be treated with an approved form

oil before concrete is placed. The Contractor shall apply form oil in such a manner so as to insure that no excess oil accumulates on the reinforcing or previously placed concrete. Immediately prior to placing concrete, the Contractor shall wet forms which will come in contact with concrete.

3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS FROM SURFACES TO BE RUBBED A. Forms shall be removed when concrete has attained adequate strength to prevent damage

and only as rapidly as rubbing operation progresses. Forms left in place longer than 24 hours will be rewet to keep moist.

3.07 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND FALSEWORK FROM SURFACES NOT TO BE RUBBED A. Forms and falsework shall be removed after concrete has aged the following number of curing

days. a. Slabs, Beams, or Girders - 7 curing days. b. Walls, Columns and Piers - 2 curing days.

3.08 SETTING FORMS OR FALSEWORK ON SUBSTRUCTURES A. Forms or falsework shall not be erected on a concrete structure until the concrete in the

substructure has cured at least four curing days.

3.09 SETTING FORMS OR FALSEWORK ON FOOTINGS A. Forms or falsework shall not be erected on a concrete footing until the concrete in the footing

has cured at least 3 curing days.


3.10 CURING DAY A. A curing day is any calendar day on which the temperature near the structure is above 50

degree F for at least 19 hours.

END OF SECTION 03 10 01

American Electric Power 03 20 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CONC. REINF. AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCING AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this Section.


A. Work Included: Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with the fabrication, delivery and placement of reinforcement and embedded metal assemblies for cast-in-place concrete, including bars, welded wire fabric, ties and supports.

B. Extent of reinforcement and embedded metal assemblies for cast-in-place concrete is shown on Drawings and in schedules.

C. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:

1. Testing laboratory services: Section 01 45 29. 2. Reinforcement in conjunction with drilled piers: Section 31 63 29. 3. Reinforcement in conjunction with sitework concrete: Section

__________. 4. Reinforcement in conjunction with masonry: Section __________. 5. Sustainable construction for LEED requirements: Section 01 81 13.


A. Latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply, unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between Contract Documents and a referenced standard, Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between Contract Documents and Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.

B. Testing Laboratory Services: Refer to Section 01 45 29.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following Codes, Specifications and Standards, except as otherwise indicated:

1. American Welding Society, AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code -

Reinforcing Steel." 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice." 3. American Concrete Institute, ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for

Structural Concrete." 4. AISC, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," including the


"Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. 5. American Welding Society, AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code - Steel." 6. "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement," ACI 315.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' product data, Specifications, and installation instructions for proprietary materials and reinforcement accessories.

B. Mill Certificates: Submit, for Architect's record, steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile and bend tests for reinforcing steel.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66, "ACI Detailing Manual." Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements, and assemblies, as required for fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement.

2. Shop fabricator shall reproduce bar bending diagrams, beam, slab and joist notes, and cast-in-place concrete notes that concern proper placing of reinforcement and submit same with each set of shop drawings for field use. Use same bar marks indicated on bar bending diagrams as shown in beam, joist, and slab schedules.

3. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and placement of embedded metal assemblies and concrete accessories not completely described in product data information. Use standard AWS welding symbols.



F. Documentation for LEED Credit EQ 4.1 and 4.2: Paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, stains, caulk, firestopping, etc. **((inside the weatherproofing systems and))** applied on site only in this specification must comply with the VOC limits in Section **((01352))**. Include product data sheet or MSDS clearly showing VOC content of product in grams/Liter.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver reinforcement and embedded metal assemblies to project site bundled, tagged, and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar sizes, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams.


B. Store concrete reinforcement materials and embedded metal assemblies at site in such a manner as to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or excessive rust.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate delivery and installation of reinforcement and embedded metal assemblies with work of other trades.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL



2.02 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, "Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement." Use grades as indicated on Drawings.

B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767, "Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement."

C. Reinforcing Bars to Be Welded: ASTM A 706,”Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement."

D. Bar and Rod Mats: ASTM A 184, "Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement."

E. Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064, "Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement."

F. Deformed Wire: ASTM A 1064, "Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement."

G. Welded Smooth Wire Fabric: ASTM A 1064, "Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete." Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls, except that No. 10 gauge (W1.4) and smaller wire may be rolled.

H. Column Spirals: Plain, cold-drawn wire, ASTM A 1064, or hot-rolled rods for spirals, ASTM A 615.

I. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place.


1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations,

unless otherwise indicated. Do not use wood, brick, and other unacceptable materials.

2. For slabs-on-grade, use precast concrete blocks or wire supports with sand plates or horizontal runners which will not sink into subgrade or puncture vapor retarder.

3. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with plastic protected legs (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected legs (CRSI, Class 2).

4. For abrasive-blasted or bush-hammered concrete provide plastic protected bar supports (CRSI, Class 1).

5. Over waterproof membranes use precast concrete block bar supports to prevent penetration of membrane.

2.03 METAL ANCHORAGE AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Shapes and Plates: Conform to ASTM A 36, "Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel."

B. Headed Stud Anchors: Headed studs welded by full-fusion process, as furnished by TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division.

C. Bolts: Conform to ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength." Furnish with carbon steel washers.

D. Anchor Bolts (Anchor Rods): For anchoring the structural frame, refer to frame section. For anchoring other materials and equipment, refer to trade requiring them for material properties. Sizes as indicated.

E. Welding Electrodes: AWS 5.5, Series E70.

F. Welded Deformed Bar Anchors: Welded by full-fusion process, as furnished by TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division.

G. Reinforcing Bars to be Welded: ASTM A 706.

H. All metal assemblies exposed to earth, weather or moisture shall be hot-dip galvanized. All other metal assemblies shall be either hot-dip galvanized or exposed surfaces shall be field painted with specified epoxy coating after completing any welds.

2.04 INSERTS

A. Provide metal inserts, for anchorage of materials or equipment to concrete construction, not supplied by other trades and as required for work.

1. In vertical concrete faces, to transfer direct shear loads only, provide adjustable wedge inserts of malleable cast iron, complete with bolts, nuts, and washers; 3/4" bolt size, unless otherwise indicated.

2. In horizontal concrete faces and whenever tension forces are applied, provide threaded inserts of malleable cast iron, furnished complete with


full-depth bolts; 3/4" bolt size, unless otherwise indicated.

2.05 MECHANICAL SPLICES

A. Provide mechanical splices designed to develop, both in tension and compression, 125% of minimum ASTM specified yield strength of the smaller bar being coupled, as evidenced by published ICC-ES test reports. The Following Bar Splicing Systems Are Acceptable:

Erico "Cadweld C-Series" or "Lenton” Splice Sleeves Dayton/Richmond “Bar-Grip”, “Grip-Twist” or “Bar-Lock” Systems Bar Splice Products, Inc., “Zap Screwlok”

2.06 DOWEL BAR ANCHORS

A. Provide dowel bar anchors and threaded dowels designed to develop, both in tension and compression, 125% of the minimum ASTM specified yield strength of the dowel bars, as evidenced by published ICC-ES test reports. Unless otherwise indicated, anchors shall be furnished with ACI standard 90 degree hooks. Dowels shall be furnished by anchor supplier. The following dowel splicing systems are acceptable:

Richmond Screw Anchor "Dowel Bar Splicer." Erico "Lenton Form Saver." Dayton Barsplice "Grip-Twist."

2.07 COATINGS

A. Epoxy coating for metal assemblies shall be "Hi-Build Epoxoline II," by Tnemec Co., Kansas City, MO., applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Coating shall qualify as low VOC material under LEED 2009 for Healthcare requirements.

B. Field repair of epoxy coating shall be done using paint specified above.

C. Hot-dip galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 123, "Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products."

D. Field repair of galvanizing shall be done with "ZRC Zero VOC Cold Galvanizing Compound," by ZRC Chemical Products Co., Marshfield, MA. Coating shall qualify as low VOC material under LEED 2009 for Healthcare requirements.

2.08 FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Fabricate reinforcing bars to required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." Combined tolerances for formwork, reinforcing fabrication, and reinforcing placement shall not permit a reduction in specified concrete cover of reinforcing steel. In case of fabricating errors, do not re-bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken material.

B. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in work:


1. Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified tolerances. 2. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings. 3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause.

2.09 FABRICATION OF METAL ACCESSORIES AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel items in the shop. Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately. Holes shall be cut, drilled, or punched at right angles to the surface of metal and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges. Welded construction shall conform to AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," and AWS D1.1. Welding shall be done by AWS certified welders.

B. Welding of deformed bar anchors and headed stud anchors shall be done by full-fusion process equal to that of TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division or KSM Welding Services Division, Omark, Ind. A minimum of 2 headed studs shall be tested at start of each production period for proper quality control. Studs shall be capable of being bent 45 degrees without weld failure.

C. Welding of reinforcement shall be done in strict accordance with AWS requirements, using recommended preheat temperature and electrode for type of reinforcement being welded. Bars larger than No. 9 shall not be welded. Welding shall be performed subject to the observance and testing of testing laboratory.

D. Coatings, where required, shall be applied after fabrication and prior to casting concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Installer shall inspect excavations, fills, vapor retarders, forms, and any other items of related construction upon which proper installation of reinforcement is dependent and report any unsatisfactory conditions to Contractor.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports.

B. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Before casting, accurately position, support, and secure all reinforcement against displacement caused by workmen, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. Do not "stab in" dowels after casting concrete.


1. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16 gauge wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces.

2. Hold bars in beams and slabs in exact locations during placing of concrete within following tolerances: a. Top and bottom bars in slabs, girders, beams and joists:

1) Members 8" deep or less: + 3/8". 2) Members more than 8" deep: + ½".

b. Lengthwise of members: + 2". c. Concrete cover to formed or finished surfaces: + 3/8" for members

8" deep or less; + ½" for members over 8" deep; except tolerance for cover shall not exceed 1/3 of the specified cover.

d. Combined tolerances for formwork, reinforcing fabrication, and reinforcing placement shall not permit a reduction in specified concrete cover of reinforcing steel.

3. Do not place bar support against exposed faces of precast beams, columns, walls, or copings.

4. Tie wire shall be bent away from exposed surfaces so it is never closer to surface than specified cover.

5. Minimum concrete cover for reinforcing steel shall be as shown on the Drawings.

D. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least two full wire spacings and lace splices with 16 gauge wire. Laps shall be measured from the last cross-wire of each piece, not from the ends of the wires. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps.

E. Provide adequate numbers of supports having sufficient strength to carry reinforcement. Do not place reinforcement bars more than 2" beyond last leg of any continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.

F. Splices: Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tightly wire tying. Comply with requirements of ACI 318, for minimum lap of spliced bars. Bars No. 14 and larger shall not be lap spliced.

G. Use mechanical splices for splicing of bars larger than No. 11, or where No. 11 bars are spliced to larger size bars, and elsewhere as shown. Comply with manufacturer's directions for preparation of bars and installation procedures.

H. Welding of Reinforcing Steel: Comply with requirements of AWS D1.4, for field welding. Prior to field welding, determine weldability of reinforcing bars by laboratory chemical analysis of steel. Only steel conforming to ASTM A 706 may be welded.

I. Field Welding of Embedded Metal Assemblies: All paint and galvanizing shall be removed, in areas to receive field welds, prior to making welds. All areas where paint or galvanizing has been removed or damaged shall be field repaired with


two coats of specified field coating.

3.03 CLEANUP

A. Clean up all debris caused by work of this Section, keeping the area clean and neat at all times.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 03 20 01 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

SECTION 03 20 01 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT (CIVIL SITEWORK)

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specifications shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing reinforcing steel, bar

supports, welding, tools, supplies, equipment and services, and placing of concrete reinforcement of the shape and dimensions shown on the contract drawings, and as called for by these specifications required to complete the project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING STEEL A. All reinforcing bars, except column, shall be deformed as defined in ASTM Specifications. All

reinforcing bars, unless noted on the structural drawings, shall be Grade 60 as defined by the American Society for Testing and Materials. "Specifications for Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (A615 A616 or A617). Spiral reinforcing steel shall be fabricated from cold drawn with (ASTM A82) or hot rolled plain or deformed bars conforming to ASTM A625, Grade 60. Welded smooth wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185 "Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" (ACI 318-71 limits the wire spacing to 12 inches maximum). Welded deformed wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A497 "Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" (ACI 318-71 limits the wire spacing to 16 inches max.).

2.02 TIE WIRE A. The tie wire used shall be black annealed wire, 16 gauge or heavier.

2.03 REINFORCING BAR SUPPORTS A. Bar supports shall conform to the "Bar Supports Specifications" contained in "Manual of

Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. The Contractor shall provide such accessories as plastic spacers, plastic bar supports (chairs), and other approved devices necessary for proper assembly, spacing and supporting the reinforcing steel.

2.04 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. All accessories for reinforcement spacing and support shall be the size and type to accurately

conform to the required spacing and concrete clear cover as shown on Construction Drawings.

2.05 MILL CERTIFICATES A. Two certified copies of mill tests on each grade of reinforcing steel delivered showing physical

and chemical analysis shall be provided, upon request, at the time of shipment.

2.06 SURFACE CONDITION A. Metal reinforcement at the time concrete is placed shall be free from mud, oil, or other

non-metallic coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity. Metal reinforcement, except pre-stressing steel, with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both shall be considered as satisfactory, provided the minimum dimensions, including height of deformations and weight of a hand wire brushed test specimen, are not less than the applicable ASTM specification requirements.

2.07 REINFORCING STEEL OF FOREIGN MANUFACTURER A. No reinforcing steel of foreign manufacture shall be allowed on the project site. Any foreign

steel accidentally delivered to the project site must be removed immediately.

American Electric Power 03 20 01 - 2 Corpus Christi Service Center CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. The Contractor shall store all reinforcement above the surface of the ground on platforms,

skids or other suitable supports.

3.02 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall protect all reinforcement from mechanical injury, from surface

deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust, and from non-metallic coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity.

3.03 STANDARD PRACTICE A. All requirements of concrete reinforcement not covered in these specifications or on the

structural drawings shall be in accordance with "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. All hooks shall conform to bend dimensions defined as "ACI Standard Hooks" in "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, unless otherwise shown on the structural drawings. All reinforcing bars shall be bent cold. Reinforcing bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. Reinforcing bars shall conform accurately to the dimensions shown on the structural drawings and within the fabricating tolerances shown in "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.

3.04 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL A. The placement of bars should conform to the recommended practices in "Placing Reinforcing

Bars", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. Bars should be securely tied to prevent displacement during the concreting operation and all dowels must be wired in place before depositing concrete. All splicing of bars, concrete cover, placing tolerances and bar spacing shall conform to "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI318), as published by the American Concrete Institute, and to recommended practices in "Reinforcing Bar Splices" by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. All reinforcing steel splices shall be Class C, unless shown otherwise on the drawings.

3.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall furnish 6 copies of the placing drawings and bar lists in accordance with

the latest revision of "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Concrete Structures" (ACI315), as published by the American Concrete Institute. Reinforcing steel shall not be fabricated until shop drawings have been approved by the Engineer.


American Electric Power 03 30 02 - 1 Corpus Chrsiti Service Center NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 30 02 – NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATE CONCRETE (CIVIL SITEWORK)

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for providing all Portland Cement

Concrete with normal weight coarse aggregate required to complete the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT A. Portland Cement shall conform to ASTM I-150 and shall be Type I. Other types of cement

shall be used only when approved by the Engineer. 2.02 WATER A. Water shall be reasonably clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acid, salt, alkali,

organic matter or other deleterious substances. Questionable water shall be tested by a testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C-94. The cost of testing will be borne by the Contractor. Potable water need not be tested.

2.03 FINE AGGREGATE A. Fine Aggregate shall consist of natural sand, or sand prepared from product obtained by

crushing stone or gravel. Sampling of fine aggregate shall be in conformance with ASTM D-75. Sieve analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM C-136.

Fine aggregate shall conform to the following grading requirements: Retained on 3/8" screen .............................................................. 0.0% Retained on 1/4" screen ......................................................... 0 to 5.0% Retained on 20 mesh sieve ........................................................ 15 to 50.0% Retained on 100 mesh sieve ...................................................... 85 to 100.0% Deleterious substances shall not be present in excess of following percentage by weight. Material removed by decantation ................................................ 3.0% Clay Lumps ................................................................................. 0.5% Other substances such as coal, shale and friable particles ........ 2.0% Fine aggregate shall be of such quality that when made into mortar and tested in

accordance with ASTM C-87 the mortar shall develop a compressive strength at 7 days and 28 days of not less than 95 percent of that developed by the mortar specified as the basis for comparison. Sand shall not contain organic impurities in amounts that, when the sand is tested in accordance with ASTM C-40, would cause it to show a color darker than the standard color. Fine aggregate shall have a fineness modulus conforming to the following:

All strength concrete .................................................................. not less than 2.0 2,000 psi concrete and less ....................................................... not more than 3.25 2,500 psi concrete and greater .................................................. not more than 3.50 The fineness modulus shall be determined by adding total percentages retained on the

following U.S. Standard sieves and dividing by 100: 3 in., 1-1/2 in., No. 4, No. 8, No. 16, No. 30, No. 50 and No. 100. 2.04 NORMAL WEIGHT COARSE AGGREGATE

A. Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone or gravel. Sampling of coarse aggregate shall be in conformance with ASTM D-75. Sieve analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM C-136. Coarse aggregate shall conform to the following grading requirements:


Retained on 2" screen ................................................................. 0.0% Retained on 1-1/2" screen .......................................................... 0 to 5.0% Retained on 3/4" screen ............................................................. 25 to 60.0% Retained on 1/4" screen ............................................................. 95 to 100.0%

Deleterious substances shall not be present in excess of following percentages by weight: Material removed by decantation ........................................................... 1.00% Shale or slate ......................................................................................... 1.00% Clay lumps ............................................................................................. 0.25% Soft fragments ........................................................................................ 3.00%

Sum of all deleterious ingredients, exclusive of material removed by decantation, shall not exceed 4% by weight.

Coarse aggregate shall not exceed the following: Soundness test (Sodium sulfate) weighted average loss at 5 cycles .... 15.0% Absorption test ....................................................................................... 3.0%

Coarse aggregate shall not have a wear equivalent of more than 40 when tested for abrasion in conformance with ASTM C-131.

2.05 RETARDER-DENSIFIER A. When a retarder-densifier is required it shall be Sika's "Plastiment", Sonneborn's "Sonotar"

or an approved equal. Mixing shall be done in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2.06 AIR-ENTRAINMENT AGENT A. The use of air-entrainment admixture is required for all concrete. Air-entrainment shall be at

least 3% but shall not exceed 5%. Mixing shall be done in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendation. ASTM C-138, C-173 or C-231 shall govern.

2.07 WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE A. A high range water reducing admixture shall be used on all vertical concrete pours (such as

walls) and a mid-range reducing admixture shall be used for all horizontal flatwork. A high range water reducing admixture shall meet the requirements for ASTM C494, Type G. Water reducing dosage rates shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Maximum slump prior to addition of the high range water reducer shall be 2”. Slump after addition of the high range water reducer will be 4” minimum to 8” maximum. Approved high range water reducing admixtures include Daracem 100 manufactured by W. R. Grace or Rheobuild 1000 manufactured by Masterbuilders. Mid-range water reducing admixtures shall also be manufactured by W. R. Grace, Masterbuilders or approved equivalent.

2.08 FLY ASH A. Fly ash may be used if the following criteria are met: a. Meets the requirements of ASTM C618, Class F. b. Provide a Certificate of Compliance for the fly ash. c. Mix design shall not contain more than 25% by mass of the cementitious material.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE A. It is the intent of this specification to obtain concrete of a homogeneous structure that will be

of such consistency and composition that it can be worked readily into corners and angles of forms and around the reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on the surface. The concrete when it hardens will have a resistance to weathering and the required compressive strength. The general requirements for different compressive strength concrete are as follows:


Max Allowable Min. Cement Min. 28-day Water-Cement Content Content-Sacks Compressive Gal. per sack per Slump Strength of Cement* Cubic Yard Range 1500 psi (Class E) 10.5 3.0 2"-6" Seal Slab (Class D) 4.0 6"-8" 2000 psi (Class C) 7.5 4.0 2"-5" 2500 psi (Class B) 6.75 4.5 2"-5" 3000 psi (Class A) 6.25 5.25 2"-5" 4000 psi (Class 2-A) 5.0 6.5 2"-5" 5000 psi (Class 3-A) 4.0 7.0 2"-5"

* Maximum water/cement ratio for watertight structures shall be less than or equal to 0.35. For non-watertight structures, the maximum water/cement ratio shall be less than or equal to 0.45. Maximum allowable net water content will be the amount added to the mixer, plus free

water in the aggregate based on the thirty minute absorption period. No allowanced will be made for evaporation of water after batching.

3.02 MIX DESIGN A. General It is the intent of these specifications that the Contractor is responsible for providing a mix

design that will produce a concrete meeting the requirements of this specification. B. Mix Design Report The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval six (6) copies of a mix design

prepared by a reputable testing laboratory. The cost of the mix design shall be as set out in 00 31 32.16 - Sitework Laboratory Testing Schedule. The mix design shall include mix proportions, water cement ratio, slump and workability characteristics required to produce the specified compressive strength concrete. The mix design shall be established by making, curing and testing a minimum of 5 standard size test cylinders for each strength concrete. Cylinders shall be made, cured and tested in conformance with ASTM C-192 and C-39. The mix design does not have to be prepared especially for this project, but it must apply to the materials being furnished. The mix design must be delivered to the Engineer four (4) days prior to the first pour. The Contractor shall have written notice from the Engineer approving the mix design before placing any concrete. If, during progress of the work, it is found impossible to secure concrete of required workability and strength with material being furnished by Contractor, the Engineer may order such changes as may be necessary to secure desired properties, subject to limiting requirements shown in Paragraph 3.01. Any changes so ordered shall be made at the Contractor's expense, and no extra compensation will be allowed by reason of such change.

3.03 CONSISTENCY A. General The quantity of water to be used shall be determined by the Engineer and shall be such as

to give a mixture containing the minimum of water consistent with the required workability. The quantity of water shall be varied only by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a concrete that has a consistency that conforms to the following:

a. The mortar will cling to the coarse aggregate. b. The concrete is not sufficiently fluid to segregate to the place of deposit. c. The concrete, when dropped directly from the discharge chute of the mixer, will flatten

out at the center of the pile, but the edged of the pile will stand up and not flow. d. The mortar will show no free water when removed from the mixer.


e. The concrete will settle into place when deposited in the forms; and when transported in metal chutes at an angle of 30 degrees with the horizontal, it will slide and not flow into place.

f. The surface of the finished concrete will be free from laitance or a surface film of free water.

B. Concrete Failing To Meet Consistency Requirements Any concrete mix failing to meet the above outlined consistency requirements, although

meeting the slump requirements, will be considered unsatisfactory; and the mix shall be changed to correct such unsatisfactory conditions. The slump test will be made by the Engineer in accordance with the methods outlined in ASTM C-143.

3.04 MIXING A. General The Contractor shall procure concrete from a "transit-mixed" concrete plant. Aggregates

shall be proportioned by weight unless a satisfactory volumetric method of measurement is approved by the Engineer. The use of fractional sacks of cement will not be permitted unless the cement is proportioned by weight. Water shall be measured by an accurate measuring device which can be adjusted to compensate for variations in the free moisture content of the aggregate. The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use, and any concrete which is not in place within one hour after start to mixing shall not be used unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. In threatening weather, which in the opinion of the Engineer may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures to be used, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall or damage due to freezing temperatures. In case it is necessary to continue mixing operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall provide protective covering for the material stockpiles as well as for the concrete being placed. The covering for aggregate stockpiles will be required only to the extent as may be necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregate so that adequate control of the consistency of the concrete mix may be maintained. No concrete shall be mixed without the approval of the Engineer when the air temperature is at or below 40°F. (taken in the shade away from artificial heat) and falling. If authorized for concrete placement during cold weather, the concrete will be placed in accordance with the PCA "Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures". The maximum temperature of cast-in-place concrete (Type I, Portland Cement and Type K, Shrinkage Compensating Cement) shall not exceed 98°F. If adjustments of the mixture for temperature control are required, then the procedure for hot-weather mixing, placing and curing shall be in accordance with ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.

B. "Transit-Mixed" Concrete The mixing and the transporting operations shall conform with ASTM C-94. Mixing water

shall not be added after a truck has left the plant except by permission of the Engineer or his representative. No concrete shall be used in the work which has been held longer than 1 hour in a mixer truck, unless approved by the Engineer. If dry batched to the job site, the batching plant operations shall conform with ASTM C-94. Transportation of the dry materials shall be performed in such a manner as to prevent loss, segregation or contamination of ingredients.


3.05 LABORATORY TESTING OF CONCRETE A. Moisture content check will be made at sufficient intervals to maintain accurate batching and

proportioning. All sampling will be done in accordance with ASTM sampling and testing procedures. See Section 00 31 32.16 Sitework Laboratory Testing Schedule for test cylinder requirements. A set of test cylinders shall consist of 3 test cylinders. One cylinder shall be tested for strength at the age of 7 days, one cylinder at the age of 28 days, and one cylinder shall be held in reserve to be tested for strength when directed by the Engineer. The cylinders shall be made and cured in conformance with ASTM C-192. Curing facilities shall be provided in accordance with ASTM C-31. Cylinders shall be tested in conformance with ASTM C-39. Air content shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C173. Slump tested in accordance with ASTM C143.

3.06 FAILURES TO MEET STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS A. Should the strength shown by the test specimens made and tested fall below the values

required, the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions, or to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens which failed. If additional curing does not give the strength required, the Contractor will be responsible for removal and replacement of those portions which fail to develop required strength. Specimens will be considered to have failed when average strength for any period of placing is less than values indicated in the following table:

No. Days Consecutive Percent Placing of Any One Class of Strength Of Concrete Specified 1 ................................................................. 85 2 ................................................................. 95 3 ................................................................. 95 5 or more ................................................................. 100 B. When additional curing of portions of the structure is ordered by the Engineer, it shall be

done at Contractor's expense and no claim for extra compensation for such additional curing shall be allowed. In no case shall the Contractor be required to provide such additional curing beyond a total of 21 days, except where average strengths of specimens, representing concrete placed on any three consecutive days, fall below 80% of the value specified in Part 3 “Proportioning of Concrete”. In this case, curing shall be contained until cores drilled from portions of the structure involved show an average strength equal to that specified in Part 3 “Proportioning of Concrete”. Cores shall have diameter of approximately three times the maximum size of aggregate and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-42.

3.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Cement shall be stored off the ground in a well-ventilated, weatherproof building. Aggregate

shall be stored in a manner that will prevent the mixing of foreign materials and in a manner to prevent segregation of the aggregate.

3.08 MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS A. The measurement of materials, except water, used in the batches of concrete shall be by

weight. The different grades of aggregate shall be weighed separately. Cement may be measured by the bag. Water may be measured by volume. Allowance will be made for water content where moist aggregates are used.


American Electric Power 03 30 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Work Included: Furnish all materials, equipment, transportation and facilities, and perform all labor necessary for the following:

1. Furnishing and placing cast-in-place concrete. 2. Grouting structural steel. 3. Grouting precast concrete connections. 4. Finishing and curing of concrete. 5. Furnish concrete for drilled piers. 6. Concrete mix designs. 7. Vapor retarder.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Paving, curbs, gutters, and sidewalks. 2. Reinforcing steel: Section 03 20 00. 3. Precast Concrete Tilt-up Panels: Section 03 47 13. 4. Concrete formwork: Section 03 10 00. 5. Placing of pier concrete: Section 31 63 29. 6. Laboratory testing and inspection: Section 01 45 29. 7. Sustainable construction for LEED requirements: Section 01 81 13.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Mix Designs:

1. Submit two copies of each proposed concrete mix, prepared in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5, to Owner’s testing agency. Each mix design shall include the following information: a. Class of concrete and location. b. Specified design strength (f’c). c. Proportions of cementitious materials, fine and coarse aggregates,

and water. d. Maximum water/cement ratio, maximum slump, and air content. e. Type and source of cement and other cementitious materials.

Submittal shall include a statement from the cement supplier certifying that no hazardous waste materials are used in the fuel


mix or raw materials for production of cement. f. Type and source of fly ash, if permitted. g. Types and sources of aggregates, and maximum size. h. Air dry density and splitting tensile strength for lightweight

concrete, determined in accordance with ASTM C 330. i. Type and dosage of all admixtures. j. Type, color, and dosage of integral coloring compounds, where

applicable. k. Special requirements for pumping. l. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which the design

is valid. m. Maximum elapsed time before discharge after introduction of

water and cement. n. Maximum and minimum permissible concrete temperatures at

time of placement. o. Any special characteristics of the mix which require precautions in

mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product specified.

2. Each mix design shall be accompanied by one of the following prepared in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5((Chapter 26 in ACI 318-14)): a. Complete standard deviation analysis based on a suitable record

of field tests on a similar mix produced by the plant within the past 12 months and spanning a period of at least 60 calendar days.

b. Documentation for required average compressive strength (f’cr) based on ACI 318 Table 5.3.2.2((ACI 301, Table 4.2.3.3.c – for projects governed by ACI 318-14)), where an adequate record of strength tests is unavailable. Documentation shall consist of field test data or confirmation cylinders from three trial batches prepared by an independent testing laboratory.

3. If mix designs comply with Drawings and Specifications, testing laboratory will submit a letter to the Architect certifying compliance. Mix designs not complying with Drawings and Specifications will be returned by testing laboratory as unacceptable. See Section 01 45 29.

4. Contractor shall forward a copy of the approved mix design and approval letter for the files of the Architect and Engineer.

B. Submit Manufacturer's Data Showing Compliance with Specifications for the Following Products:

1. Curing compounds. 2. Sealer. 3. Non-shrink grout. 4. Waterstop. 5. Floor hardener. 6. Integral coloring compound. 7. Retarder. 8. Samples of fine and coarse aggregates for architectural concrete. 9. Colored cement.

C. Construction Joints: Submit a diagram of proposed construction joints other than those indicated on Drawings.




F. Documentation for LEED Credit EQ 4.1 and 4.2: Paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, stains, caulk, firestopping, etc. ((inside the weatherproofing systems and)) applied on site only in this specification must comply with the VOC limits in Section ((01352)). Include product data sheet or MSDS clearly showing VOC content of product in grams/Liter.

1.04 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS

A. Selection of Proportions: Ingredients for concrete mixes shall be determined by an independent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier, in accordance with requirements of Chapter 5((Chapter 26 in ACI 318-14)) of ACI 318 to provide characteristics listed on Drawings for each class of concrete.

1. General: Concrete shall be composed of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, water-reducing admixture, and an air-entraining admixture, where specified. Proportions of ingredients shall produce a mixture which works readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without segregation or excessive bleed water forming on the surface. Proportioning of materials shall be in accordance with ACI 211.1, "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete" and/or ACI 211.2, "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete."

2. Required average strength above specified strength: Determinations shall be based on standard deviation record of the production facility, in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5((Chapter 26 in ACI 318-14)). If a suitable record of strength test performance is not available, proportions shall be selected to produce an average strength f’cr greater than specified strength f’c by amount defined in ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2((ACI 301, Table 4.2.3.3.c – for projects governed by ACI 318-14)).

3. Where structural lightweight concrete is to be pumped, a special mix design is required which takes into account the porosity and water content of aggregate prior to mixing, and the slump at the inlet, in addition to the characteristics specified in the preceding article.

4. If a testing laboratory provides concrete mix designs, it shall be selected and paid for by the Contractor and approved by the Architect.


A. Materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as work progresses. Failure to detect defective work shall not prevent rejection when defect is


discovered, nor shall it obligate the Architect for final acceptance.

B. Refer to Section 01 45 29 for required laboratory testing and inspection.

C. Contractor Shall Provide and Pay for the Following Additional Testing Laboratory Services:

1. Qualification of proposed materials and establishment of mix designs in

accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5, when trial batches are required. 2. Cylinder tests to verify form removal time. 3. Cylinder tests to verify post-tensioning time. 4. Other testing services needed or required by Contractor.

D. To Facilitate Testing and Inspection, Contractor Shall:

1. Furnish necessary labor to assist testing agency in obtaining and handling samples at jobsite.

2. Advise testing agency sufficiently in advance of operations to allow assignment of testing and personnel.

3. Provide and maintain, for use of testing agency, adequate facilities for proper curing of concrete test specimens on project site, in accordance with ASTM C 31, "Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field."

E. Evaluation and Acceptance:

1. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified strength and no individual test result (average of 2 or 3 cylinders, depending on cylinder size) is below specified strength by more than 500 psi.

2. When strength level of concrete for any portion of the structure, as indicated by cylinder tests, is below specified requirements Contractor shall provide improved curing conditions of temperature and moisture and/or propose adjustments to mix design to secure required strength. Also, if average strength of laboratory control cylinders should fall so low as to be deemed unacceptable, Contractor shall, at his expense, follow core test procedure set forth in ACI 318, Chapter 5((Chapter 26 in ACI 318-14)), in locations approved by Architect. If results of core tests indicate, in Architects opinion, structural strength is inadequate, such replacement, load testing, or strengthening as may be ordered by Architect shall be provided by Contractor without cost to Owner.

F. Latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply, unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between Contract Documents and a referenced standard, Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between Contract Documents and Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.

1. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, Specifications and

standards:


a. "Specifications for Structural Concrete," ACI 301. b. "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete," ACI 318. c. "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete," ASTM C 94. d. "Specification for Hot Weather Concreting," ACI 305.1. e. "Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting," ACI 306.1. f. "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing

Concrete," ACI 304R. g. "Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete," ACI 309. h. "Specification for Curing Concrete," ACI 308.1. i. "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,

Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete," ACI 211.1. j. "Standard Practice for Structural Lightweight Concrete," ACI

211.2. k. "Guide for Use of Admixtures in Concrete," ACI 212.2. l. "Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results

of Concrete," ACI 214. m. "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction," ACI 302.1. n. "Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice," ACI 303. o. "Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods," ACI 304.2.

2. Field reference manual: Contractor shall have available in the field office "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings," ACI Field Reference Manual, SP-15.

1.06 PRE-CONCRETE CONFERENCE

A. At least 21 days prior to start of concrete floor construction Contractor shall conduct a meeting to review proposed mix designs and to discuss required methods and procedures to achieve required concrete floor construction. Contractor shall send a pre-concrete conference agenda to all attendees 7 days prior to scheduled date of conference.

B. Responsible representatives of every party concerned with concrete work shall attend conference including, but not limited to; Contractor's superintendent, laboratory responsible for concrete design mix, laboratory responsible for field quality control, concrete subcontractor, ready-mix concrete producer, admixture manufacturer(s), concrete pumping contractor, rebar/P-T subcontractor(s), Specialty Floor Covering Suppliers, Polished or Stained Concrete Subcontractors, Kitchen Equipment Suppliers, Owner's representative, Architect's representative and Structural Engineer.

C. Minutes of meeting shall be recorded, typed, printed, and distributed by the Contractor to all parties concerned within 5 days after the meeting.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL




2.02 MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

A. Portland Cement shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 150 or ASTM C 595. Only one brand of cement shall be used throughout work. Type shall be as indicated on Drawings.

B. Fine aggregate shall conform to applicable requirements of the current edition of ASTM C 33, and shall be natural bank or river sand or manufactured crushed stone, washed and screened, consisting of hard, durable, uncoated particles free of deleterious matter. All fine aggregates shall be so graded, from coarse to fine, as to produce a minimum percentage of voids.

C. Coarse aggregate for normal-weight concrete shall conform to applicable requirements of the current edition of ASTM C 33, shall be gravel or crushed stone suitably processed, washed and screened, and shall consist of hard, durable particles without adherent coatings.

D. Concrete Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced and serviced by established, reputable manufacturers' and use in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use admixtures which have not been incorporated and tested in accepted mixes.

1. Air-entraining agent, conforming to ASTM C 260. Use of air entrainment

and corresponding reduction in water/cement ratio shall be noted on the mix designs.

2. Water-reducing admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type A. 3. Set-controlling admixtures: ASTM C 494, and as follows:

a. Type C, accelerating. b. Type D, water-reducing and retarding. c. Type E, water-reducing and accelerating. d. Type F, water-reducing, high-range (superplasticizer). e. Type G, water-reducing, high-range and retarding

(superplasticizer). f. Field service: When requested a qualified concrete technician,

employed by manufacturer, shall be available to assist in proportioning concrete materials for optimum use, to advise on proper use of admixture and adjustment of concrete mix proportions to meet jobsite and climatic conditions.

g. Obtain approval of Architect, in writing, before using set-controlling admixtures.

4. Chloride-bearing admixtures and thiocyanates shall not be used in concrete mix. Written certification of maximum chloride ion content in admixtures shall accompany mix design.

5. Fly ash conforming to ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F, may be used in non-architecturally exposed concrete. Carbon content may not exceed 3% by volume. When requested, certification attesting to carbon content


and compliance with ASTM C 618, shall be furnished. Fly ash source shall remain the same for the duration of the project unless a change is specifically approved by the Architect. Only fly ash from western coal fired sources shall be used. Mercury content shall not exceed 5.5 ppb (0.0055 mg/L). Fly ash generated as a by-product of municipal solid waste incinerators does not qualify as a recycled-content material under LEED requirements.

6. Ground granulated blast-furnace slag (GGBFS) may be used as a partial substitute for Portland cement in non-architecturally exposed concrete. GGBFS shall conform to ASTM C989 Grade 120. Source shall remain the same for the duration of the project. Mercury content shall not exceed 5.5 ppb (0.0055 mg/L).

E. Fly Ash: Additive will not be permitted in architectural concrete.

F. Sample Mix Design:

Gray Cement (Type __________): __________ pounds Warmtone Cement: __________ pounds Fine Aggregate: __________ pounds Coarse Aggregate: __________ pounds Air Entrainment: __________ percent Slump: __________. Strength at 28 days: __________ psi. Proportions of ingredients shall be adjusted as necessary to match sample on file in Architect's office.

2.03 WATER

A. Conform to ASTM C 1602.

2.04 CURING MATERIALS

A. Material providing water retention not exceeding loss of .055 gm/cm2 in 72 hours when used at a coverage of 200 square feet per gallon and tested in accordance with ASTM C 156. Selected products shall qualify as low VOC materials under LEED for New Construction requirements.

1. Curing compound shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 309,

"Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete." Curing compound used on exposed concrete walls and columns shall be non-discoloring, fast drying and conclusively demonstrate that it does not darken or yellow with age. Curing compound for use on concrete floor surfaces to receive resilient flooring or other adherent covering or coating shall be specially formulated for such use and shall be certified by the manufacturer not to inhibit bonding qualities of flooring adhesives or coatings. Acceptable sources are: BASF/Sonneborn, W. R. Meadows, Dayton Superior, and Euclid Chemical.

2. Dissipating curing compound shall be liquid membrane-forming compound, complying with ASTM C 309, which provides an initial cure for concrete then begins to chemically break down and wear off the surface


within 2 to 4 weeks. Use Euclid "Kurez DR”, Dayton Superior "Rez Cure J-11”, or approved equal. Use of this product shall be limited to surfaces receiving a post-cure penetrating sealer or cementitious topping.

3. Curing and sealing compound shall be an acrylic sealer equal to "Sealtight CS-309-25" by W. R. Meadows, Inc., or "Super Diamond Clear" by Euclid Chemical. Use of this product shall be limited exclusively to permanently exposed concrete surfaces not specified to receive a penetrating sealer or liquid hardener (comply with ASTM C 309).

2.05 FINISHING MATERIALS

A. Floor hardener shall be a penetrating liquid for subsequent (not integral) application and shall be "Lapidolith" by Sonneborn Building Products, Day-Chem Hardener (J-15) by Dayton Superior, or approved equal. See schedule for location of floor hardener. No combination curing and hardener material will be considered in lieu of hardener material specified.

B. Surface set retardant (for washed aggregate finish) shall be water soluble, spray-applied liquid, equal to Rugaso-S, by Sika Corp.

C. Evaporation retarder (for hot weather finishing) shall be a spray-applied liquid monomolecular film, equal TO “Sealtight EVAPRE” by W. R. Meadows. Product shall qualify as low VOC material under LEED requirements.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Waterstops at all concrete construction joints below grade shall be "SEALTIGHT" No. 6316, by W. R. Meadows Co., or equal, unless otherwise detailed on Drawings.

B. Expansion joint material for slab-on-grade shall be asphalt impregnated preformed expansion joint material, conforming to ASTM D 1751.

C. Expansion joint form filler shall be polystyrene rigid foam board of sufficient hardness to withstand the hydrostatic head of concrete.

D. Vapor retarder under slabs-on-grade not otherwise specified shall be 10-mil thickness polyolefin sheet conforming to ASTM E 1745, Class B or better, having a maximum permeance of 0.03 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Acceptable products are Stego Products “Stego Wrap 10-mil A", Insulation Solutions “Viper VaporCheck II 10”, Reef Industries “Griffolyn T-85", Raven Industries “VaporBlock VB10, and W.R. Meadows “Perminator” 10 underslab vapor-mat.

E. Vapor retarder under slabs-on-grade in areas where critically moisture sensitive flooring is specified or scheduled shall be 15-mil thickness polyolefin sheet conforming to ASTM E 1745, Class A, having a maximum permeance of 0.01 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Such critical flooring types include epoxy terrazzo, epoxy coatings and polyurethane coatings. Acceptable products are Stego Products “Stego Wrap 15-mil", Insulation Solutions “Viper VaporCheck II 15”, Raven Industries “VaporBlock VB15, and W. R. Meadows “Perminator” 15 mil underslab vapor-mat.


F. Tape for vapor retarder seams shall be a minimum of 4" wide and shall be a type recommended by the manufacturer of the vapor retarder sheet.

G. Vapor retarder for slabs on carton forms (void boxes) shall be a minimum 15-mil thickness polyolefin sheet conforming to ASTM E 1745, Class A, having a maximum permeance of 0.01 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Acceptable products are Stego Products “Stego Wrap 15-mil” used in conjunction with “Stego Crete Claw Tape” (place Stego Crete Claw Tape per the manufacturer’s recommendations and at a maximum spacing of 12 feet perpendicular to the length of the wrap), Inteplast Group “Barrier-Bac VBC-350”, and W. R. Meadows “Mel-Rol Precon”.

H. Drainage matting for basement walls poured against rock shall be "ENKADRAIN," Type 9120, by BASF Corp. or approved equal. Matting shall be furnished with filter fabric applied to both faces.

I. Drilled Expansion Bolts in Concrete Shall Be One of the Following, except where a specific product is specified on the drawings:

Strong-Bolt 2, Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA Power-Stud+SD1, Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY Kwik Bolt TZ, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK

J. Drilled Screw Anchors for Structural Applications in Concrete Shall Be One of the Following, except where a specific product is specified on the drawings:

Titen HD, Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA Wedge-Bolt+, Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY Kwik HUS EZ, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK

Drilled Screw Anchors are only allowed in interior conditions.

K. Drilled Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Shall Be One of the Following Anchoring Systems, except where a specific product is specified on the drawings, and shall qualify as low VOC materials under LEED requirements:

SET-XP Epoxy Anchoring System, Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA PE1000+ Standard Set Adhesive Anchoring System, Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY HIT-HY200 Adhesive Anchoring System, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK HIT-RE500-SD Adhesive Anchoring System, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK

A manufacturer’s representative shall be present during initial installation to provide onsite training of installers.

Installation of Drilled Adhesive Anchors shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions (MPII) and shall be performed by personnel trained to install adhesive anchors. Where installation of adhesive anchors is horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads, the installing personnel shall be certified in accordance with the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program, or equivalent.


In the case of a cored hole, a wet hole or a hole deeper than 18 inches, substitute a slow cure epoxy adhesive or other appropriate product recommended by the manufacturer for the special application.

L. Touch-up repair of galvanizing shall be done with "ZRC Zero VOC Cold Galvanizing Compound," by ZRC Chemical Products Co., Marshfield, MA. Coating shall qualify as low VOC material under LEED requirements.

M. Anchor slots to receive inserts for anchoring masonry units, cast stone, and marble to concrete shall be continuous No. 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel with dovetailed slots, complete with foam filler, equal to No. 305, made by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., or approved equal. Slots shall be 1" wide and 1" deep.

2.07 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Interior Use: Pre-mixed, non-shrinking, non-metallic grout. Compressive strength in 28 days shall be 5000 psi minimum, but in no case less than specified strength of base concrete. Grout shall conform to ASTM C 1107, Grade B when tested at fluid consistency. Non-shrink grout shall not be used where it will be exposed to weather in the final condition. This restriction particularly includes where handrails, guardrails, and other posts are grouted into holes or blockouts in concrete.

B. Exterior Use: Pre-mixed, non-shrinking, non-metallic grout labeled for exterior use. Acceptable products include “Super Por-Rok (Exterior Anchoring Cement)" by CGM, Inc., Bensalem, PA. Formulations containing calcium sulfate shall not be used in exterior applications. Super Por-Rok shall not be used in contact with aluminum.

2.08 ANCHORING GROUT FOR ALUMINUM EMBEDMENTS

A. Polymer-modified Portland Cement grout.

2.09 SAND/CEMENT GROUT

A. Sand/cement grout shall be a mixture of 1 part Type I Portland Cement and 2 ½ parts clean, natural sand, conforming to ASTM C 33. Water content shall be 5½ gallons per sack of cement, maximum.

2.10 BONDING COMPOUND

A. Two component, moisture insensitive, extended pot life epoxy bonding agent, Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL, by SIKA Corp., Reziweld 1000, by W. R. Meadows, Inc., or Euco #452 by Euclid Chemical Co. Selected product shall qualify as a low VOC material under LEED requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall not be mixed for placing in work until mix designs and corresponding strength tests reflect that each proposed mix will develop strengths required, nor before mix design for each class of concrete has been


approved by Architect for use on the project.

B. Measuring Ingredients:

1. Ingredients for concrete shall be measured separately for each batch. 2. Proportions of aggregates to cement shall produce concrete that works

readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement and inserts without excessive vibration, puddling or spading and without permitting ingredients to separate or free water to collect on surface of concrete. Combined aggregates shall be of such combination of sizes as not to produce harshness in placing or honeycombing in structure. Ratio between fine and coarse aggregates shall be as directed by testing laboratory but may be modified, when and as directed, in order to obtain a denser or more workable mix without altering ratios (between cement and combined aggregates) prescribed by the testing laboratory.

3. Measure water to assure uniform proportions, in required quantities, throughout successive batches. Methods employed for measuring water shall be such as to permit close and positive control over ratio of water to cement and shall afford ready check by testing laboratory. Water shall be limited to minimum quantity required to produce concrete of workable consistency. Effect of cement-dispersing agent to be used shall be taken into consideration in determining amount of water to be used. Maximum quantity of water specified shall include free moisture content retained by aggregates. Accumulation of water on surface of concrete during placing shall be prevented by making appropriate adjustments to mixture.

C. Maximum replacement of cement with fly ash shall be 25% by weight. Fly ash shall not be used in combination with Type IP cement.

D. Maximum ratio of GGBFS to Portland cement in the mix shall be 30%/70%, not to be combined with flyash without prior approval.

E. Mixing: Ready-mixed concrete, conforming to requirements of ASTM C 94, shall be used in lieu of concrete mixed at jobsite. Agency supplying ready-mixed concrete shall have a batching plant of sufficient capacity and adequate transportation equipment to assure continuous delivery at rate required. Frequency of deliveries to location of work must enable concrete to be placed continuously throughout any 1 pour.

F. Delivered concrete mixture shall conform to limits given on Drawings and on approved mix design for each class of concrete. If means are available to measure, monitor, and document quantities and timing, water may be added, during transit or at site, to concrete mixture in truck to adjust workability, and the documentation shall be transmitted to the laboratory inspector for inclusion in his inspection report. In no case shall the water content exceed the maximum specified water/cement ratio for the mix. Concrete shall not be placed when its slump or temperature are outside limits given on Drawings and on approved mix design.

G. Mixing Time: Unless otherwise approved by laboratory inspector, discharge of concrete shall be completed within 1½ hours or before drum has revolved 300 revolutions (whichever comes first) after introduction of mixing water to cement or


cement to aggregates. In hot weather, reduce mixing time as required to prevent excessive stiffening of mix.

3.02 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Preparation:

1. Equipment for chuting, pumping and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to assure a practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery end without separation of materials and all details thereof submitted to Architect for approval in advance of use of such equipment. Use of gravity-flow or aluminum chutes or conveyors for transporting concrete horizontally will not be permitted.

2. Inserts: Give other trades and subcontractors ample notification and opportunity to install all anchors, nailers, pipes, conduits, boxes, inserts, thimbles, sleeves, frames, vents, wires, supports, or other items required to be built into concrete by provisions of Drawings or Specifications governing work of such trades and subcontractors or as may be necessary for proper execution of their work. Obtain suitable templates or instructions for installation of such items as are not required to be actually placed in forms by the affected trades or subcontractors themselves.

3. Contractor shall provide access for delivery and sufficient equipment and manpower to rapidly place all concrete. a. All work shall be in accordance with the guidelines in ACI 304R,

"Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete."

b. Formwork shall have been completed. Snow, ice, water, and debris shall have been removed from within forms.

c. Expansion joint material, anchors, and all embedded items shall have been positioned.

d. Subgrades shall be sprinkled sufficiently to eliminate water loss from concrete.

e. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground. 4. Thoroughly wet all forms and contact surfaces before pouring concrete. 5. Install anchor bolts for anchoring other materials to concrete as shown on

approved shop drawings for those materials. Well in advance of concrete placement obtain bolts, templates and setting instructions from trade requiring them. Use templates to set all anchor bolts and secure in proper position before placing concrete. Stabbing in bolts will not be permitted. Anchor bolts shall be placed within the following tolerances measured after concrete placement: a. Spacing within bolt group1/8" b. Location of bolt group (center)½" c. Rotation of bolt group5 degrees d. Angle off vertical5 degrees e. Bolt projection+ 3/8"

B. Conveying Concrete:

1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which


prevent separation or loss of ingredients. Concrete to be conveyed by pumping will require approval of Engineer for each class of concrete specified before being used.

2. Pump priming grout must be discarded, not used in the structure. 3. When colored concrete is to be pumped, priming slurry for hose shall be

colored with specified admixture. 4. A manufacturer's representative shall be present for consultation during

placement of integrally colored concrete.

C. Depositing Concrete:

1. General: Place concrete in reasonably uniform layers, approximately horizontal and not more than 2'-0" deep, except for columns which may be poured full-height (exercising care to avoid vertical joints or inclined planes). Piling up concrete in forms in such manner as to cause separation or loss of any of its ingredients will not be permitted. Concrete which has partially set or hardened shall not, under any circumstances, be deposited in work. Place concrete in forms as nearly in its final position as is practical to avoid rehandling. Exercise special care to prevent splashing forms or reinforcement with concrete. Remove any hardened or partially hardened concrete which has accumulated on forms or reinforcement before work proceeds. Do not place concrete on previously deposited concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within respective member or section, except as hereinafter specified. Do not permit concrete to drop freely distances greater than 3'-0". Where longer drops are necessary use a chute, tremie, or other approved conveyance to assist concrete into place without segregation. Do not pour concrete directly into excavations where water is standing. If place of deposit cannot be successfully pumped dry, pour through a tremie with its outlet end near bottom of the place of deposit.

2. Vibration: As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate it by means of mechanical vibrators and suitable hand tools; so manipulated as to work mixture well into all parts and corners of forms, and entirely around reinforcement and inserts. Mechanical vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 8000 revolutions per minute (10,000 if architecturally exposed) and shall be operated by competent workmen. Over vibrating and use of vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn at regular intervals, from 18" to 24" apart. At each insertion duration shall not be sufficient to cause segregation, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. A spare vibrator shall be kept at jobsite during all concrete placing operations. Do not insert vibrator into lower courses that have begun to set.

3. Bonding: Before depositing any new concrete on or against previously deposited concrete which has partially or entirely set, surfaces of the latter shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all foreign matter, scum and laitance. Forms shall be retightened and surface of previously deposited concrete shall be slushed with water or bonding agent. Work shall be performed in such a manner as to assure complete bonding of newly poured concrete to that previously placed.

4. Construction joints: Except as otherwise specifically indicated on


Drawings each footing, pier, column, beam, and slab shall be considered as a single unit of operation and all concrete for same shall be placed continuously so unit will be monolithic in construction. Should construction joints prove to be absolutely unavoidable, they shall be located at or near midpoints of spans. Additional construction joints shall not be made under any circumstances without written approval of Architect.

5. Beams: Do not place concrete in any beams until concrete in supporting members has set for at least 24 hours.

6. Concrete on metal deck: a. Before placing concrete on metal deck, clean surfaces to remove

all dirt and debris. Use compressed air if necessary. b. Deck concrete shall be unloaded from hoppers or buggies

uniformly, avoiding concentrations in localized areas, to prevent overstressing deck and to minimize excessive deflections.

c. Deflection of deck and/or steel will take place when concrete is poured. Minimum thickness of concrete required must be provided and top surfaces of slabs must be constructed within specified tolerances. Where there is residual camber in steel beams, finished concrete surface shall follow camber of beams, but finished surface shall not vary by more than 1/4" from one beam to another adjacent beam, nor ½" total for length of floor. No adjustment will be made to contract price for additional concrete required because of deflection of deck or steel or due to differential camber.

7. Concrete platforms and foundations for mechanical and electrical equipment: Concrete fill shall be normal weight concrete (3000 psi). Reinforce normal weight concrete fill with #3 bars at 8" on center each way, set midway in fill. Trowel concrete topping to a dense, smooth finish. Set anchor bolts for securing mechanical or electrical equipment during pouring of normal weight concrete fill, accurately located by templates.

D. Weather Conditions:

1. Cold weather: All work shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306.1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting, published by the American Concrete Institute, except as modified by requirements of these Contract Documents. A cold weather concreting plan shall be established by Contractor sufficiently in advance of cold weather conditions to allow for orderly and effective implementation of the plan. Refer to ACI 306.1 for guidelines. Submittal of plan is not required and will not be reviewed. Plan shall include, but is not limited to: a. Procedures for protecting subgrade from frost and accumulation of

ice or snow on reinforcement or forms prior to placement. b. Methods for temperature protection during placement. c. Types of covering, insulation, housing, or heating to be provided. d. Curing methods to be used during and following the protection

period. e. Use of strength accelerating admixtures.


f. Methods for verification of in-place strength. g. Procedures for measuring and recording concrete temperatures.

Temperature of concrete delivered at the jobsite shall conform to the following: Air Temperature Concrete Temperature 30° to 45° F. 55° to 75° F. 0° to 30° F. 60° to 80° F. Below 0° F. 65° to 85° F. Water heated to above 100° F. shall be combined with aggregates before cement is added. Cement shall not be added to water or aggregates having a temperature greater than 100° F. When outdoor temperature is less than 40° F., temperature of concrete shall be maintained at not less than 50° F. for required curing time. Concrete protection requirements (Section 03 30 00) and minimum form stripping strength requirements (Section 03 10 00) apply to determination of required curing time.

2. Hot weather: Temperature of concrete delivered at jobsite shall not exceed 95° F. Ingredients shall be cooled before mixing to prevent concrete temperature in excess of 95° F. a. All work shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305.1-06,

Specification for Hot Weather Concreting, published by the American Concrete Institute, except as modified by requirements of these Contract Documents.

b. Provisions shall be made for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, or wet cover when necessary.

c. Use specified evaporation retarder to prevent rapid drying of surface during finishing.

3.03 FILL FOR STEEL PAN STAIRS

A. Mix 1 part Portland Cement, 1 part clean sand, and 2 parts crushed stone or gravel, passing a 1/4" sieve and retained on a 1/8" sieve, measured by volume and with only sufficient water to produce a dry consistency for proper placing and finishing.

B. Place fill and reinforcement in all steel pan treads and intermediate platforms. Reinforcement shall be welded steel wire fabric, 4x4-W1.4xW1.4, extending over entire area of each tread and platform and properly supported ½" above bottom of steel pans. After sufficient hardening of concrete fill, steel trowel exposed surface to a smooth, even, dense finish.

C. Sprinkle abrasive aggregate onto troweled concrete fill in two shakes, at rate of 1/4 pound per square foot and trowel lightly in surface.

3.04 APPLICATION OF FLOOR HARDENER

A. Apply liquid floor hardener on concrete floor surfaces scheduled to receive it, after floor has cured for 28 days. Apply hardener specified at a rate of 1 gallon per 100 square feet of floor area, for 3 applications, and under supervision of the floor hardener manufacturer's representative. Do not apply hardener to surfaces where curing compound has been used.


3.05 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER

A. Granular fills shall be smooth. Install vapor retarder to form a continuous layer under concrete slabs on grade. At laps, film shall be lapped not less than 6". Seal all joints with specified tape. Carefully cut film around pipes and conduits and then apply tape around these protrusions.

B. Install vapor retarder to form a continuous layer under concrete slabs placed on carton forms (void boxes). Use vapor retarder specified for slabs on carton forms and install per manufacturer’s instructions for that application. Where “Stego Wrap 15-mil” is used, place “Stego Crete Claw Tape” per the manufacturer’s recommendations and at a maximum spacing of 12 feet perpendicular and parallel to the length of the wrap. Seal all joints with specified tape. Carefully cut film around pipes and conduits and then apply tape around these protrusions.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF NON-SHRINK GROUT (under base plates)

A. Grout under all bearing plates immediately after setting plates, before additional load is applied. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions regarding mixing and placement. Do not dry pack.

B. Preparatory Work: Clean slab or foundation with liberal amounts of water. Remove all oil, grease and paint from areas of base plates or foundations to be grouted. Roughen slab and remove all waste materials, dirt, chips, oil, and excess water from anchor bolts, slab or foundation. Have necessary tools and materials as near area to be grouted as possible to permit rapid and continuous work with grout. Anchor all forms securely to prevent movement during placing or curing. Adequate clearance must be allowed between forms and base plates.

C. Mixing: A mechanical mixer should be used. Add only enough water to make placeable. Do not mix more grout than can be placed in 20 minutes. Under no circumstances should grout be retempered.

D. Grout Temperatures: Should be maintained at 50° - 90° F. for a period of 48 hours after placing. Care should be exercised so extremes of hot or cold temperatures are avoided.

E. Placing: As grouting procedure begins, placement and compaction should be continuous until completed. Lengths of banding strap placed in forms before placing grout will assist in compacting grout and eliminating air pockets. Strap should be worked in quick, short strokes and be removed before initial set occurs. Grout should be placed from one end or side only, to avoid excessive air entrapment and assure good compaction. Wherever possible grout bolt holes first. Do not overwork grout as this causes segregation, bleeding, and breakdown of initial set. If machines or equipment are being used nearby, consider shutting them down until grout takes final set.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF NON-SHRINK GROUT (Tilt-wall joints)

A. Apply grout with strict adherence to manufacturer's recommendations, and as specified herein.


B. Mix grout only in such quantities as are needed for immediate use. No retempering shall be permitted and materials which have been mixed for a period exceeding 30 minutes shall not be used upon any portion of work. Use only enough water to obtain a flowable mixture without segregation or bleeding.

C. Members to be grouted must be maintained in correct position and alignment during grouting through use of permanent weld connections, shims, or temporary bracing. No adjustment in position or inclination of member will be permitted once grout has been placed.

D. Provide forms or other means for retaining grout in place until hard enough to support itself.

E. Eliminate all air voids from grouted joint by rodding with wire, tamping or ramming until voids are completely filled. Provide air relief holes where necessary.

F. Grout bearing joints immediately after setting units, before additional load is placed on member. Use only steel shims and only as many as intensity of load requires.

G. Immediately remove grout spillage from exposed surfaces and wash area thoroughly to prevent blemishes.

3.08 FINISHING CONCRETE SLAB SURFACES

A. General: Concrete slabs shall be finished as specified below, within tolerances specified elsewhere in this Section. Dusting of slab surfaces with dry materials will not be permitted.

1. Forms shall be properly leveled, in good condition and securely anchored, including special attention to ends and transitions.

2. Bearing surfaces for straightedges, such as form edges or previously poured slabs, shall be kept clean of laitance, sand, gravel, or other foreign elements.

3. Screeds shall be maintained in good condition with straight cutting edges and where applicable, true round rolling wheels. Use of optical sighting equipment, such as lasers, is recommended for checking levelness and straightness. Do not drive guide stakes through vapor retarder. Contractor shall promptly adjust or replace equipment when test results indicate substandard work.

4. Highway straightedges are recommended for use in lieu of bullfloats for all slab placement and finishing operations.

B. Screeding: Immediately after placing, slab shall be vibrated and struck off true by double screeding to required level, at or below elevation or grade of finished slabs, as indicated on Drawings. Do not use vibrator to spread concrete. Low spots left behind shall immediately be filled with additional concrete, carefully avoiding segregation, and screeded to required elevation. When camber is shown or specified for slabs supported on formwork, screed to required camber. Fixed screed guides are recommended where specified surface tolerance exceeds FF25/FL20.


C. Floating: Immediately after screeding, before any excess moisture or bleed water is present on surface, float surface using long-handled bull floats or darbies to fill in any surface voids and slightly embed coarse aggregate.

D. Edging and jointing, where required, shall be done after bleed water is gone and before further finishing.

E. Float Finish:

1. Locations: All concrete surfaces under: a. Waterproofing membrane. b. Setting beds for brick, mud-set tile, and mud-set pavers.

2. Method of finishing: After concrete has stiffened sufficiently to bear a man's weight without deep imprint and after water sheen has disappeared, surface shall be wood-floated at least twice to produce a uniform sandy texture with no coarse aggregate visible. Either hand or power machine floats are acceptable. Apply sufficient pressure to bring moisture to surface. Final finish shall be as approved by Architect.

F. Trowel Finish:

1. Locations: a. Exposed concrete floors not otherwise specified. b. Concrete surfaces under:

1) Carpets. 2) Vinyl Tile. 3) Thin-set Tile. 4) Wood Flooring. 5) Elastomeric Coating. 6) Noncomposite topping slabs and terrazzo.

c. Painted concrete floors. d. Roof slab to be future floor.

2. Method of finishing: After concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation, and water sheen has disappeared, surface shall be hand or machine floated, followed immediately by steel troweling at least twice with hand trowels or machine trowels. Final troweling shall produce a smooth, dense, burnished finish and cause a ringing sound from the trowel.

G. Broom Finish:

1. Locations: a. Exterior stairs, ramps, and walks. b. Curbs and islands. c. Parking and drive areas. d. Other locations noted on the Drawings.

2. Method of finishing: Same method as specified for trowel finish, except after initial troweling brush concrete surfaces with soft brush or broom to texture approved by Architect. Striations shall run in direction of drainage slope, if any, unless otherwise indicated.


H. Heavy Brush Finish:

1. Locations: a. Entrance/exit ramps steeper than 7 percent slope. b. Loading ramps. c. Other locations noted on the Drawings.

2. Method of finishing: As soon as surface of concrete is sufficiently hardened to bear a man's weight without deep imprint, it shall be wood-floated to a true plane with no coarse aggregate visible. Ramp surfaces shall then be cross jointed with a Goldblatt Groover (Model #06-314-M7) jointing tool, for entire width of ramps. Space cross joints at 6" intervals. Concrete surfaces between grooves shall be brushed with a stiff fiber brush to produce uniformly striated surfaces parallel with cross jointing. Again, cross joint grooves to clearly define these indentations. Grooved joints and brushed finished texture shall be approved by Architect.

I. Saw-cut Control Joints: After completion of finishing operations and as soon as concrete surface can support weight of a saw, cut control joints along straight lines where called for on Drawings. Saw cutting shall be done within 4 hours after completion of finishing, but not so soon as to cause raveling of joint. Cut to depth indicated on Drawings.

3.09 CONCRETE FINISH MEASUREMENT AND TOLERANCES

A. All Floors Are Subject to Measurement for Flatness and Levelness and Shall Comply with the Following:

1. Slabs shall be flat within a tolerance of 1/4" in 10'-0" when tested with a 10'-0" free-standing straightedge. Apply straightedge to slab at 3'-0" intervals in both directions, lapping straightedge 3'-0" on areas previously checked. Low spots shall not exceed above dimension anywhere along straightedge. Flatness shall be checked the next work day after finishing.

2. Slabs shall be level within a tolerance of + 1/4" in 10'-0", + 3/8" in 20'-0", not to exceed 3/4" total variation, anywhere on floor, from elevations indicated on Drawings. Levelness shall be checked on a 10'-0" grid using a telescopic or laser level after removal of forms.

B. Floor Test Sections:

1. A floor test section is defined as smaller of the following areas: a. Area bounded by column and/or wall lines. b. Area bounded by construction and/or control joint lines. c. Any combination of column lines and/or control joint lines.

2. Test sample measurement lines within each test section shall be multidirectional along 2 orthogonal lines, defined by ASTM E 1155, at a spacing determined by Owner's testing agency.

3. Precise layout of each test section shall be determined by Owner's testing agency.

C. Floor Elevation Tolerance Envelope:

1. In addition to satisfying profile tolerances, acceptable tolerance envelope


for absolute elevation of any point on slab surface, with respect to elevation shown on Drawings, is as follows: a. Slab-on-grade construction: + 3/4". b. Top surfaces of formed slabs measured prior to removal of

supporting shores: + 3/4". c. Top surfaces of all other slabs: + 3/4". d. Slabs specified to slope shall have a tolerance from specified

slope of 3/8" in 10'-0" at any point, up to 3/4" from theoretical elevation at any point.

D. Remedial Measures for Slab Finish Construction not Meeting Specified Tolerances:

1. Application of remedial measures specified herein are required whenever

either or both of the following occur: a. Composite overall values of flatness or levelness of any test

section or the entire floor installation measure less than specified values.

b. Any individual test sample (line of measurements) measures less than specified absolute minimum flatness or levelness value.

2. Modification of existing surface: a. If, in Architect or Owner's representative opinion, all or any portion

of substandard work can be repaired without sacrifice to appearance or serviceability of area, Contractor shall immediately undertake approved repair method.

b. Contractor shall submit for review and approval a detailed work plan of proposed repair showing areas to be repaired, method of repair, and time to effect repair.

c. Repair method(s), at sole discretion of Architect or Owner's representative, may include grinding (floor stoning), planing, retopping with specified floor leveling compound or polymer concrete, or any combination thereof.

d. Repair work shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner and with no extension to construction schedule.

3. Removal and replacement: a. If, in Architect/Engineer or Owner's representative opinion, all or

any portion of substandard work cannot be satisfactorily repaired without sacrifice to appearance or serviceability of area, Contractor shall immediately commence to remove and replace defective work as directed.

b. Replacement sections may be retested for compliance at discretion of Architect/Engineer or Owner's representative.

c. Replacement work shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner and with no extension to construction schedule.

3.10 FINISHING EXPOSED FORMED CONCRETE SURFACES

A. General: Intent of these Specifications is to provide for exposed-to-view concrete formed surfaces of such quality as to require a minimum of pointing. Exercise care in forming, mixing, and placing of concrete to assure reasonably uniform, dense surfaces, free from blemishes or defects. In the event of unsightly voids,


honeycombs, etc., they shall be repaired using approved methods as soon as possible. Fins and other projections shall be neatly dressed off. Form offsets greater than 1/4" shall be ground down to a smooth plane. Holes larger than 1/4" in any dimension shall be drenched with clean water and properly patched with Portland Cement and sand mortar of color and texture to match surrounding concrete.

B. Sandblasted Finish: A ____________ sandblast shall be given to all architecturally exposed concrete surfaces. After removal of forms, remove all fins and form marks by rubbing with a carborundum stone. Apply sandblast to remove surface cement matrix and expose the aggregate. Degree of exposure, timing, abrasive material, and use of retarders shall be as approved by Architect based on a reference sample. Abraded mortar shall be continually washed away from previously sandblasted areas to prevent staining. Finished surfaces shall be clean and uniform. When further curing is required, curing compound shall be applied after finishing. Use wet sandblasting techniques where required by code.

C. Foundation Dressing: After form removal, a rubbed finish slurry coat shall be applied to exterior foundation surfaces which will be exposed above grade. Remove fins and other projections by chipping or grinding. Thoroughly wet concrete surface, then trowel or brush on grout slurry coat consisting of one part gray portland cement to two parts fine aggregate, mixed with water to required consistency. Wood float the surface to fill all holes and form offsets, and build up to a thickness required to produce a smooth, even surface, aligning with wall finishes or setback dimensions. In hot, dry weather, grout shall be kept damp with fog spray or wet blankets during the initial curing period.

3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Filling Tie Rod and Bolt Holes: Holes resulting from removal of bolts or tie rods shall be solidly filled with cement grout. Holes passing entirely through concrete members shall be filled from inside face with a plunger-type grease gun or other device that forces mortar through to outside face, holding a canvas sack at exterior surface to assure complete filling. Holes which do not pass entirely through shall be filled using tools which will permit opening to be packed thoroughly full. All excess mortar at faces of filled holes shall be struck off flush with a canvas sack.

B. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch non-structural defective areas in formed surfaces immediately after removal of forms and in unformed surfaces as soon as defect is discovered. Where reinforcing steel is left exposed and at severe honeycombs, cracks, voids or other defects which may impair structural capacity, notify Architect and submit proposed repair method before attempting repairs. Non-shrink grout or epoxy resin, installed by certified technicians, will be required at structural repairs to fully restore member strength.

1. Chip out honeycombs, spalls, air bubbles, rock pockets and other voids over 1/4" in any dimension down to solid concrete. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Thoroughly clean and flush with water and brush coat area to be patched with specified bonding compound. Trowel in sand/cement grout patching mixture, solidly filling void, before


bonding compound has dried. Strike off and finish flush or slightly fuller than surrounding surface.

2. For exposed-to-view surfaces blend white and gray or buff Portland Cement so that, when dry, patch will match color of surrounding surface. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Finish patch surfaces with a trowel and burlap to match texture of surrounding surface.

3. Surface defects in unformed surfaces to be repaired include cracks, crazing, scaling, bolt holes, spalls, and chips. Fill holes less than 1" diameter with sand/cement grout. Larger defective areas shall be chipped out to sound concrete using clean square perimeter cuts and filled with concrete, grout or leveling compound. Defective areas larger than 1'-0" square require Architect's approval of repair method.

4. Cure patches in same manner as adjacent surfaces. 5. Remove and replace concrete containing defects which cannot be

repaired to satisfaction of Architect.

C. Filling Cored Holes: Holes left from core samples and unused penetrations shall be filled solid with nonshrink grout. Flush out hole with clean water and pack grout following manufacturer’s printed instructions. Where concrete surface will be exposed to view, hold nonshrink grout back 1" from surface and fill remainder with patching mixture described above.

D. Patches in architecturally exposed concrete shall be indistinguishable from surrounding surfaces. Mix formula for patching mortar shall be determined by trial, to obtain a good color match with concrete when both patch and concrete are cured and dried. After initial set, surfaces of patches shall be dressed manually to obtain same texture as surrounding surfaces.

3.12 CURING AND SEALING

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from washing by rain, flowing water, etc. Do not allow concrete to dry out from time it is deposited in forms until expiration of curing period hereinafter specified. Methods of curing shall be as specified in the following paragraphs, unless otherwise authorized by Architect.

B. Concrete surfaces, not otherwise specified, shall be cured by being kept wet with clean water for a period of not less than 7 days after placing. Each day forms are left in place and kept wet enough to prevent opening of joints in forms and drying out of concrete will be counted as 1 day of curing.

C. In lieu of wetting specified above, Contractor may use a non-bituminous liquid curing compound as specified to hold moisture in concrete. Curing liquid, if used, shall be applied in conformance with recommendations of manufacturer of material approved for use, and to sufficient extent to effectively hold moisture in concrete. Use of such material shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility of protecting all floor slabs, platforms, and steps whenever any scaffolding, shoring, form work, masonry, concrete or other work is being done over or above finished concrete slabs.

D. Where called for on Drawings, specified curing and sealing compound shall be used in lieu of curing compound. Curing and sealing compound shall be limited


exclusively to permanently exposed concrete surfaces which are not specified to receive penetrating sealer.

3.13 CLEANUP

A. Imperfect or damaged work, or any material damaged or determined to be defective before final completion and acceptance of entire job, shall be satisfactorily replaced at Contractor's expense and in conformity with all of requirements of Drawings and Specifications. Removal and replacement of concrete work shall be done in such a manner as not to impair appearance or strength of structure in any way.

B. Cleaning: Upon completion of work all forms, equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish resulting therefrom shall be removed from site. After sweeping with an ordinary broom and removing all mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt, mud, etc., wash all concrete floors and platforms with soapsuds and scrub with a stiff fiber brush. Mop up suds and flush surfaces with clean water. Provide adequate measures during scrubbing, mopping, and flushing operations to keep excessive or injurious amounts of water off resilient tile floors. Any damage to floors shall be promptly, effectively and satisfactorily repaired. Finished concrete surfaces shall be left in a clean and perfect condition, satisfactory to Owner.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 03 47 13 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center PRECAST TILT-UP

SECTION 03 47 13

PRECAST CONCRETE TILT-UP PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this Section.


A. This Section covers design, fabrication, and erection of precast concrete panels and related items, complete including inserts, reinforcing steel, and installation in precast concrete panels of items required under other Sections of Specifications.

B. Design Responsibility: Panel designs indicated on Contract Documents are for final in-place conditions. Contractor shall bear sole responsibility for panel performance and safety during construction, including lifting and temporarily braced conditions.

C. Precast concrete panels shall be cast at the jobsite on the floor slab. It is the intent of these Specifications to obtain precast concrete panels produced in a neat and workmanlike manner, in sizes and shapes as shown, without objectionable bulges, honeycombs, etc., with a finish to match approved control sample and in keeping with good practice.

D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Testing laboratory services: Section 01 45 29. 2. Concrete formwork: Section 03 10 00. 3. Concrete reinforcement and embedded metal assemblies: Section 03 20

00. 4. Cast-in-place concrete: Section 03 30 00.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Concrete Mix Design: Submit, to Owner's testing laboratory, 2 copies of proposed mix designs, prepared in accordance with requirements of Section 03 30 00.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed fabrication drawings for each different wall panel showing reinforcing steel, embedded metal assemblies, lifting inserts, bracing details, form layouts and dimensions of all openings and panel sizes for review by Architect. Give calculated panel weight and lifting insert capacity. Panels for which drawings have not been reviewed shall not be cast. Such review will cover general compliance with Contract Documents for in-place conditions only.


C. Submit 1 copy of design calculations, prepared and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Texas, for all temporary lifting and bracing conditions. Calculations will be retained for Architect's records and will not be approved or returned.

D. Design panels for all handling and erection stresses, including locating pick-up points, designing lifting inserts, temporary bearing points, and bracing. Design shall include the following:

1. Auxiliary reinforcement where required at points of stress concentration. 2. Design erection rigging and inserts in accordance with Richmond Bulletin

No. 8 and these Specifications. 3. The calculated tensile stress in the concrete shall not exceed six times

the square root of the compressive strength (f’c), with a dead load impact factor of 1.5, where f’c is the concrete compressive strength at the time of erection, as established by cylinder tests.

4. Include in the analysis the effects of the openings and any architectural shapes or recesses.

5. Design temporary bracing to resist the maximum possible wind forces appropriate for the area, season, and duration using local weather data and applicable codes, with a minimum safety factor of 2.0.

6. Where reinforcement is shown on the Drawings it shall be provided, even though calculations may show that a lesser amount is required.

7. Where temporary bracing connects to building floor slab, details, locations, and imposed loads shall be approved by Architect as to their effect on building structure. However, Contractor is responsible for proper performance of connection.

E. Samples and Mock-Ups:

1. Submit 3 sets of samples approximately 18"X18"X 4", for each concrete mix, to illustrate quality, color, and texture of surface finish. Samples must match those on display in Architect's office.

2. Architect's review of samples will be for color, texture, and general condition only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of Contractor.

F. Cast one full size panel and stand it up for display at project site prior to start of installation work. After Architect's review of finish samples, acceptable full size panel may be incorporated in construction.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Contractor Qualifications: Contractor shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience in fabrication and erection of precast concrete units similar to units required on project.

1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. ACI 551.1R-05 “Tilt-Up Concrete Construction Guide.”

B. Tilt-Up Construction and Engineering Manual, 6th Edition, Tilt-Up Concrete


Association (TCA).

C. Other standards referenced in Section 03 30 00 of these Specifications.

1.06 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Proportion mixes and submit appropriate mix designs with record of compressive tests in accordance with requirements of Section 03 30 00.


A. Laboratory Testing by Owner's Testing Laboratory: Refer to Section 01 45 29.

B. All materials, fabrication procedures and field erection are subject to verification inspection and testing by Owner's testing laboratory. Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply.

C. Qualifications for Welding Work: Contractor shall be responsible for qualifying welding operations in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." Provide certification, to Owner's testing laboratory that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 of these Specifications.

2.02 REINFORCING AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

A. Conform to the requirements of Section 03 20 00 of these Specifications.

B. Do not galvanize or paint embeds on the interior side of the panel.

2.03 GROUT

A. Non-shrink Grout: Pre-mixed, non-shrinking, non-metallic grout. Compressive strength in 28 days shall be 5000 psi minimum, but in no case less than the specified strength of the base concrete. Grout shall conform to ASTM C 1107, Grade B when tested at fluid consistency.

2.04 FORMS

A. Conform to Specifications Section 03 10 00 for wood forms for exposed concrete surfaces.

B. It is intended that the building floor slab serve as the form for the exterior panel face.


2.05 RUSTICATIONS AND CHAMFERS

A. Rustications and chamfers in exposed concrete shown on Drawings shall be formed with polyvinyl chloride or milled and sealed white pine.

2.06 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

A. Bar supports resting on forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be plastic or plastic-tipped galvanized metal chairs and shall be fabricated in accordance with requirements of Chapter 7, of ACI Standard 315, with heights as required.

2.07 CURING COMPOUND

A. Conform to requirements of Section 03 30 00 of these Specifications. Curing compound must be compatible with all subsequent coatings.

2.08 BOND BREAKER

A. "Silcoseal 77" form coating, by Nox-Crete Co., Omaha, NE, or “Sure Lift (J-6)” premium cure and bond breaker by Dayton Superior, Miamisburg, Ohio.

2.09 SOIL RETAINERS

A. Precast concrete or hadite squares of sufficient thickness to withstand installation and compaction forces, or “SureRetainer” by Motzblock, SureVoid Products, Inc.

2.10 WATER-REPELLENT SEALER

A. "White Roc-7 Plus," by Sonneborn or "Weather Worker J-26," by Dayton Superior.

2.11 PAINT FOR EXPOSED EMBEDS AND CONNECTIONS

A. Epoxy primer, Tnemec Series 66-1211 “Hi-Build Epoxoline.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FORMWORK

A. Design, layout, and engineering of formwork, as well as its construction, shall be responsibility of Contractor. Panels must be square and plumb and conform to shapes shown on Drawings.

B. All necessary forms and molds shall be built to conform to shapes, lines, and dimensions of different wall panels. Forms shall be set to line and grade, braced and secured so as to withstand the placing of concrete and maintain their shapes and positions. Forms shall be sufficiently tight and substantially assembled to prevent bulging or leakage of mortar. Forms shall be assembled in such a manner as to facilitate their removal without damage to concrete.

C. Construct forms with such care as to produce concrete surfaces which will not leave unsightly or objectionable form marks in exposed concrete surfaces. Lumber once used as forms shall have all nails withdrawn and the contact


surfaces thoroughly cleaned before reuse.

D. Accurately and securely place wood strips, weld plates, steel angles, blocking, moldings, and nailers etc., in forms as required to produce finished profiles and surfaces shown on Drawings. Coat wood strips, blocking, and moldings with form sealer. Special care shall be exercised in placing of concrete to avoid moving of inserts or embedded items and to keep from scouring the bond breaker from the casting surface.

E. Panels shall be cast on a smooth plane surface, free of depressions, irregularities and foreign material. Contractor shall fill control joints and cracks with a filler material which will prevent joint pattern and cracks from being transferred onto the wall surface.

F. Bond breaker solution shall be applied on casting surface and on side forms in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Contractor may stack cast not more than two panel thicknesses on slab on grade areas.

3.02 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Reinforcing steel shall be sizes, shapes, length, and spacing shown. Before being placed in the work, reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, mill scale, or other coatings which might tend to reduce or destroy the bond. Locate and support reinforcing by chairs, runners, or bolsters as required. Securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16 gauge wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Do not place reinforcing in forms more than 2 hours before pouring concrete to avoid transfer of rust stains from reinforcing to casting surface and precast panel. Clip all tie wires to prevent from touching forms. Concrete covering over reinforcing steel shall not be less in any direction than 2" for exterior faces and 1" for interior faces. Locate reinforcing within a tolerance of 1/4" from position shown on shop drawings.

3.03 MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall be mixed and placed in conformance with requirements of Section 03 30 00.

B. Face mix, if used, must be poured no more than 1 hour before casting back up concrete.

3.04 FINISHING CONCRETE WALL SURFACES

A. General: In preparation for finishing, panels shall be struck off true by double screeding. Panels shall be finished to match appearance of approved control sample.

B. Wood float upper (exterior) surface of panel, then finish to a vertically striated texture by brooming from top to bottom in one pass.


C. A strip 1" wide on each end and on the bottom of panels is to be troweled smooth and finished with an edging tool having 1/4" radius. Wood floating shall start from the same corner in each panel, taking special care that all panels are finished in exactly the same manner so overall textured appearance of panels is equal.

D. General: In preparation for finishing, panels shall be struck off true by double screeding.

E. Wood float upper (interior) surface of panel, then finish to a smooth troweled finish. Interior surfaces to be covered by drywall do not require smooth troweling.

F. After panels have been erected, patch or repair exterior faces as required to achieve a uniform appearance matching approved sample. Holes or pits larger than 1/4" shall be patched with mortar and finished by rubbing with burlap.

G. Sandblasted Finish: A light sandblast shall be given to indicated exposed concrete wall surfaces after erecting panels. Apply sandblast to remove surface cement matrix and expose the aggregate. Degree of exposure, timing, abrasive material, and use of retarders shall be as approved by Architect based on a reference sample. Abraded mortar shall be continually washed away from previously sandblasted areas to prevent staining. Finished surfaces shall be clean and uniform. When further curing is required, curing compound shall be applied after finishing. Use wet sandblasting techniques where required by code.

3.05 TOLERANCES

A. Precast Concrete Panels, after Curing and Aging, Shall be True to Size Within the Following Dimensions:

1. Overall panel dimensions: 1/4" from dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. Warpage: No more than 1/8" per 6'-0" of length, or 1/2" total. 3. Linear shrinkage: No more than 1/8" in any dimension. 4. Squareness: No more than 1/8" in 6'-0" out of square nor more than 1/2"

total. 5. Bow: No more than 1/2" horizontally or vertically. 6. Location of blockouts and inserts: 1/2" from locations shown on

Drawings. 7. Overall panel dimensions and out of squareness tolerances of adjacent

panels shall be limited so joint width between panels does not vary more than joint width tolerance specified in Erection Tolerances.

3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from washing by rain, flowing water etc. Do not allow concrete to dry out from the time it is deposited in forms until expiration of the curing period. Finished surfaces shall be cured with black polyethylene film secured tightly to the form to prevent evaporation of moisture. In no case shall the covering be removed before a period of at least 7 days has elapsed after placing and finishing of concrete.

B. In lieu of polyethylene film curing specified above, Contractor may use a non-


bituminous liquid curing compound, as specified, to hold moisture in the concrete. Apply curing compound in conformance with manufacturer recommendations. Curing compound, if used, shall be conclusively demonstrated not to inhibit the bonding qualities of paint or other subsequent coating and shall be approved by Architect prior to use.

3.07 LIFTING AND ERECTION OF PANELS

A. Contractor shall not lift panels out of forms until panels have gained at least 75% of their specified 28 day compressive strength, unless a greater strength is required by lifting analysis. Curing shall continue for the specified curing period.

B. Panels shall be sufficiently braced until permanently attached to floor and roof structural assemblies. Panels shall be accurately positioned and plumbed before welding connection plates. All lifting and erection shall be accomplished in a neat and workmanlike manner to prevent cracking, breaking, or damaging panels or other work in any way.

C. Damaged Panels: Any panels showing defects of any kind shall not be set, but shall be replaced with satisfactory panels. All panels shall, upon completion of the contract, be acceptable in every detail.

D. Setting: Set panels and anchor to structure as shown. Panels shall be plumb, level and square with uniform joints. Grout under all precast panels as shown on Drawings.

E. Erection Tolerances:

1. Plumbness: 1/4" in any 10'-0", not to exceed 1". 2. Variation in wall location from established position in plans, not more than

1". 3. Joint width: 1/4" from dimensioned joint width. 4. Vertical alignment between adjacent panels at top of parapet, rustications

and headers over openings: 1/2" maximum offset.

F. Paint embeds exposed to view, after all welding and inspection has been completed, with rust-inhibiting primer paint.

3.08 SEALER APPLICATION

A. Apply water-repellent sealer, as specified, to all exterior exposed concrete surfaces which are not intended to be painted.

B. Start application of sealer after all caulking and sealant work is complete. Thoroughly clean architectural concrete and precast concrete with soap, a stiff brush and water before application.

C. Inspect surfaces to receive sealer and report any conditions to the Architect which will prevent or jeopardize satisfactory application of sealer.

D. Any sealer applied over stained, discolored, dirty, or otherwise unacceptable surfaces shall be removed to allow repair of surfaces, then resealed.


E. Do not apply sealer in wet weather or when air temperature is below 35° F. Surface to receive sealer shall be clean, dry, free from oil, grease, dirt, etc.

F. Apply sealer per manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use any sprayer with a rubber hose. Seal finished surfaces with two coats of sealing compound. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat. Prevent overspray or run down from damaging adjacent surfaces.

3.09 CLEANUP

A. Upon Completion of work all forms, equipment, protective coverings, and any rubbish resulting therefrom shall be removed from the site. Remove all bolts and other fasteners used to secure forms or bracing to the floor slab and patch resulting holes. Comply with surface repair procedure requirements of Section 03 30 00.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 04 22 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 04 22 00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. a. Standard b. Fire-rated 2. Masonry lintels and setting of steel angles furnished under Section

05 50 00. 3. Setting bearing plates supported and embedded with masonry furnished

under Section 05 50 00. 4. Provide masonry fill concrete and reinforcing steel where indicated on

drawings. See Section 03 30 00. 5. Wall reinforcing and accessories. 6. Built-in collars, sleeves, inserts, anchors, ties, sockets, bolts, blocking,

miscellaneous metal work, etc., in contact with, supported on or enclosed by masonry. When these items are furnished by others, they shall include information for setting.

7. Includes grouting solid all hollow metal door frames in masonry. 8. Mortar and grout. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Section 01 81 13. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory and other manufactured

products specified. B. Submit certification that fire resistant concrete units conform to the requirements

specified herein for Fire Resistant Concrete Block.

C. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.

D. Submit for LEED Credit documentation.

1. Refer to Section 01 81 13 “Sustainable Design Requirements” for additional LEED submittal requirements.


2. Product Data for Credit MRc4: For products having recycled content, provide documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating material costs for each product having recycled content.

3. Product data for Credit MRc5: For products having regional content: a. Provide documentation indicating location of manufacturer of

product. If only a fraction of the material is manufactured regionally, indicate fraction as a percentage product’s total weight.

b. Provide documentation indicating location of extraction, harvest or recovery of raw material in product. If only a fraction of the material is extracted, harvested or recovered regionally, indicated fraction as a percentage of product’s total weight.

c. Include statement indicating material costs for each product having regional content.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supervisor: A supervisory journeyman mason shall be appointed for the project

and shall be present at all times masonry work is being performed and: 1. have a minimum of 5 years experience on masonry projects of this type

and size. 2. be thoroughly familiar with the design requirements, types of materials

being installed, referenced standards and other requirements. B. Use only skilled journeyman masons for cutting and placing of masonry; no

allowance shall be made for lack of skill on the part of the workmen. C. Consult other trades and make provisions that shall permit the installation of their

work in a manner to avoid cutting and patching. Build-in work under other sections, as necessary, and as the work progresses.

D. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, “Specifications

for Masonry Structures”. Maintain one copy of the standard in project field office at all times during construction. Contractor’s supervisory personnel shall be thoroughly familiar with the material as it applies to this Project.

E. Concrete Unit Masonry Construction: Comply with the National Concrete Masonry

Association (NCMA) “TEK Bulletins”, and other requirements specified. 1. NCMA TEK Bulletin 3-2 “Grouting for Concrete Masonry Walls”. 2. NCMA TEK Bulletin 3-3A “Reinforced Concrete Masonry”. 3. NCMA TEK Bulletin 8-2 “Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry Walls”. 4. NCMA TEK Bulletin 10-1A “Crack Control in Concrete Masonry Walls”. 5. NCMA TEK Bulletin 10-2B “Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls”. 6. NCMA TEK Bulletin 14-2 “Reinforced Concrete Masonry”.


1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store cement and lime materials and masonry units off the ground, under cover

and protected from weather damage. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

B. Stockpile and store aggregates to prevent contamination from foreign materials, in

locations where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. C. Use care in handling units to avoid chipping and breakage. D. Locate storage areas where they will not be disturbed or damaged by construction

operations. E. Protect finished floor areas from damage. 1.07 COLD WEATHER CONSTRUCTION A. Comply with recommended practices for cold weather construction of the

International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council and requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.07 HOT WEATHER CONSTRUCTION A. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected

in an ambient air temperature of 90o F., or greater in shade with relative humidity less than 50%. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Provide artificial shade, wind breaks, use cooled materials and other procedures outlined in BIA Tech Notes #1.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated

loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. 1. Brace unsupported and newly laid masonry walls. Maintain bracing in place

until building structure provides permanent bracing. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry

to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar and soil that become in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by

coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products

with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to

prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General 1. Curing: Cure for at least 7 days and units must be at least 28 days old

when used in the work. 2. Color: Natural color.

3. All CMU to be manufactured regionally AND harvested, extracted, or recovered regionally within a radius of 500 miles from the project site.

B. Hollow Load Bearing, Solid Load Bearing (75%) and Fire Resistant Concrete

Masonry Units 1. Type: Hollow, load bearing, standard modular size and shapes, thoroughly

cured and dried. 2. References: ASTM C90. 3. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 1900 psi. 4. Weight Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Linear Shrinkage: Not to exceed 0.065 percent, ASTM C426. 6. Aggregate: ASTM C33 normal weight aggregates. Cinder aggregates not

permitted. 7. Fire Resistant a. Rating: Design for fire ratings indicated on drawings. b. Manufacturer 1) Listed in the Building Materials List published by the

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 2) In lieu of above, provide a report from a nationally

recognized testing agency stating that the units are equivalent in fire rating to those furnished by the producers as listed above.

c. Location: Where indicated. 2.02 MORTAR A. Materials 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used

for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated or selected.

2. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 4. Aggregate: ASTM C144, clean masonry sand, not over 10% to pass No.

100 sieve for general use. 5. Water: Clean, fresh and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis and

foreign organic matter.


B. Proprietary Mortar Cement: Conform to ASTM C91, containing hydrated lime. 1. Certification: Submit certified laboratory data substantiating conformance

with structural requirements for mortars as specified; and that no adverse chemical reaction will occur with the specified masonry accessories and reinforcing. Certification must be received and approved by Architect prior to mortar use.

2. Suitable products are acceptable from the following manufacturers: a. CEMEX (Richcolor) b. LEHIGH PORTLAND CEMENT COMPANY c. ESSROC MATERIALS, INC. (Brixment) d. QUIKRETE C. Mixes - Unit Masonry 1. Provide water repellent admixture in all mortar used for exterior masonry

work. Add to mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Type S Mortar a. Proportions: ASTM C270 proportions by volume. Minimum

average compressive strength at 28 days of 1,800 psi. b. Color: Natural color. 2.03 GROUT A. Masonry Grout - Mix 1. Fine Grout for Reinforced Masonry: Mix with mechanical mixer with

sufficient water to the desired consistency in accordance with ASTM C476 Proportion Specifications.

a. Portland Cement: 1 part b. Hydrated Lime: 0 to 1/10 part c. Fine Aggregate: 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of the

cementitious materials 2. Coarse Grout for Reinforced Masonry: Mix with mechanical mixer with

sufficient water to the desired consistency in accordance with ASTM C476 Proportion Specifications.

a. Portland Cement: 1 part b. Hydrated Lime: 0 to 1/10 part c. Fine Aggregate: 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of the

cementitious materials. d. Coarse Aggregate: 1 to 2 times the sum of the volumes of the

cementitious materials. 3. Hand Mixing: Not acceptable. 2.04 REINFORCING A. Manufacturers: DUR-O-WALL; HECKMANN BUILDING PRODUCTS; HOHMANN

& BARNARD; MASONRY REINFORCING CORPORATION OF AMERICA (WIREBOND).


Where products are specified referencing a particular manufacturer, equal products from the manufacturers listed are acceptable providing the product meets the requirements indicated.

1. Where a manufacturer is listed below for a specific product, it is to establish

a level of quality. Similar products of equal quality from the above listed manufacturers are acceptable.

B. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement 1. General a. Type: Ladder type, standard weight, galvanized. b. Width: Approximately 2 in. less than nominal wall thickness. c. Spacing: Continuous along horizontal joint, spaced 16 inches on

center vertically, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Longitudinal Wire a. Single Wythe Walls: 2 wires. C. Wire Mesh: Wire Mesh: 1/4" mesh of galvanized steel wire (min. 16 gage) or

galvanized metal lath, cut into strips 1-1/2" narrower than wall width where used. For use at intersection of masonry walls and as a grout stop.

D. Reinforcing Steel - Bond Beam and Wall Reinforcement: Uncoated steel

reinforcing bars; ASTM A615/A; ASTM A616, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A617/A, Grade 60.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrates, structure, and installation conditions. Do not proceed with

unit masonry work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete Masonry Units: Lay masonry units dry. Do not wet concrete masonry

units. B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. C. Coordination: Identify items that are to be built-in to masonry wall as specified in

other section of these specifications. Verify that these items are available prior to commencing masonry work in these areas. Coordinate sizes of required openings.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Build walls to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual

thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified.


B. Cut masonry units using motor-driven masonry saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full-size units without cutting wherever possible. Provide 100% solid units where webs would be exposed.

C. Construction Tolerance: Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602

and the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs,

reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than ¼” in 20 feet, nor ½” maximum.

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than ¼” in 10 feet, nor ½” maximum.

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than ¼” in 20 feet, nor ½” maximum.

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8”, with a maximum thickness limited to ½”. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8”.

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness by more than plus or minus 1/8”. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8”.

D. Openings: Form all chases and openings required for piping and other trades.

After work is completed, close openings with masonry and seal around penetration.

3.04 ERECTION - CONCRETE MASONRY A. Masonry 1. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with

uniform joint widths, and to properly locate returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less than half-size units at corners, jambs and other locations.

2. Lay up walls plumb and true to comply with specified tolerance. Provide courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.

3. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than 4" of horizontal face dimensions at corners.

4. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and slabs. Maintain 3/8" joint widths, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment.

5. Joints a. Exposed: Cut flush and finish (tool) with hardened metal tool to

form a concave compressed joint. Same methods and types of tools to be used by all masons working on project.

b. Concealed: Cut flush and trowel point.


B. Horizontal Wall Reinforcement: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement

as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches

.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall

openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

3. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

5. Provide additional reinforcement continuous in first joint above openings and in first joint below openings not extending to floor. Extend additional reinforcement a minimum of 4'-0" beyond opening.

C. Bond Beams and Block Cores: Reinforce as indicated and fill with grout. 1. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other

materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes.

2. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Place horizontal reinforcement as the masonry work progresses.

a. Use "Fine Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling spaces less than 4" in one or both horizontal directions.

b. Use "Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling spaces 4" to 10" in both horizontal directions.

c. Use 3000 psi concrete for filling spaces 10" or larger in both horizontal directions.

D. Door Frames: Fill all frames installed in masonry with mortar. E. Bearing Points: Where a lintel, beam or similar member bears directly on concrete

masonry, fill the cores of the two blocks courses directly under the member with grout to a limit of 16 inches beyond the end of the member.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place

a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. G. Control and Expansion Joints: Provide control joints for exterior and interior

masonry construction in accordance with NCMA-TEK Bulletins 10-1A and 10-2B. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide control joints in masonry walls at

maximum 30 foot intervals for interior walls, and at intersections of walls,


except corners. a. Exact locations as determined by the Architect if not specifically

dimensioned. b. If drawings do not indicate all control joints based on these

maximums, allow for additional joints to be determined by the Architect prior to commencement of masonry work.

c. Locate control at steel columns. 2. Provide 3/8" wide control joints, unless otherwise indicated. For interior

control joints, no filler is required; rake joint approximately 3/4" deep and install sealant and backup. See Section 07 92 00, Sealants.

3. Do not carry horizontal joint reinforcement through control joint. 4. Maintain lateral support of continuous wall at control joint by using control

joint filler, tongue and groove type control joint block, or similar type approved method.

5. Maintain lateral support of intersecting interior masonry walls with wire mesh ties placed across joint between walls, spaced 16" on-center vertically.

H. Masonry, non-bearing walls carried to structure above: Terminate at normal joint

width below surface and leave joint open for sealants.

1. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 07 84 00, Firestopping.

I. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length

for one-half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.

J. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this

and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

K. Steel Lintels: Install steel lintels at all masonry opening, whether indicated on the

drawings or not. Provide minimum bearing of 8” an each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

3.05 MORTAR A. General 1. Batch Size: Controlled so that all material used within two (2) hours. 2. Mortar on Board a. Keep well tempered with water so long as its cementing material

has not started to set. b. Do not retemper if initial set of cementing material has been

reached, or if mortar has stiffened greatly. 3. Anti-freeze Admixture: Not permitted.


B. Mixing 1. Machine mix dry in a batch mixer with care taken in adding water to mix to

avoid overwetting. 2. Do not retamper in mixer at any time. 3. Continue mixing for a minimum of five (5) minutes after all materials are in

mixer. C. Recharging: Completely empty and clean mixer before recharging. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Brace all walls while in green condition.

B. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover

securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance

of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source

quality-control testing indicated below: 1. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done

at Contractor’s expense.

B. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

C. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C780.

D. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C1019.

3.08 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or

otherwise damaged. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. During the tooling of joints, enlarge all voids or holes, and completely fill with

mortar. Point up all joints at corners to provide a neat, uniform appearance.


C. Cleaning – Concrete Masonry: During construction of exposed CMU, minimize

mortar and grout smears on exposed surfaces. Dry brush CMU surfaces at the end of each days work and after final pointing. Remove mortar stains and dirt from exposed surfaces.

1. Cleaning Solutions: Where cleaning solutions are required, they shall be

provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Cleaning solutions must be approved by Architect and spot tested prior to use.

D. Area Cleaning: Clean floors of all mortar droppings, including floor surfaces of

accessible chases. 3.09 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Disposal as Fill Material: When approved by Geotechnical Engineer, dispose of

clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for

each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 31 30 00, Earthwork. All fill material must be approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be

used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 05 12 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Work Included: Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with or properly incidental to furnishing, fabrication, delivery, and erection of structural steel complete, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Structural steel columns, girders, beams, angles, rigid frames, trusses, shelf angles, angle frames for openings in floors and roofs, steel crane rails and stops, steel plates, miscellaneous deck support angles, connections and component parts.

2. Qualification of welders. 3. Shop prime coat of paint and field touch-up painting.

B. Extent of structural steel work is shown on Drawings including schedules, notes and details to show sizes and locations of members, typical connections and types of steel required.

C. Include all supplementary parts and members necessary to complete structural steel work, regardless of whether all such parts are definitely shown or specified and furnish all such bolts, gussets, plates, etc., as may be required for proper assembly of all items. Include miscellaneous deck support angles as required for proper support of metal floor deck around columns, gussets, openings, and obstructions.

D. Connection Design:

1. All typical beam to column and beam to beam connections are detailed and shown on the Construction Documents. The Contractor is to comply with these details.

2. Where indicated, truss, bracing connections and special or non-typical structural steel beam connections shall be designed by the fabricator, in accordance with criteria on Drawings. Fabricator-designed connections shall be submitted together with complete calculations for review for acceptability by the Architect.

E. Substitutions:

1. Proposed substitutions of sections or modification of details, and reasons therefor, shall be submitted with shop drawings for review. Submitted


substitutions must be clearly identified and noted as such. Approved substitutions, modifications, and necessary changes in related portions of work shall be coordinated by fabricator and shall be accomplished at no additional cost to Owner.

2. Substitutions to the beam to column and beam to beam connections shown on the drawings will be reviewed for acceptability if submitted with calculations prepared by a licensed professional engineer.

F. Responsibility for Errors: Fabricator shall be responsible for all errors of detailing, fabrications, and for correct fitting of structural steel members.

G. Templates: Shall be furnished by fabricator with instructions for setting of anchor bolts and bearing plates.

H. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:

1. Testing laboratory services for verification of quality: Section 01 45 29. 2. Embedded metal assemblies: Section 03 20 00. 3. Metal roof decking: Section 05 31 23. 4. Metal floor decking and shear studs: Section 05 31 13. 5. Cold-formed metal framing: Section 05 40 00. 6. Metal fabrications: Section 05 50 00. 7. Metal stairs: Section 05 51 00. 8. Applied fireproofing: Section 07 81 00. 9. Painting: Section 09 90 00. 10. Sustainable construction for LEED requirements: Section 01 81 13.


A. Latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply, unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between Contract Documents and a referenced standard, Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between Contract Documents and Building Code, more stringent shall govern.

B. Contractor shall furnish fabrication/erection inspection and testing of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter 6. Submit records of inspections and tests to Owner's testing laboratory for their review.

C. Fabricator shall have developed a detailed fabrication procedural manual reflecting key quality control procedures used in fabrication process and shall provide a copy of the manual for examination by Owner's testing laboratory.

D. Fabricator shall employ a competent technician, engineer or independent testing laboratory to inspect fabrication work to ensure compliance with Contract Documents and shall identify such inspector to Owner's testing laboratory. Inspector shall examine in the shop all welding, bolting, shear studs, painting, galvanizing, and straightness and alignment of fabricated members.

E. Testing Laboratory Services for Verification of Quality: Refer to Section 01 45 29.

F. All materials, fabrication procedures, and field erection are subject to verification inspection and testing by Owner's testing laboratory, in both shop and field.


Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. Owner reserves the right to use ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to verify adequacy of all welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall be as specified in AWS D1.1. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply.

G. Qualifications for Welding Work: Contractor shall be responsible for qualifying welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." Provide certification, to Owner's testing laboratory, that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests and are currently qualified. Welders who have changed employers or who have not performed the designated weld for a period of 6 months or longer since the last qualification shall be retested. If requalification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility.

H. Qualifications of Welding Procedures: Contractor shall provide testing laboratory with welding procedures which are to be used in executing this work. Welding procedures shall be qualified prior to use in accordance with AWS D1.1, Part B.

I. Comply with Provisions of the Following Codes, Specifications and Standards, in Addition to Building Code:

1. AISC, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," including

"Commentary" and Supplements thereto, as issued. 3. AISC, "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490

Bolts," approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation.

4. AISC, "Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel." 5. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code." 6. ASTM A 6, "Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled

Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling." 7. Industrial Fasteners Institute, "Handbook on Bolt, Nut, and Rivet

Standards." 8. Steel structure painting council:

a. Painting manual, vol. 1, Good Painting Practice. b. Painting manual, vol. 2, Systems Specifications.

J. Qualifications:

1. Structural steel fabricator shall comply with one of the following: a. Structural steel fabricator shall have not less than 10 years

experience in fabrication of structural steel for buildings and shall be currently certified under the AISC Certification Standard for Steel Building Structures. Submit proof of certification with bid.

b. An otherwise qualified fabricator who is not a member of the AISC Quality Certification Program may be acceptable if satisfactory evidence of qualifications is submitted prior to contract award. For non-certified fabricators, Contractor shall submit, for consideration, a resume describing plant size, equipment, quality control procedures and personnel, and experience on comparable


work in the last 3 years. Final acceptability shall be subject to approval of the Architect.

2. Structural steel erector shall have not less than 5 years experience in erection of comparable structures and shall be currently certified under the AISC Certified Steel Erector (CSE) category.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions, including laboratory test reports and other data, to show compliance with Specifications for the following products.

1. Structural steel primer paint. 2. Shrinkage-resistant grout. 3. Shear studs.

B. Mill Certificates: Submit for Architect's record certificates of mill analysis showing compliance with Specifications for the following products:

1. Structural steel (each type). 2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 3. Shear studs.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. All typical beam to column and beam to beam connections are detailed and shown on the Contract Documents. The Contractor is to comply with these connection details. If the Contractor would like to substitute a connection, it shall be submitted in accordance with the specified procedure for substitutions, with calculations prepared by a licensed professional engineer.

2. Submit shop drawings of all structural steel, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, erection plans and details, procedures, and diagrams showing sequence of erection. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld.

3. Submit design calculations for the non typical beam, truss and bracing connections that are designed by the fabricator. Calculations shall bear seal of a Licensed Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Texas. Calculations shall show applied loads and reference applicable piece mark from the shop drawings as well as location or mark from structural drawings.

4. Structural steel members for which shop drawings have not been reviewed shall not be fabricated. Architect's review shall cover general locations, spacings, and details of design. Omission from shop drawings of any materials required by Contract Documents shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials, even though such shop drawings may have been reviewed and returned.

5. Submit setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by other trades.


D. Certification: Submit evidence of current AISC plant certification (see "Qualifications").

E. Documentation for LEED Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled content. Indicate percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

F. Documentation for LEED Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: For products that are extracted, harvested or recovered and manufactured from within 500 miles of Project. Indicate location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw or recycled material. Include statement indicating costs for each product that is regionally extracted, harvested or recovered and manufactured.

G. Documentation for LEED Credit EQ 4.1 and 4.2: Paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, stains, caulk, firestopping, etc. ((inside the weatherproofing systems and)) applied on site only in this specification must comply with the VOC limits in Section ((01352)). Include product data sheet or MSDS clearly showing VOC content of product in grams/Liter.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay that work.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

C. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

D. Support cambered members during shipment and handling in a manner which will not result in loss of camber.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate erection of structural steel with work of other trades.

B. Do not install columns which have embeds or anchor bolts in concrete until concrete members have attained their 28 day compressive strengths.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL



B. All paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, stains, caulk, firestopping, etc. applied ((inside the weatherproofing systems and)) on site only in this specification must comply with the VOC limits in Section ((018113)). In submittal, include product data sheet or MSDS clearly showing VOC content of product in grams/Liter.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes.

B. Steel:

1. Wide flange (W) shapes and tees: ASTM A 992 (50 ksi yield). 2. Other rolled shapes, plates, and bars: ASTM A 36 (36 ksi yield). 3. Hollow structural sections (HSS or TS): ASTM A 500, Grade B, (46,000

psi yield for square shapes and 42,000 psi for round shapes). 4. Steel pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B (35,000 psi yield). 5. For ASTM A6/A6M rolled shapes having flanges thicker than 2” (spliced

or otherwise) connected by full penetration welds, provide material with Charpy V-Notch testing in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S30, Charpy V-Notch Impact Test for Structural Shapes – Alternate Core Location. Impact test shall meet a minimum average value of 20 foot-pounds absorbed energy at 70° F.

6. For plates exceeding 2" thickness used in built-up members, which are spliced or connected by full penetration welds, provide material with Charpy V-Notch testing in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S5, Charpy V-Notch Impact Test. Impact test shall be conducted by producer in accordance with ASTM A673/A673M, Frequency P, and shall meet a minimum average value of 20 foot-pounds absorbed energy at 70° F.

C. Bolts and Washers:

1. Anchor bolts: Anchor bolts (or anchor rods) for anchoring to concrete shall conform to ASTM F1554, 36 KSI yield strength, and to requirements for regular hexagon bolts and nuts of ANSI Standards B18.2.1 and B18.2.2. Washers for anchor bolts shall be oversize or plate washers as specified, with a hole 1/16 inch larger than the bolt diameter.

2. All bolts for connections shall be high strength bolts conforming to ASTM A 325. Dimensions of bolt heads and nuts shall conform to requirements for heavy hexagon nuts of ANSI Standards B18.2.1 and B18.2.2. Nuts shall be ASTM A 563 material.

3. Washers: Flat and smooth circular hardened washers conforming to requirements of ASTM F 436. Beveled washers for "S" shapes and channels shall be square or rectangular, taper in thickness, and smooth. Washers for use with high-strength bolts shall be hardened.

4. Direct tension indicator washers for high-strength bolts in friction connections shall conform to ASTM F 959, Type A 325.

5. Tension control (twist off) bolts may, at Contractor's option, be used in


lieu of conventional high-strength bolts. Tension control bolts shall conform to ASTM F 1852 with A 325 marking.

6. Drilled Expansion Bolts in Concrete Shall Be One of the Following, except where a specific product is specified on the drawings: Strong-Bolt 2, Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA Power-Stud+SD1, Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY Kwik Bolt TZ, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK

7. Drilled Screw Anchors for Structural Applications in Concrete Shall Be One of the Following, except where a specific product is specified on the drawings: Titen HD, Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA Wedge-Bolt+, Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY Kwik HUS EZ, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK Drilled Screw Anchors are only allowed in interior conditions.

8. Drilled Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Shall Be One of the Following Anchoring Systems, except where a specific product is specified on the drawings, and shall qualify as low VOC materials under LEED requirements: SET-XP Epoxy Anchoring System, Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA PE1000+ Standard Set Adhesive Anchoring System, Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY HIT-HY200 Adhesive Anchoring System, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK HIT-RE500-SD Adhesive Anchoring System, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK A manufacturer’s representative shall be present during initial installation to provide onsite training of installers. Installation of Drilled Adhesive Anchors shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions (MPII) and shall be performed by personnel trained to install adhesive anchors. Where installation of adhesive anchors is horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads, the installing personnel shall be certified in accordance with the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program, or equivalent. In the case of a cored hole, a wet hole, or a hole deeper than 18 inches, substitute a slow cure epoxy adhesive or other appropriate product recommended by the manufacturer for the special application.

D. Welding electrodes shall conform to requirements of Specifications of American Welding Society. Use E70 electrodes. For high-strength, low-alloy steel, provide electrodes, welding rods, and filler metals equal in strength and compatible in appearance with parent metal joined.

E. Primer Paint:

1. Standard shop coat of primer, meeting requirements of "SSPC-Paint 15", Type I, applied to a dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

F. Zinc-coating: For galvanized steel shall conform to ASTM A 123, threaded products shall conform to ASTM A 153, Class C and sheet steel shall conform to ASTM A 591.


G. Cold Galvanizing Compound: "ZRC Zero VOC Cold Galvanizing Compound," by ZRC Chemical Products Co., Marshfield, MA. Coating shall qualify as low VOC material under LEED 2009 requirements.

H. Slide Bearings: Reinforced teflon, factory prebonded to steel plates with initial static coefficient of friction not exceeding 0.06 at interface, over a working stress range of 500 to 2000 psi. Bearing shall be one of the following:

1. "Fluorogold" slide bearings, by Fluorocarbon Co., Pine Brook, N.J. 2. "Con-Slide" slide bearings, by Con-Serv, Inc., Georgetown, SC.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly:

1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings.

2. Provide camber in members where indicated. Specified camber applies at jobsite, just prior to erection, lying down flat so that member weight has no effect. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to prevent or compensate for camber loss during shipment. Measured camber in members up to 50'-0" long shall be within a tolerance of -0" to +1/2" from amount specified. For members greater than 50'-0" long, both positive and negative tolerance may increase 1/8" for every 10'-0" of length in excess of 50'-0". Members with a field measured camber outside of specified tolerance shall be returned to shop.

3. If heat is used to camber steel beams, it shall be carefully controlled and applied in a manner which will not alter the material properties of the member, and only in the presence of the testing laboratory. Follow AISC recommendations for heat cambering.

4. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

5. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.

6. Splicing of structural steel members is prohibited without prior approval of Architect. Any member having a splice not shown and detailed on approved shop drawings shall be rejected.

7. Members in compression joints which depend on contact bearing shall have bearing surfaces milled to a common plane. Members to be milled shall be completely assembled before milling.

8. Plates shall be free of gross internal discontinuities such as ruptures and delaminations. Plates shall comply with ASTM A 578, Level 1.

9. Mill tolerances: Comply with ASTM A 6. 10. Fabrication tolerances: Comply with AISC Code of Standard Practice.

B. Connections:

1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated on Drawings.


2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. Provide specified threaded fasteners for all principle bolted connections. Holes for bolted connections shall be drilled or punched at right angles to member. Slope of surfaces under bolt head and nut shall not exceed 1:20. Provide beveled washers where slopes exceed 1:20. Bolt holes shall have a diameter not greater than 1/16" larger than nominal bolt diameter. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge by burning. Provide washers over all slotted holes in an outer ply.

3. High-strength bolted construction: Install in accordance with AISC, "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts," (RCRBSJ).

4. Welded construction: Comply with AWS Structural Welding Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds and methods used in correcting welding work. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which produce true alignment of axes without warp. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds designed to develop full strength of member. No combination of bolts and welds shall be used for stress transmission at the same face of any connections.

5. Heavy shapes (ASTM A6, rolled shapes having flanges thicker than 2”, and built-up sections containing plates thicker than 2"): Comply with all special requirements for welding heavy shapes contained in the AISC Specification and in AWS Structural Welding Code.

6. Clean completed welds prior to inspection. Slag shall be removed from completed welds, and adjacent base metal shall be cleaned by brushing or other suitable means. Tightly adherent splatter remaining after cleaning is acceptable unless its removal is required for the purpose of nondestructive testing.

7. For high-strength, low-alloy steels follow welding procedures recommended by steel producer for exposed and concealed connections.

8. Base plates where exposed to view: Hole sizes for anchor bolts shall be as follows: Bolts 3/4" to 7/8" diameter - 5/16" oversize Bolts 1" to 2" diameter - 1/2" oversize Bolts over 2" diameter - 1" oversize Use circular oversize washers under nut at all oversized holes in base plates. Washers must be large enough to cover entire hole. Washer thickness shall be at least 1/6 of bolt diameter.


9. Base plates where not exposed to view: Hole sizes for anchor bolts may be oversized to facilitate erection as follows:

Anchor Bolt Diameter

Base Plate Hole Diameter

Min. Washer Diameter

Min. Washer Thickness

3/4 1 5/16 2 1/4

7/8 1 9/16 2 1/2 5/16

1 1 13/16 3 3/8

1 1/4 2 1/16 3 1/2

1 1/2 2 5/16 3 1/2 1/2

1 3/4 2 3/4 4 5/8

2 3 1/4 5 3/4

2 1/2 3 3/4 5 1/2 7/8

All sizes are in inches. Plates used as washers may be square ASTM A 36 plate with sides equal to given diameter. (Ref. Table 14-2, AISC LRFD 3rd Ed.)

C. Steel Wall Framing: Select members which are true and straight for fabrication. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing.

D. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

E. Zinc-coating: Following Steel Shall be Galvanized:

1. Picnic Shelter structure.

F. Members and parts to be galvanized shall be detailed by the fabricator and fabricated to provide for flow and drainage of pickling fluids and zinc and to prevent pressure build-up in enclosed parts. Comply with ASTM A123, A153, A384, A385, and A780 for information on design and detailing of galvanized members. Modifications for galvanizing, including holes, shall be shown and noted on the shop drawings so that impact on member designs can be evaluated by the reviewer.

2.04 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop paint structural steel, except members or portions of members to receive a galvanized coating or members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial


2" of embedded areas only.

1. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded. 2. Do not paint surfaces which are scheduled to receive sprayed-on

fireproofing. 3. Do not paint surfaces of exposed high-strength, low-alloy steel members

(weathering steel). 4. Do not paint top surface of beams which support composite metal floor

deck. 5. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly

or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel to be painted. Remove loose rust, mill scale, spatter, and slag or flux deposits. Clean in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:

1. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SP-3 “Power Tool Cleaning” on members in enclosed air conditioned spaces.

2. SP-6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning" for the following steel: All members exposed to weather Architecturally exposed members All members in nonconditioned spaces All members in crawlspaces All members in swimming pool area

3. SP-10 "Near-White Blast Cleaning" for high-strength, low-alloy steel surfaces to avoid uneven oxidation.

C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness as specified. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Erector must examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify Contractor of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.

3.02 ERECTION

A. General: Comply with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified.

B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing:

1. Provide adequate shoring and bracing to safely withstand all loads to which structure may be subjected during construction process including wind loads, dead loads, construction material, and equipment loads. Such bracing shall remain in place as long as required for safety.

2. As erection progresses, make a sufficient number of permanent welded


or bolted connections to withstand erection stresses and maintain stability.

3. Design of temporary shoring and bracing shall be responsibility of Contractor.

C. Temporary Planking: Provide planking and working platforms, as necessary, to effectively complete work.

D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors in accurate locations. Refer to Division 3 of these Specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation.

E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.

1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates, for structural members, on leveling nuts, steel wedges or steel shims.

2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members are positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

F. Field Assembly:

1. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

2. Level and plumb individual members of structure within tolerances defined by AISC Code for Standard Practice, unless closer tolerances are required for proper fitting of adjoining or enclosing materials, in which case the most stringent shall apply.

3. Set horizontal members with their natural camber (or specified camber) up.

4. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.

5. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on final shop drawing.

6. Where parts cannot be assembled or fitted properly, as a result of errors in fabrication or of deformation due to handling or transportation, such condition shall be immediately reported to Architect, along with proposed method of correction. Straightening of bends or warps shall be done by approved methods. Bent or damaged heat-treated parts will be rejected.

7. Fastening of splices in compression members shall be done after abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact.


G. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. On non-exposed welded construction, erection bolts shall be tightened securely and left in place, or if removed, holes shall be filled with plug welds.

H. Bolted Connections:

1. High-strength bolts shall be installed in conformance with "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

2. A 307 bolts and high-strength (A 325 and A 490) bolts noted to be "snug-tight" shall be tightened using a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench, bringing plies into snug contact. Tension control bolts, if used, may be tightened to their full design tension.

3. High-strength bolts which are not specifically designated to be "snug-tight" shall be tightened to provide at least the minimum tension shown in Table 4 of "Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 and A 490 Bolts." Tightening shall be done by turn-of-the-nut method, with direct tension indicators, or by properly calibrated wrenches. Torque control bolts shall be tightened with torque control wrench until spline twists off.

4. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled. All joint surfaces shall be free of burrs, dirt and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of parts.

5. Faying surfaces of "slip-critical" connections, as defined in "Specification for Structural Joints" or on Drawings, shall have all paint removed by blast cleaning.

6. Bolts tightened by calibrated wrench or torque control shall have a hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt head) turned in tightening.

7. Hardened washers shall be placed over slotted holes in an outer ply. Hardened beveled washers shall be used where outer face of bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20 with respect to bolt axis.

I. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Structural Welding Code and AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Pay particular attention to surface preparation, preheating, sequence, and continuity of welds. Where heavy shapes are to be welded, comply with all special requirements of AISC Specification and AWS Structural Welding Code.

J. Field Grinding of Exposed Welds: All visible field welds shall be ground smooth unless otherwise indicated.

K. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

L. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

M. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members


which are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

N. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with same materials as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray, to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.5 mils for each coat.

O. Touch-up Cold Galvanizing: Immediately after erection, touch-up areas of hot-dip galvanized members where galvanizing has been abraded during shipping and erection and where it has been removed or damaged due to welding. Apply specified cold galvanizing compound by brush or spray in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.5 to 3.5 mils.

3.03 CLEANUP

A. Clean up all debris caused by work of this Section, keeping the area clean and neat at all times.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 05 31 13 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center STEEL FLOOR DECKING AND SHEAR STUDS

SECTION 05 31 13

STEEL FLOOR DECKING AND SHEAR STUDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this Section.


A. Work Included: Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with or properly incidental to furnishing, fabrication, delivery, and installation of metal floor decking and field welded shear studs complete, including but not limited to the following:

1. Metal floor deck installed. 2. Field welded shear studs installed. 3. Sheet metal flashing around columns. 4. Sheet metal end closures. 5. Inserts to attach ceiling hangers. 6. Cleaning top flange of all supporting steel beams. 7. Sheet metal edge forms.


1. Structural steel: Section 05 12 00. 2. Miscellaneous metal: Section 05 50 00. 3. Laboratory testing and inspection: Section 01 45 29. 4. Sustainable construction for LEED requirements: Section 01 81 13.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings to Architect for review prior to fabrication. Show deck layout, spacing and location of all shear studs, and locate all necessary accessories required to prevent leakage and to contain the concrete. Indicate where shoring of metal floor decking is required. Omission from shop drawings of any material shown on Contract Drawings or called for by these Specifications shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing and installing such materials, even though such shop drawings may have been reviewed and returned by Architect.

B. Shear Studs: Submit, for Architect's record, test results of studs welded directly through specified metal deck, establishing studs' ability to provide allowable shear load specified in Section 1.11.5, of the AISC Specifications, for the stud diameters specified.


C. LEED Documentation Submittals: These submittals are to be submitted one time with related submittals and/or if any changes exist during construction.

1. Credit MR4.1 and 4.2: Provide a final summary at the end of construction documenting total recycled content in building materials. a. Product Data and certification letter indicating percentages by

weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

b. Letter Template as appropriate to submittal content with actual values input.

2. Credit MR5 and 5.2: Provide a final summary at the end of construction documenting total regional materials used: a. Product Data indicating location of material manufacturer for

regionally manufactured materials. 1) Include statement indicating cost, and distance from

manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured material.

2) Include statement indicating cost, and distance from point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to Project for each raw material used.


1.04 LABORATORY TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Refer to Section 01 45 29, for testing laboratory services.

B. Quality and installation of metal floor decking and shear studs are subject to testing and inspection by an independent testing laboratory. Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and installation procedures in compliance with specified requirements. Promptly remove and replace materials which do not comply.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


B. Deck units shall be classified by Underwriter's Laboratory, Inc. Each unit or bundle shall be labeled and marked as required by (UL), indicating manufacturer testing and inspection.

C. Deck units shall be approved by the International Code Council (ICC) and shall have a corresponding ICC-ES report.


D. Deck units shall be formed, with integral locking lugs or embossments, to provide a mechanical lock between steel floor and concrete slab.

E. Minimum gauge of metal deck shall be as indicated on Drawings. Contractor may, at his option, use a heavier gauge to accommodate construction loads or to reduce shoring requirements, if any.

F. Sections have been selected to support the weight of wet concrete, plus a live load of 20 psf on normal 3-span conditions without any intermediate shoring, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Install shoring as required wherever metal deck will be subjected to heavier than normal loads during construction, such as at thicker slab areas and curbs, and wherever spans exceed the normal design span for deck.

H. Sections and calculation of deck properties shall conform to American Iron and Steel Institute's, "Specification for the Design of Light Gauge, Cold-Formed, Steel Structural Members."

I. Load carrying capacity of metal deck shall be at least equal to deck sections indicated on Drawings. Deck load carrying capacity shall be provided in ICC-ES reports.

2.02 NON-CELLULAR STEEL DECK UNITS

A. Sheet steel for galvanized floor deck and accessories shall conform to ASTM A 653, structural quality. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 924 with a minimum coating class of G 60.

B. Sheet steel for painted floor deck and accessories shall conform to ASTM A 611. Coating shall be 2 coats of thermo-setting enamel on exposed side.

C. Deck type, depth, gauge, and yield strength shall be as indicated on Drawings.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. End closures, edge forms and flashing shall be furnished in the same material and with the same coating as specified for floor deck. Minimum gauge shall be 20, but not less than required to hold shape as a form for concrete. Edge form shall be furnished with 1" return lip at top.

2.04 SHEAR STUDS

A. Shear Studs: Shall be a shear connector with proper ferrules and accessories especially designed to create composite deck action between concrete deck and supporting beam. Steel for studs shall conform to requirements of "Specifications for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality," ASTM A 108, Grades 1015-1020, with a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. Studs shall be of uniform diameter with heads concentric and normal to shaft; and the weld end shall be chamfered and solid flux. Shear studs shall be approved by Engineer.

2.05 SPRAYED FIREPROOFING


A. Underside of units used as electrical raceways shall receive sprayed fireproofing as specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION OF METAL DECK

A. Top of all supporting steel beams shall be cleaned of all debris and foreign matter.

B. Steel deck shall be fabricated to span over 4 or more supports (over 3 spans) where possible. Each unit shall be properly positioned and brought to rest tightly on supporting beam before being permanently fastened. Ends of units shall abut and shall not be overlapped. Flutes shall align at butt joints.

C. Where shoring is required by Drawings or manufacturer's recommendations, it shall be supported from the bottom flanges of beams, not from floor below. Shoring shall be wood or steel, designed by the Contractor to safely support all dead loads and construction loads and limit midspan deflection of the deck to l/240 between beams.

D. Metal deck shall, in general, be fastened to steel framework by welding shear studs through the deck. If field welded shear studs through metal deck are not called for in schedule or on Drawings, deck shall be welded to steel framework by puddle welds not less than 3/4" diameter, spaced not more than 1'-0". Where shear stud spacing exceeds specified maximum deck weld spacing, use additional puddle welds at 1'-0" spacing between studs. Where two units abut, either end-to-end or side-to-side each shall be so fastened to steel framing.

E. Sides of adjacent units shall be joined by welding 1" long fusion welds or button punching at a maximum spacing of 3'-0" between supports.

F. At all open ends install all necessary end closures required to prevent leakage of concrete. Tack weld at not more than 2'-0" on center. Sheet metal edge form shall bear at least 1 1/2" on beam flange and shall be welded with 2" long welds at 1'-0" maximum spacing. Cut edge form around columns, pockets, embeds, and offsets as required and weld in place.

G. Install sheet metal flashing around columns, gussets, posts, and other projections as required to prevent leakage of concrete.

H. Apply 2" wide tape to butt joints between cellular deck units, immediately after deck installation.

I. Do not hang sprinkler pipes or other equipment directly from metal deck. Fastening method for all hangers shall be designed by trade requiring them, unless specifically shown, and shall be submitted to Architect for review.

3.02 CUTTING AND DRILLING STEEL FLOOR DECK

A. Holes smaller than 5" in diameter required for passage of other work or for


attachment to subfloors, shall be made by respective trade involved.

B. Where holes or openings 5" in diameter and larger are required in subfloors, such holes shall be made by respective trades requiring them. Reinforcing for these openings shall be supplied by these trades and reinforcing details shall be submitted to Architect for approval.

3.03 ERECTION OF SHEAR STUDS

A. Shear studs shall be automatically end welded in the field, through the deck, in accordance with Specifications of shear stud manufacturer.

B. Adequate welding power must be available for stud being welded. Special Power Pact Rectifier furnished by the stud manufacturer that will provide adequate power shall be used.

C. Studs shall not be applied to galvanized members. Either shop weld studs before galvanizing or grind off galvanizing.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 05 31 23 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center STEEL ROOF DECKING

SECTION 05 31 23

STEEL ROOF DECKING

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Work Included: Furnish all materials, supplies, equipment, tools, transportation and facilities, and perform all labor and services required in connection with or incidental to steel roof decking, as described in this Section of Specifications, shown on Drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. Include all reinforcing plates, sump pans, edge closures, pour stops, and related accessories.


1. Structural steel: Section 05 12 00. 2. Miscellaneous metals: Section 05 50 00. 3. Laboratory inspection: Section 01 45 29. 4. Sustainable construction for LEED requirements: Section 01 81 13.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Steel deck installer shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience, 2 successful projects of a comparable size and scope to this project and be approved by the steel deck supplier.


A. Refer to Section 01 45 29 for testing laboratory services.

B. Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated or specified:

1. "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks," by the Steel Deck Institute (SDI).

2. "Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members," by American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).

3. "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel," by the American Welding Society (AWS D1.3).

D. Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and operators in


accordance with AWS D1.3 procedures. Each welder must pass the welder qualification test for metal deck.

E. Underwriters Label: Provide steel deck units which are listed and conform to UL "Fire Resistance Directory," with each deck unit bearing the UL label and marking for specific system detailed. Provide units and construction which are found in UL "Building Materials Directory" and conforming to UL Uplift Class 90 construction.

F. ICC: Provide deck units rated by the International Code Council.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certification: Submit specifications and installation instructions for each type of deck specified. Also, submit a certificate of product compliance with SDI, UL, and ICC standards, as specified. Manufacturer's data shall include cross-sectional and material properties, uplift resistance, and diaphragm strength.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings showing type of deck, complete layout, attachment details, closures, edge strips, supplementary framing, and all other accessories. Show supporting members, splices, lap lengths, openings, and deck dimensions on layout. Indicate deck gauge, coating, swaging, and type of side lap. Show attachment using standard AWS welding symbols and weld washer requirements. Show methods of installing hangers, flashing and accessories, including reinforcement at openings.

C. Insurance Certification: Assist Architect and Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as necessary in connection with fire, windstorm, and extended coverage insurance.

D. LEED Documentation Submittals: These submittals are to be submitted one time with related submittals and/or if any changes exist during construction.

1. Credit MR4.1 and 4.2: Provide a final summary at the end of construction documenting total recycled content in building materials. a. Product Data and certification letter indicating percentages by

weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.


2. Credit MR5 and 5.2: Provide a final summary at the end of construction documenting total regional materials used: a. Product Data indicating location of material manufacturer for

regionally manufactured materials. 1) Include statement indicating cost, and distance from

manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured material.

2) Include statement indicating cost, and distance from point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to Project for each raw material used.

b. Letter Template as appropriate to submittal content with actual


values input.

E. LEED 2009 for Healthcare Documentation Submittals: These submittals are to be submitted one time with related submittals and/or if any changes exist during construction.

1. LEED 2009 for Healthcare MRc3: Provide a final summary at the end of construction documenting total pre- and post-consumer recycled content in building materials and total materials sourced (extracted) and manufactured within 500 miles of project site. a. For products with recycled content, provide product data and

certification letter indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content.

b. For products with regionally sourced/manufactured materials, provide Product Data and certification letter indicating cost, and distance from point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to Project for each raw material and final manufactured product used.

c. Provide complete and accurate Material Green Sheets as appropriate to submittal content with actual values input (including transportation and taxes, excluding installation and labor).

d.

1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, handle and install steel deck and accessories so as not to damage or deform. Failure to wirebrush and paint rusted areas immediately upon detection shall be cause for rejection. Stack deck, stored at site, on platforms or pallets and cover with tarpaulins or other suitable covering to provide weathertight enclosure, while affording proper air circulation. Do not use deck for storage or as a working platform until sheets have been securely fastened in position. Do not damage or overload during entire construction period. Any deck damaged in shipping, unloading, or erection is cause for rejection.

1.07 INSPECTION

A. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing by Owner's testing laboratory. Expense of removing and replacing portions of decking for testing purposes will be borne by Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and replace with new acceptable work. Cost of such removal and replacement shall be borne by Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS


B. Roof Deck: Shall be steel deck of type, depth, and gauge shown on Drawings


and shall conform to Steel Deck Institute's Roof Deck Specifications. Provide deck units with nested side laps. Sheet steel for galvanized roof deck and accessories shall conform to ASTM A 653, structural quality, grade 33 or higher. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 653 with a minimum coating class of G-90.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers Include:

1. Epic Metals Corp. 2. Vulcraft/Division Nucor Corp. 3. Wheeling Corrugating Co. 4. CMC Joist and Deck (United Steel Deck) 5. CSI Metal Dek Group

D. Other manufacturers may be used only with Architect/Engineer approval.

E. Provide 18 gauge steel plates at vents and other openings in deck and 14 gauge sump pans at roof drains. Provide 18 gauge metal closures where indicated or required.

F. Welding rods shall conform to American Welding Society "Specification for Iron and Steel Arc-Weld Electrodes." Use welding electrodes recommended by deck manufacturer.

G. Screws shall be self-drilling "TEKS" screws, by Illinois Tool Works, Inc., Buildex Div., of size indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION

A. General: Do not undertake laying of deck units until supporting members are completely in place. Lay and align units so as to maintain required number of units shown on shop drawings and to prevent stretching or contracting of sidelaps. Weld deck units to structural supports. End laps shall be a minimum of 2" and shall occur over supports.

B. Deck units shall be installed continuous over 3 or more spans.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Size, spacing, and location of welds and side lap connections shall be as indicated on Structural Drawings.

B. Welding sequence and procedure shall be coordinated with placing of units, and shall be shown on shop drawings prior to proceeding with work.

C. Weld metal fillers, sump pans, and closure pieces to deck.

D. Deck metal surrounding welds shall be completely intact after welding. Blow holes will be cause for rejection of work. Weld metal shall penetrate all plies of deck material at end laps and side joints and fuse to supporting steel. Weld through weld washers where required by note on the Drawings.


E. Field Painting: After erection, scarred areas on both sides of deck, including welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots, shall be wire brushed and touch-up painted. Touch-up deck with same type of coating as specified for deck.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP

A. Piecing and patching deck shall be avoided. Do not install deck units which are kinked, bent, torn, rusted or significantly damaged in any way.

B. Improper nesting along sides or ends shall not be permitted. Swaged ends, if used, must be placed on the correct side of non-swaged ends, so that units nest tightly.

C. Plan and lay out units so there is adequate contact bearing at all perimeter supports. Check frequently for squareness at intermediate strips, to assure proper fitting and connection of the last strip adjacent to walls, parapets, eaves and ridges. Where a rib occurs at an exterior side support, carefully bend the rib down to bear flat on the support and weld as specified.

D. Deck units having excessive penetrations shall be removed and replaced or have additional support angles installed.

E. Install all necessary accessories and provide a finished surface suitable for application of insulation and roofing. Deck units or installation deemed by Architect to be unsatisfactory shall be immediately removed and replaced or otherwise corrected, as directed by Architect, at no additional cost to Owner.

3.04 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Ceilings, lights, ducts and miscellaneous equipment shall not be hung directly from metal roof deck.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 05 50 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide miscellaneous metals as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

Work includes, but is not limited to: 1. Stairs; work includes design. 2. Loose steel lintels. 3. Steel railings and handrails; work includes design. 4. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 5. Miscellaneous steel members to be embedded in concrete. 6. Concrete filled steel pipe protection posts (pipe bollards). 7. Lavatory counter supports. 8. Locker room bench supports. 9. Supports above ceilings for ceiling hung items (folding partition, etc). 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Painting: Section 09 90 00. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Steel Construction Manual: American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). B. American Welding Society (AWS). 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 2. AWS D1.3 – Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and

Seamless. 3. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. 4. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5. ASTM A283 – Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. 6. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs Externally and Internally

Threaded Fasteners, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. 7. ASTM A325 – Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Strengthened, 120/105 KSI

Minimum Tensile Strength.


8. ASTM A500 – Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

9. ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.

10. ASTM A510 - General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel.

11. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.

12. ASTM A570 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality.

13. ASTM A611 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Structural Quality. 14. ASTM A780 - Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized

Coatings. D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI Z49.1 – Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (NAAMM). F. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 1. SSPC-SP1 - Solvent Cleaning 2. SSPC-SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning 3. SSPC-SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning 4. SSPC-SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning 5. SSPC-SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs and railings and ladders, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface

temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F

, material surfaces.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings - General: Submit for all items. B. Shop Drawings – Stairs and Handrails: Indicate in detail construction, gages of

metals, jointing, methods of installation, fastening and supports, location and sizes of welds, anchors, hangers and other pertinent information and data.


1. In addition, submit plans and details of stairs and handrails, drawn to scale not less than 1/4 inch per foot.

2. Shop drawings shall contain design, type of steel and load assumption, bearing the seal of a licensed professional engineer registered in the State of Texas.

C. Samples: Submit samples of materials or workmanship, if requested by the

Architect.

D. Stair manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with the Architectural Products Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer’s AMP 510 Metal Stairs Manual materials, construction and installation specification.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate and install metal items in accordance with applicable standards of AISC

and NAAMM. Welding and related procedures in accordance with AWS. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the

following:

1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to

minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

D. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set

in concrete or built into masonry for installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop

drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work.

1.08 COORDINATION A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set

in concrete or built into masonry for installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

1.09 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect from corrosion.


B. Store materials in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use in the work. C. Store packaged materials in their original unbroken package or container. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ferrous Metals 1. Steel Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM A36. 2. Steel Plates to be Bent or Cold Formed: ASTM A283, Grade C. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B, black standard weight. a. Pipe Bollards: Heavy weight, schedule 80. 4. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade A, cold-formed; or ASTM A501, hot-

formed. 5. Steel Sheets: Hot-rolled ASTM A570, Class 1, Grade 36; or cold-rolled

ASTM A611, Grade C, Type 1.

B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded

2.02 FASTENERS A. General 1. Provide fasteners of types as required for assembly and installation of

fabricated items. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners

for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941; Class Fe/Zn 5; at exterior walls.

B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Regular hexagon head type, externally and internally

threaded fasteners; include necessary nuts and plain hardened washers. Provide the following materials/finishes:

1. Steel: ASTM A307 Grade A bolts; A563 nuts. For members for support of

structural members or connection thereto, provide ASTM A325 bolts. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy

Group 1 C. Expansion Anchors: Stainless steel "DH Bolts" or "Ankr Tite" devices by WEJ-IT or

similar by REDHEAD, HILTI or SIMPSON. Length as required to provide minimum 2-1/2" embedment into sound masonry.

D. Adhesive Type Anchor Bolts – In Hollow CMU: Chemically grouted adhesive

anchor systems with nylon or stainless steel screen inserts. Use 1/2 inch diameter anchors, unless otherwise noted.


1. HIT HY20 Adhesive Anchors, HILTI, INC. 2. EPCON System, ITW/RAMSET/RED HEAD 3. Chem-Stud Adhesive Anchors, RAWLPLUG COMPANY, INC. 4. Simpson Set Epoxy- Tie Adhesive Anchors, SIMPSON STRONG- TIE

COMPANY, INC.

E. Adhesive Type Anchor Bolts - In solid grouted CMU and Concrete: Chemically grouted adhesive anchor systems. Use ¾ inch diameter anchors, unless otherwise noted.

1. HIT HY150 Adhesive Anchors, HILTI, INC. 2. EPCON System, ITW/RAMSET/REDHEAD 3. Chem-Stud Adhesive Anchors, POWERS FASTENERS, INC. 4. Simpson Set Epoxy-Tie Adhesive Anchors, SIMPSON STRONG-TIE

COMPANY, INC. F. Miscellaneous Fasteners 1. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. 2. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, ANSI B18.6.3. 3. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.1. 4. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B18.22.1 5. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing or spring wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class,

and style as required. 6. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, ANSI B18.21.1. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General 1. Workmanship a. Construct all items to ensure ease of installation and minimal field

adjustment. b. Use materials of size and thickness shown, or, if not shown, of

required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

c. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Grind crotches to 1/8” radius.

d. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth. 2. Field Measuring: Field measure all items required to obtain proper fit. 3. Exposed mill names and logos not permitted in finished work. B. Steel Stairs


1. General: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements shown: Join pieces together by welding unless otherwise indicated. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, railings, struts, clip brackets, bearing plates and other components for the support of stairs and platforms and as required to anchor and contain the stairs on supporting structure.

2. Design: Comply with all applicable building laws and ordinances. Stairs to be designed to sustain a live load of 100 psf and a concentrated load of 300 lbs. Sizes of members shown on drawings are minimums. Furnish heavier members if necessary to meet design requirements.

3. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms (landings) of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as shown. Bolt or weld headers to stringers and framing members to strings and headers; fabricate and join so bolts, if used, do not appear on finish surfaces.

4. Pan-Filled Stairs a. Metal Pan Risers, Subtreads, and Subplatforms (Landings): Shape

metal pans for risers and subtreads to conform to configuration shown. Provide thicknesses of structural steel sheet for metal pans indicated but not less than that required to support total design loading. Form metal pans of hot-rolled or cold-rolled carbon steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers by means of brackets made of steel angles. Weld brackets to strings and weld metal pans to brackets.

c. Provide subplatforms of configuration and constructions indicated, or if not indicated, of same metal as risers and subtreads and in thicknesses required to support design loading. Attach subplatform to platform framing members with welds.

C. Handrail/Guardrail: Fabricate as indicated on the drawings. 1. Material: Steel pipe or shapes as detailed; meeting the requirements

specified herein for the specific material. 2. Loadings: Steel guardrails and handrails shall meet the following load

requirements: a. Welded construction, fabricated, complete with connectors to

structure designed for a concentrated load of 200 pounds applied at any point and in any direction on the handrail and at the top of the guardrail and in compliance with IBC.

b. Guardrails: Designed and constructed for a load of 50 pounds per lineal foot applied horizontally at the required guardrail height and a simultaneous load of 100 pounds per lineal foot applied vertically downward at the top of the guardrail.

c. Guardrails: Designed and constructed to resist a 200 pound concentrated horizontal load applied on a one foot square area at any point in the system including intermediate rails or other elements serving this purpose.


d. Handrails: Designed and constructed for a load of 50 pounds per lineal foot applied in any direction and in compliance with the IBC.

e. Loading conditions in paragraphs a, b, c and d shall not be applied simultaneously, but each shall be applied to produce maximum stress in each of the respective components or any of the supporting components.

3. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 4. Railing system shall be assembled in a shop in largest sizes for delivery to

site and for installation; to minimize field-splicing and assembly. a. Rails shall be disassembled only as necessary for shipping and

handling. b. Rails shall be marked for re-assembly and coordinated installations. 5. Close open ends of railings, not scheduled to be closed with finials, with

close fitting steel plates welded in place and ground smooth. 6. Welded Connection: Cope intersections of rails and posts, weld joints and

grind smooth. Butt weld end-to-end joints of railings, or use welding connections at fabricator's option.

7. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipes in jigs to produce uniform curves.

a. Maintain profile of pipes throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.

8. Space posts and wall brackets as indicated. If not indicated, 7'-0" maximum center to center.

9. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Provide for railing posts and handrail supports. Provide inserts and sleeves as required for anchorage to concrete or masonry.

10. Provide wall returns at ends of wall mounted rails. F. Miscellaneous Steel Lintels: Provide sizes and shapes as indicated with 8"

minimum bearing each jamb, unless otherwise noted. When lintel is fabricated of two or more members to accommodate thickness of wall, weld adjacent members to form a single unit.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide one 3-1/2” wide angle leg for each

nominal 4” wythe of masonry. G. Miscellaneous Embedded Items: Provide steel members of shapes and size

required per drawings. Equip members to be anchored into concrete or masonry with welded on anchor straps or weld studs as shown or required. Spacing and location of anchors per drawings, but if not otherwise detailed, provide at ends and at maximum intervals of 12" with minimum two per member.

H. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports 1. Provide as indicated on drawings. 2. Fabricate members and assemblies to size, shape and dimensions detailed

with provisions to receive adjacent construction supported by such items. I. Miscellaneous Loose Steel Items: Provide steel shapes such as channels, angles,

plates, protection posts, etc., as indicated on drawings.


J. Accessories: Provide all clips, bolts, anchors, fasteners, etc., as required for

completion of miscellaneous metal work. Type, size and strength as noted or as suitable for conditions and construction involved.

2.04 FINISHES A. Preparation: Grind all exposed cut surfaces as required to remove burrs and

sharp edges. B. Galvanizing 1. Galvanize all ferrous metal items exposed to weather, embedded in

masonry or concrete, and where indicated. 2. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123; provide

minimum of 2 oz. of galvanizing (Grade 85) per sq. ft. of subsurface. Prepare and pretreat surfaces as recommended by galvanizer. Do not weld after galvanizing.

3. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Minimum 79% zinc dust by weight in dried film. TNEMEC COMPANY, INC., No. 92 Tneme-Zinc; ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound by ZRC, Zinc-rich Galvax by ALVIN PRODUCTS.

4. Do not use stainless steel or other non-galvanized fasteners in the assembly of galvanized components.

C. Shop Painting (Non-galvanized Ferrous Metal) 1. Cleaning: After fabrication, clean all items of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt or

other foreign matter. 2. Minimum Surface Preparation: Hand tool cleaning SSPC SP-2 or SP-11.

Where required, blast clean in accordance with SP-6. 3. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC Spec. No. SP-1): Perform where necessary. 4. Paint: One shop coat of paint compatible with the finish paint system.

Section 09 91 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, settings drawings, diagrams, templates,

instructions and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. General


1. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required.

2. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and level. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.

3. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

4. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces

smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

B. Handrail 1. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting

joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or specified herein. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows.

2. Anchor posts to concrete as indicated on the drawings. 3. Weld posts to channels as indicated. 4. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with not less

than 1-1/2" clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required for design loading. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to concrete or masonry with expansion bolts.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.


1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 06 10 50 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center WOOD BLOCKING

SECTION 06 10 50

WOOD BLOCKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Roof blocking, cants and nailers. B. Concealed blocking for support of accessories, equipment, specialty items,

cabinets, fixtures, trim, facing materials and similar type items. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Section 01 81 13. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards 1. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): Treatment Standards. a. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated

Wood 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron

and Steel Hardware b. D3498 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing

Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems 3. American Plywood Association (APA): Grades and Standards 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate

component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

B. Preservative Treated Wood: Submit certification by treating plant stating chemical

and process used and conformance with applicable standards.

D. Submit for LEED Credit documentation.

1. Refer to Section 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements” for additional LEED submittal requirements.


2. Product Data for Credit MRc4: For products having recycled content, provide documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating material costs for each product having recycled content.

3. Product data for Credit MRc5: For products having regional content: a. Provide documentation indicating location of manufacturer of

product. If only a fraction of the material is manufactured regionally, indicate fraction as a percentage product’s total weight.

b. Provide documentation indicating location of extraction, harvest or recovery of raw material in product. If only a fraction of the material is extracted, harvested or recovered regionally, indicated fraction as a percentage of product’s total weight.

c. Include statement indicating material costs for each product having regional content.

4. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: Provide documentation indicating VOC content of product for all adhesives, sealants and mastics applied on-site and interior of the building’s weatherproofing system.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Softwood Lumber: Grading rules and wood species shall conform with the

voluntary Product Standards PS 20 including grading rules of the following associations, as applicable:

1. Southern Pine: Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber,

published by Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 2. Douglas Fir, Western Larch and Hemlock: Western Lumber Grading Rules,

published by Western Wood Products Association (WWPA), Standard Grading and Dressing Rules for West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) or National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA).

3. Western Spruce, Pine and Fir: Western Spruce-Pine-Fir Association (WSPFA) and current Canadian Grading Rules by National Grades Association, Canada.

B. Softwood Plywood: Grading rules and wood species shall conform with Product

Standard PS 1. C. Grade Marks 1. General: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark. 2. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or

name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping, or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

3. Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade trademark of the American Plywood Association.

a. Type, grade, class and identification index. b. Inspection and testing agency mark. 1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store off the ground.


B. Protect from direct contact with the weather. C. Provide proper ventilation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOFTWOOD LUMBER A. Species: Any commercial softwood. 1. Provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by

an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":

B. Moisture Content: Maximum 19% at time of manufacture. C. Dimensions 1. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by the

American Lumber Standards Committee and the rules writing agencies. D. Surfaces: Surface four sides (S4S) unless specified otherwise. E. Grading: Construction grade. 2.02 PLYWOOD A. Plywood Blocking: Provide exterior grade plywood for exterior use and interior

type with exterior glue for interior use. Formaldahyde free. 1. Exterior: APA-CD-EXT. 2. Interior: APA-CD-EXPOSURE I, with exterior glue. 2.03 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.


C. Mark each piece of treated lumber with AWPB Quality Mark designation denoting conformance to the appropriate specification.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark

end or back of each piece.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping,

and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood blocking, furring and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.04 ROUGH HARDWARE A. General: Provide all necessary spikes, screws, nails, bolts and other hardware for

satisfactory erection of work. Except where noted to be stainless steel, provide hot-dipped galvanized finish for hardware exposed to exterior, located in toilet rooms, in contact with treated wood or in contact with roofing or flashing.

1. Nails: ASTM F1667. Common wire nails, except where noted otherwise on

drawings; sizes as noted or specified herein. 2. Attachment to Concrete or Masonry: Metal expansion type shields or

inserts; sizes as required to accommodate applied fastener; spacing as indicated on drawings.

a. "DH" or "Ankr-Tight" by WEJ-IT or equal by RED HEAD or HILTI. b. Sleeve type for masonry. c. Wedge type for concrete. 3. Adhesive Type Anchor Bolts – In Hollow CMU: Chemically grouted

adhesive anchor systems with nylon or stainless steel screen inserts. Use 1/2 inch diameter anchors, unless otherwise noted. a. HIT HY20 Adhesive Anchors, HILTI, INC. b. EPCON System, ITW/RAMSET/RED HEAD c. Chem-Stud Adhesive Anchors, RAWLPLUG COMPANY, INC. d. Simpson Set Epoxy- Tie Adhesive Anchors, SIMPSON STRONG-

TIE COMPANY, INC. 4. Adhesive Type Anchor Bolts - In solid grouted CMU and Concrete:

Chemically grouted adhesive anchor systems. Use ¾ inch diameter anchors, unless otherwise noted. a. HIT HY150 Adhesive Anchors, HILTI, INC. b. EPCON System, ITW/RAMSET/REDHEAD c. Chem-Stud Adhesive Anchors, POWERS FASTENERS, INC. d. Simpson Set Epoxy-Tie Adhesive Anchors, SIMPSON STRONG-

TIE COMPANY, INC. 5. Attachment to Steel Studs: Self tapping screws of sufficient length and

strength to perform the functions for which they are used. 6. Roof Construction a. Wood-to-Wood Attachment: 300 Series stainless steel, flat head. 1) Plywood to Nailers: Minimum #8 x 1-3/4".


b. Wood-to-Metal Deck Attachment: Hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153; machine bolts, locknuts and washers; minimum 3/8" diameter.

c. Wood-to-Concrete Attachment: 300 Series stainless steel expansion anchors as specified above. Minimum 3/8" diameter, length as required for minimum 2" concrete embedment.

2.05 ADHESIVE

A. Adhesives: Water- and mold-resistant formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a

pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch

.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES A. General: Verify that surfaces to receive blocking are prepared to exact grades and

dimensions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Align and anchor blocking with countersunk bolts, washers, nuts, or nails, as

applicable. B. Locate blocking to facilitate installation of finishing materials, fixtures, specialty

items and trim. C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking,

install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 3.03 WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative Treated Wood Products: Provide pressure treatment for all lumber

and plywood as specified hereinbefore.

1. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

a. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.

b. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.


3.04 CLEAN UP A. Clean up debris and cuttings on a regular daily basis. Remove and dispose of

excess materials and debris created by wood blocking. B. Maintain the building and site free of accumulations of cutting and waste materials

in a neat orderly condition acceptable to the Architect. 3.05 WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Do not burn scraps of treated wood. Do not mix treated wood scraps with untreated wood. Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, and disposed of according to local regulations.

END OF SECTION

American Electric Power 06 40 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Service Center ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

SECTION 06 40 00

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide architectural woodwork as indicated and specified. Work includes: 1. Casework. Include the following:

a. Custom type as detailed on the drawings. b. Modular type plastic laminate clad casework and components.

Work includes fabrication and installation of standard base and wall cabinet components, shelving, fillers and panels.

2. Quartz composition countertops. 3. Miscellaneous fasteners and hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Wood Blocking: Section 06 10 50 B. Sustainable Design Requirements: Section 01 81 13. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Standards: Wherever the following abbreviations are used herein, they shall refer

to the corresponding standard: 1. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. 2. AWI: Architectural Woodwork Institute. 3. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 4. P.S.: U.S. Product Standard. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for all items. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations,

large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Provide large scale details. 2. Indicate methods of fabrication, edging, location and construction of joints. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips,

including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections


C. AWI Quality Standards: A photo-copy of the applicable portions of the AWI publication "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", latest edition, shall be submitted with each set of shop drawings.

1. Each copy must be marked to clearly show all details, specifications and

finishes proposed for this work. D. Submit samples of all finish materials. E. Manufacturer's product data describing type and quality of finish materials and

hardware.

F. LEED Submittals

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that products contain no urea formaldehyde.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Portions of Casework: Include surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed. Bottoms of casework more than 4 feet above floor and tops less than 6 feet 6 inches above floor shall be considered as exposed. Visible members in open cases or behind glass doors also shall be considered as exposed portions.

B. Semi-Exposed Portions of Casework: Includes those members behind opaque

doors, such as shelves, divisions, interior faces of ends, case back, drawer sides, backs and bottoms, and back face of doors. Tops of casework 6 feet 6 inches or more above floor shall be considered semi-exposed.

C. Concealed Portions of Casework: Include sleepers, web frames, dust panels,

and other surfaces not usually visible after installation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator qualifications: A firm specializing in the fabrication of millwork with a

minimum of 5 years experience and a satisfactory record of performance on projects of comparable size and quality. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.


B. Installation: Performed only by skilled finish carpenters with a minimum of 3 years experience in installing custom millwork similar to that required for this project.

C. All solid surface material type work shall be performed by a Manufacturer Certified

fabricator. D. Provide lumber factory marked with type, grade, mill and grading agency

identification on concealed surfaces. Omit marking and submit mill certificates for materials to receive transparent finishes that cannot be marked on a concealed surface.

E. Quality Grade: Materials and fabrication shall be "custom grade" in accordance

with "Quality Standard Illustrated," of the AWI conforming to the following sections: 1. Section 100: Solid wood members. 2. Section 200: Plywood and particleboard. 3. Section 400: Casework and tops. 4. Section 1700: Installation of architectural woodwork. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork materials and items during delivery, storage and handling to

prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork materials and items until concrete, masonry, painting,

grinding and other similar wet work has been completed and is thoroughly dry, outside door openings are permanently watertight, exterior windows are glazed and, in case of temperature dropping below 60o F., until temporary heating and ventilating systems are in operation.

C. Store materials in dry, well-ventilated spaces with constant minimum temperature

of 60o F., and maximum relative humidity of 55%. 1. Do not store adhesives with materials that have a high capacity to absorb

VOC emissions (i.e., materials which are woven, fibrous or porous in nature, such as acoustical ceilings, carpets, textiles, etc.).

2. Do not store adhesives in occupied spaces. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide and maintain a constant temperature and humidity before, during and after

installation as required to maintain optimum moisture content of installed materials.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.


1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other

construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and

other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Lumber 1. Provide lumber surfaced four sides (S4S) and worked to profiles and

patterns shown. Nominal sizes are as shown, except where detailed dimensions are indicated.

2. Moisture Content: Provide materials kiln-dried to maximum moisture content of 6% complying with AWI Standards, Section 100-G-3.

3. Softwood Lumber: Comply with PS-20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable rules of grading and inspection agency for species indicated.

a. Western Red Cedar, Ponderosa Pine, White Pine: Western Lumber Grading Rules, published by Western Wood Products Association (WWPA), or Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber, No. 16, published by West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).

4. Species: Fabricator's option. B. Softwood Plywood: Thickness as indicated. Formaldehyde free. 1. Concealed Use: APA-BB-EXPOSURE I, with exterior glue (Plyform). 2. Comply with PS-1, "Construction and Industrial Plywood". C. Particle Board (Substrate for Laminate Surfaces): High density industrial grade

with a minimum density of 45 pounds per cubic foot and a moisture content between 9% maximum and 6% minimum, meeting or exceeding ANSI A208.1 or ASTM D1037; formaldehyde-free. ASTM E84, Class A.

1. FLAKEBOARD Vesta FR Particleboard 2. SIERRAPINE Encore FR 3. PANEL SOURCE INTERNATIONAL Pyroblock Platinum Particleboard


D. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Thickness as specified unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Maximum moisture content of 8%. Formaldehyde free. Meet the following minimum standards:

1. Internal Bond: 90 psi. 2. Modulus of Rupture: 2,500 psi. 3. Screw Holding Power: 325 pounds. 4. Density: Minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot. 5. Fire Rating: ASTM E84 Class A a. Smoke Developed: 95 b. Flame Spread: 15 6. Manufacturers a. FLAKEBOARD Vesta FR MDF b. SIERRAPINE Medite FR c. PANEL SOURCE INTERNATIONAL Pyroblock Platinum MDF E. Plastic Laminate: Conform to the requirements of the National Electrical

Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Publication Number LD-3. Plastic laminate shall be FORMICA, PIONITE, NEVAMAR or WILSONART.

1. Colors, Patterns and Finishes: As indicated on the drawings. 1. General Purpose Grade: 0.05 inches thick. 2. Backing Sheet Grade: 0.02 inches thick. 3. Cabinet Liner: 0.02 inches thick. F. Hardware Items: All exposed hardware to be brushed chrome finish. 1. Drawer Slides: Self-closing, side mounting type with nylon tire, steel ball-

bearing rollers. Manufactured by BLUM, GRASS, AMEROCK, KNAPE & VOGT; ACCURIDE. Load capacity as follows:

a. 75 pounds: Drawers up to 3-1/2 inches deep: Similar to ACCURIDE Series 2132.

b. 100 pounds: Drawers up to 8 inches deep: Similar to ACCURIDE Series 2832.

2. Concealed Hinges: European style, self-closing, type as required for construction. HAFELE; GRASS; PRAMETE; BLUM.

3. Drawer and Door Pulls: Wire pull, 5/16" diameter x 3-1/3" long x 1-5/16" extension. STANLEY, GRASS, BLUM, HAFELE.

4. Adjustable Cabinet Shelf Supports – Spoon Type: 5mm; nickel plated. 5. Additional Items: As indicated on the casework details. G. Edging Materials

1. 1mm PVC banding, machine applied. 2. 3mm PVC banding, machine applied and machine profiled to 3 mm

radius. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect. H. Nails


1. Provide steel nails with diamond point for soft woods and blunt point for hardwoods.

2. Interior Work - Finishing Nails: 6d for 3/4" material; 9d or 10d for 5/4" material; and 12d for 1-1/2" material.

I. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

J. Quartz Composition Material: Non porous, scratch and high temperature resistant

crushed quartz composition.

1. Thicknesses: As indicated. 2. Flexural properties: ASTM D 790, ASTM C 880 3. Compression strength: ASTM C 170 4. Certified food contact: NSF/ANSI 51 Certified.

5. Surface burning characteristics - ASTM E 84: Class I or A, and as follows:

a. Flame spread: <25. b. Smoke developed: <25.

6. Joints: Provide watertight color matched, fused joints as recommended by manufacturer.

7. Edge Treatment: As detailed on drawings. Ease all exposed edges not otherwise detailed.

8. Colors: As indicated. 9. Manufacturers/Products a. Basis of Design: Zodiac by DU PONT

b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Material manufactured by other manufacturers will be considered if materials meet the requirements of the Basis of Design and the pattern/color is an acceptable match as approved by the Architect prior to bid opening. These additionally approved manufacturers will be included by Addendum. An unacceptable pattern or color match is reason for disapproval of product and manufacturer. No substitutions will be considered after bid opening.

K. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particle board or MDF with surface of thermally

fused, melamine impregnated decorative paper complying with Laminating Materials Association (LMA) SAT-1. Formaldehyde free.

2.02 CASEWORK FABRICATION A. General: Except as specified hereinafter, fabricate all work in accordance with AWI

quality standards as specified. Work not specified with a level of quality shall be not less than "Custom" quality per AWI.

1. "Flush Overlay" design as shown in AWI Architectural Casework Details. 2. Provide complete factory-fabricated and finished components which, when

assembled on site, will provide an integral system of storage and work


surfaces. 3. Make cut-outs and other provisions for the work of other trades and as

indicated or required for installation. 4. All particle board panels to be balanced construction. B. Subbases: Provide continuous plywood closed bases capable of being leveled to

meet site conditions; subbase to be unfinished to receive resilient base. See Section 09 65 00.

C. Base Cabinets 1. Sides and Bottoms: Construct of 3/4" thick particle board with interior of

cabinet finished with cabinet liner or polyester laminate. Provide balanced constructed panels with neutral colored backer sheet at concealed conditions and finish laminate at exposed conditions.

2. Backs: Standard 1/4" prefinished hardboard. Install in housed joints in surrounding panels. All backs exposed to view to be neutral colored except where indicated to match vertical color surfaces.

Rear, unexposed side of backs to receive continuous hot melt glue at joint between back and sides/top/bottom for sealing against moisture and vermin, and to further contribute to cabinet stability.

3. Frame: Provide frame construction of 3/4" thick lumber dadoed into sides at the following:

a. As sub-top. 4. Shelves: Provide fixed and adjustable shelves with particle board core

where indicated on drawings. Provide shelves adjustable on 1/2" centers. Except for exposed shelving conditions, finish shelves with neutral colored polyester laminate or liner grade laminate

a. Shelves under 36" wide: 3/4" thick, except all open shelves to be 1" thick.

b. Shelves 36" to 42" wide: 1" thick. c. Edges: 3mm PVC on Front & Back Edges, 1mm PVC on Side

Edges. 6. Finish a. Casework Edges: Except where cabinet design requires matching

laminate edges, finish front edges of sides, frames, and bottom with 3mm PVC machine applied edge.

b. Exposed Exterior of Casework: Finish exposed portion of cabinet with vertical grade plastic laminate in solid color finish as selected by Architect.

c. Interior of Casework 1) Semi-Concealed (behind doors): Neutral colored polyester

or cabinet liner laminate. 2) Exposed: Vertical grade laminate to match exposed

casework. D. Drawers 1. Body: Construct of fiberboard with polyester laminate finish on faces and

PVC on exposed top edges. Subfronts, sides and back fabricated with


shouldered lock joint or dado construction and routed to receive bottom. a. Sides and Back: 1/2" thick. b. Subfront: 5/8" thick. 2. Bottom: 1/4" thick prefinished hardboard, housed and glued, into front,

sides and back. Underside of drawer to receive continuous hot melt glue at joint between bottom and back/sides/front for sealing and rigidity. Reinforce drawer bottoms as required with intermediate spreaders.

3. Front: 3/4" thick particle board front finished with vertical grade plastic

laminate on exposed face and cabinet liner laminate on interior side; total thickness 13/16" thick. Except where cabinet design requires self edge matching laminate edges (see cabinet design), edges to be finished with 1mm PVC.

a. Where adjacent door sizes require core thickness in excess of 3/4", provide drawer fronts to match door thickness. Verify conditions with Architect.

4. Install on proper sized slides specified herein. E. Doors: Construct and finish same as drawer fronts. F. Wall Cabinets: Construct and finish same as base cabinets except provide suitable

hang rail of 3/4" plywood secured to cabinet frame. 1. Where wall cabinets close to soffit or ceiling, provide fascia scribed to

conditions and leveled on bottom to permit level installation of cabinets. Finish of fascia to match cabinet.

G. Design 1. Configuration of casework is indicated on drawings. 2. The detailing and design required to provide rigid, solid and structurally

adequate casework is the responsibility of the fabricator; within parameters of AWI specifications and as approved by Architect.

3. The following conditions require special attention: a. Casework exceeding 42" in width between supports. b. Sink and/or equipment cutouts and supports. c. Countertops exceeding 24" unsupported. d. Wall and Ceiling Mounted Casework: Provide integral framing in

casework of size, strength, and in locations which allow unit to be screw attached to proper substrate and remain rigidly in place.

2.03 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate to profiles, sizes and edge conditions indicated on drawings. Back and

side splashes, where indicated, to be fused to top to ensure watertight joint. 1. Ease edges as indicated on the drawings. Fabricate edges with solid

surface material, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Complete fabrication and other work before shipment to site to the greatest

extent practicable. Dissamble components where necessary for fitting at


site. Provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming and fitting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition architectural woodwork materials, items and products to average

prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Install blocking and anchoring devices built into substrates for anchorage of

architectural woodwork. C. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of

time substrates are to be built. D. Before installing woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and back

priming. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Quality: Comply with AWI Section 1700. B. Install woodwork materials and products plumb, level, true and straight with no

distortion. Shim as required using concealed shims. C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair

damaged finish at cuts. D. Install countertops level, true to alignment, accurately fit to wall conditions and

securely fastened to base units and other support systems as indicated. 1. Solid Surface Type Countertops: Form joints using tinted adhesive as

recommended by top manufacturer. 2. Tolerances a. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4

inch b. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than

one-fourth of nominal joint width.

maximum.

c. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch

d. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed

difference between planes of adjacent units.

1/64-inch

difference between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.

E. Casework: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Tolerance: Level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.


F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates.

Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nail for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged and defective millwork to eliminate functional and visual defects.

Where not possible to repair properly, replace millwork as directed by the Architect. 1. Chipped, scratched or patched plastic laminate will not be accepted and

must be replaced. B. Clean hardware, lubricate and make final adjustments for proper operation. C. Protect installed work during remaining construction operations. D. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop applied

finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. E. Cover completed casework with 4-mil polyethylene film protective enclosure,

applied in a manner that will allow easy removal and without damage to woodwork or adjoining work. Remove cover immediately before the time of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION